Author: Nik Ranger

Best Modern Warfare classes & attachment guides for M4, MP5, AK-47, more There are a lot of viable weapons to use in Call of Duty: Modern Warfare, so we’ve put together guides for some of the more popular ones. Our guides include the best classes, loadouts, and attachment combinations for the M4A1, MP5, MP7, P90, AK-47, RAM-7, Holger-26 and more. One of the keys to succeeding in Call of Duty multiplayer has been to build the best classes and loadouts. With Modern Warfare, Infinity Ward took weapon customization to a whole new level by including dozens of attachments for each gun, giving players control the likes of which had never been seen before in CoD history. All of that customization freedom, however, can also cause confusion and uncertainty, as it becomes less and less clear which combination of attachments can be considered “the best” for each gun. That’s where we come in. We’ve taken the liberty to put together guides for some of the oft-used weapons in Modern Warfare, each one offering the five best classes to build for each gun. Additionally, not only does each guide include the best attachments to use, but also the best loadouts overall, including Secondaries, Perks, Lethals, Tacticals, and Field Upgrades. The classes have also all been fitted for certain play-styles, such as run-and-gun, slow and long-range, objective-based, and more. Assault Rifles 5 best M4A1 classes and attachment loadouts Since the moment that Modern Warfare first released on October 25, the M4A1 assault rifle has been the go-to weapon for a majority of the player-base. Its versatility and agility allow it to be used effectively at virtually all ranges, which is why it’s also solidified as the leading AR in competitive play as well. 5 best AK-47 classes and attachment loadouts While not as popular as the M4, the AK-47 has also proven to be a dominant force when it comes to assault rifles. Its raw power is unmatched, even by the M4, which is why a lot of players have taken a liking to it. The great thing about this gun is that the attachments available for it, when paired correctly, can mold it into almost completely different weapons, such as the AK74u SMG and RPK LMG, neither of which are available as standalone options. 5 best RAM-7 classes and attachment loadouts The RAM-7, along with the Holger-26, were the first post-launch weapons added as part of Season 1 in Modern Warfare. The RAM-7 has turned out to be a gun that most have expressed approval of, mainly because of how fast it can shred through enemies. Because Activision have ditched the purchasable DLC model of past CoDs, the RAM-7 is free to everyone on all platforms which reach Tier 31 of Season 1 Battle Pass‘ free portion. SMGs 5 best MP5 classes and attachment loadouts Just like how the M4 has been the most popular assault rifle in multiplayer, the MP5 has been the SMG that most players have chosen as their go-to from that weapon class. Not only is it incredibly potent at close-range, which is what an SMG is supposed to be, it’s also reliable at medium-range as well, and it’s been this hybrid nature that has drawn the interest of a lot of players. 5 best MP7 classes and attachment loadouts The MP5’s dominance in its class has made it difficult for other SMGs to emerge as meta weapons, but the MP7 is one that has managed to dig a niche for itself. It’s potent in close-quarter gunfights, probably more so than any other SMG, and it actually can be molded into a decent mid-range weapon as well with the right attachments. 5 best P90 classes and attachment loadouts While not heralded as much as the MP5 and MP7, the P90 is a powerful SMG in its own right, especially devastating in close-quarter engagements. However, it isn’t limited to only shorter-range gunfights, as certain combinations of attachments can make it viable for all sorts of play-styles and situations. 5 best Striker 45 classes and attachment loadouts Introduced as part of the Season 2 Battle Pass, the Striker 45 is the Modern Warfare series’ 2020 rendition of the iconic UMP45 SMG from MW2. One of the better submachine guns in the game in terms of long-range viability, the Striker 45 is versatile enough to be used in a variety of playstyles. LMGs 5 best Holger-26 classes and attachment loadouts In addition to the RAM-7, the Holger-26 was the other new weapon added as part of the Season 1 content launch in Modern Warfare. Don’t let the fact that it’s an LMG fool you; the weapon was designed specifically to be adaptable to a variety of play-styles. With the right attachment combinations, it can be molded into an SMG for aggressive play, a longer-range build, and even a replica of the classic G35C assault rifle from older Modern Warfare games. Bonus Guides 15 “secret” weapons you can build in Gunsmith One of the biggest perks of having so many attachments for each weapon is that the Gunsmith feature in Modern Warfare can be used to build 15 guns that technically don’t exist in the game as options on their own. Certain weapons, when equipped with specific attachments, can be altered enough where they both look and function like other popular guns that have featured in past CoD titles. Some of the weapons that can be built include AK74u, RPK LMG, AK-12, M16, M21, and more. 5 best Overkill classes and loadouts Overkill has always been a great Perk in Call of Duty, even more so in Modern Warfare. Since there is no pick-10 system in this game, classes that have Overkill can feature two primary weapons maxed out to five attachments each without having to cut down on the other things in the class. Thus, players can build loadouts featuring guns that complement each other, such as an SMG with a sniper rifle, an assault rifle with a shotgun, an LMG with an SMG, and more. This article was last updated on January 28, 2020 at 8:15 PM EST.

Best Modern Warfare 3 ranked play loadouts for all playstyles ActivisionRanked Play is finally here in Modern Warfare 3, giving competitive players the chance to work their way up the ranks, climb the skill divisions, and test themselves against players of the same level. Here are the best loadouts you should have when you first load in. Ranked Play hit MW3 alongside the big Season 1 Reloaded update, which made a number of big changes in both multiplayer and Warzone. It’s felt like a long time coming for CDL fans and those who just want to test themselves against a level playing field, and you’ll want to make sure you’re on top of the meta straight away. Luckily, if you’ve been playing much Modern Warfare 3 since launch, you’ll be familiar with the best guns — but here’s how you should be building them out, especially as some weapons and attachments are banned in competitive rules. Best MW3 ranked play classes Best Assault Rifle — MCW Muzzle: T51R Billeted Brake – Barrel: MCW Cyclone Long Barrel – Optic: Slate Reflector – Stock: RB Regal Heavy Stock – Rear Grip: RB Claw PSL Grip – The MCW is a fairly versatile assault rifle and this build should be optimal in most situations If you’re looking for something slightly faster and with more mobility, you can replace the Rear Grip with the XTEN Phantom-5 Handstop underbarrel, but we would recommend trying both out — as well as any other attachments you think could be worthwhile — to find what works best for you. Best Submachine Gun — Rival 9 Muzzle: Purifier Muzzle Brake – Barrel: Rival-C Clearshot Barrel – Stock: MTZ Marauder Stock – Underbarrel: Bruen Pivot Vertical Grip – Rear Grip: Rival Vice Assault Grip – This build maximizes recoil control on the Rival 9 without sacrificing too much speed. If you would prefer more speed, though you could change the stock to the Close Quarters Stock, or alternatively, use the 9mm High Velocity rounds instead of a barrel. Best Sniper — Katt-AMR Barrel: Perdition 24″ Short Barrel – Stock: Tactical Stock Pad – Ammunition: .50 Val High Velocity – Bolt: Ephemeral Quickbolt – Rear Grip: Phantom Grip – Our first word of advice with sniping in ranked play is this: Unless you’re seriously talented, don’t try to be the guy hitting clips in ranked. That said, in Search and Destroy, or for some early breaks in respawn modes, a sniper shouldn’t be ruled out, and this is the class we recommend, as it allows you to play quickly while maintaining accuracy. For the most part, the equipment and perks you use are going to be identical across classes, but the Field Upgrade might be dependent on what you and your team need and how you play. We recommend: Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Stun Grenade – Field Upgrade: Dead Silence OR Trophy System – Gloves: Quick-Grip Gloves – Boots: Lightweight Boots – Gear: EOD Padding – The main change we’d recommend considering between maps is changing out the Lightweight Boots for Covert Sneakers, effectively providing Dead Silence, which will be particularly useful in Search and Destroy. Obviously, this list isn’t exhaustive, and only presents the very best possible classes that you’ll see pro players using in the Call of Duty League — so don’t feel limited in your choices, as you might just find a meta-breaking gun to destroy your opponents and climb through the skill divisions.

Best MW3 Assault Rifle loadouts in Season 5 Reloaded ActivisionAssault rifles are always a strong option in Modern Warfare 3, as they provide the perfect balance of damage, ease of use, and effective range. This is a big reason why assault rifles have always been the most used gun class in Call of Duty. These versatile weapons are competitive on every map in the franchise in a way that no other class can match. This year’s game is no exception to this rule, with ARs making up a large bulk of the most used guns in MW3. Regardless of whether you’re playing casual or Ranked Play, an assault rifle is never a bad option. That is if you stick to using top-tier assault rifles that dictate the meta. After all, they aren’t all built equally, and some aren’t even viable. Keeping on top of this can be tricky, especially with the constant buffs and nerfs that see the meta change every season. Best Assault Rifle loadouts in Modern Warfare 3 These are the five best assault rifle loadouts to use in Season 5 Reloaded to make sure your classes are as competitive as possible: 1. SVA 545 Best SVA 545 MW3 Loadout Muzzle: Quartermaster Suppressor – Barrel: STV Precision Barrel – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Stock: Mane V6 Stock – Underbarrel: DR-6 Handstop – The SVA 545 is simply the most complete primary weapon in MW3 It has a fast TTK, low recoil, and incredible range, while also offering solid enough mobility and handling to do the job. This meta AR is the only weapon in its class with no real cons, making it comfortably the best assault rifle in the game, a title it has retained for several seasons. 2. Holger 556 (JAK Backsaw Kit) Best Holger 556 MW3 Loadout Conversion Kit: JAK Backsaw Kit – Laser: DXS Flash 90 – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Stock: RB Addle Assault Stock – Rear Grip: Morn-20 Grip – The JAK Backsaw Kit turns the Holger 556 into a truly meta-defining gun. With this conversion kit equipped, it has an unbelievable TTK of 255 ms, which is by far the fastest of any gun on this list. It also comes with a 100 Round Drum, yet also surprisingly fast handling and mobility. You’ll have to get used to its bizarre double-barreled configuration, but otherwise, this is an incredible weapon. 3. BP50 Best BP50 MW3 Loadout Muzzle: Quartermaster Suppressor – Barrel: Lore-9 Heavy Barrel – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Stock: MOAT-40 Stock – Underbarrel: DR-6 Handstop – While the JAK Revenger Kit deals more damage, the Aftermarket Part’s hefty nerf back in Season 4 means you are better off running the base gun these days. Thankfully, the regular BP50 is excellent, offering superior mobility and handling to every other assault rifle. Additionally, it has a TTK of just 280 ms, making the BP50 one of the best options to use in Season 5 Reloaded. 4. STG44 Best STG44 MW3 Loadout Muzzle: Quartermaster Suppressor – Barrel: Factory Short Barrel – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Stock: DR79 Combo Stock – Underbarrel: DR-6 Handstop – The STG44 was added in Season 5, and it immediately proved itself to be a top-tier gun. It effectively serves as a superior version of the MCW, offering comparable accuracy and range but a faster TTK. For those who like to hang back, control lanes, and play slow, this is now the best gun for the job. It won’t be for everyone, but certain types of players will love using this powerful assault rifle. 5. MTZ-556 Best MTZ-556 MW3 Loadout Muzzle: Quartermaster Suppressor – Barrel: MTZ VLDL-3568 Barrel – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Underbarrel: DR-6 Handstop – Rear Grip: Bruen TR-24 Assault Grip – The MTZ-556 is perhaps the most underrated assault rifle in Modern Warfare 3. It lacks the long-range capabilities of the other entries on this list, but that isn’t as much of a concern for multiplayer, where most maps are on the smaller side. The MTZ-556 has excellent damage and manageable recoil control, yet also offers mobility comparable to an SMG. It’s the perfect choice for those who love to run and gun. All MW3 Assault Rifles ranked There are currently 10 assault rifles in Modern Warfare 3, with the STG44 being the latest addition. This modernized rendition of the iconic World War II weapon quickly established itself as one of the best weapons, largely thanks to its incredible accuracy. Here’s every assault rifle ranked from best to worst, assuming you are using the strongest loadout possible for each weapon: SVA 545 – Holger 556 – STG44 – BP50 – MTZ-556 – MCW – BAL-27 – RAM-7 – DG-56 – FR 5.56 – Be sure to watch this space, as MW3’s meta will shift again. In the meantime, check out MW3’s full map pool, complete weapons list, as well as the best PC settings and controller settings to make your gameplay as smooth as possible.

Best MW2 weapons: Ultimate tier list with the best loadouts (Season 6) ActivisionThe Call of Duty MW2 meta shifts regularly, with weapons frequently adjusted for balance. Our comprehensive Modern Warfare 2 tier list is here to guide you through the latest changes, ensuring you remain competitive. Throughout its history, Modern Warfare 2 has witnessed diverse metas in Warzone and multiplayer modes, with different weapon classes like assault rifles and SMGs at times dominating the 6v6 landscape. The release of new guns and older weapons being rebalanced makes it difficult to keep track of what guns are top-tier. Failing to do so can leave your loadouts outdated and put you at a serious disadvantage on the battlefield. To help you out and make sure you’re using strong loadouts we’ve put together this list of the best MW2 weapons to use in Season 6. Contents Top 5 meta MW2 weapons, ranked – What is the best gun in Modern Warfare 2? – List of all guns in Modern Warfare 2 – Assault Rifles – SMGs – Sniper Rifles – Marksman Rifles – Shotguns – LMGs – Battle Rifles – Best meta Modern Warfare 2 weapons, ranked 5. Kastov 762 Attachments Muzzle: Tempus GH50 – Barrel: KAS-10 584mm Barrel – Laser: Schlager PEQ BOX IV – Optic: Cronen Mini Pro – Stock: Kastov-Rama – Perks Base Perk 1: Scavenger – Base Perk 2: Bomb Squad – Bonus Perk: Fast Hands – Ultimate Perk: Ghost – Although it’s not quite the best assault rifle these days the Kastov 762 is still an excellent choice to use in multiplayer. It offers a highly competitive TTK and impressive range while its handling remains fast enough to get work done up close. After a couple of nerfs the Kastov 762 is harder to use than before requiring you to mix an upper torso shot for a three-shot kill. Those that have the required mechanical skill though will dominate using this iconic AR. 4. Fennec 45 Attachments Laser: VLK LZR 7mW – Stock: Agile Assault-7 Stock – Underbarrel: Phase-3 Grip – Magazine: 45 Round Mag – Rear Grip: Fennec Stippled Grip – Perks Base Perk 1: Bomb Squad – Base Perk 2: Battle Hardened – Bonus Perk: Resupply – Ultimate Perk: Ghost – Season 6 sees the Fennec 45 continue its strong form after returning to the meta last season. The fast-firing SMG previously dominated Warzone’s and MW2’s meta, but substantial nerfs knocked it out of contention. However, an increase in the weapon’s maximum damage has made it relevant once again. We recommend using a build that compensates for its fast firing rate with a larger magazine while also maximizing mobility and ADS speed. Be aware that this isn’t the easiest gun to use and will require some practice, but the payoff is more than worth it. 3. Vaznev 9-K Attachments Muzzle: Bruen Pendulum – Underbarrel: FSS Sharkfin 90 – Stock: Otrezat Stock – Rear Grip: True-Tac Grip – Laser: Schlager PEQ BOX IV – Perks Base Perk 1: Double Time – Base Perk 2: Battle Hardened – Bonus Perk: Fast Hands – Ultimate Perk: High Alert – Multiple nerfs to its maximum damage range have hurt the Vaznev-9K a little, but it’s still the best overall SMG in MW2. Its low recoil, ability to challenge at mid-range, and impressive mobility make it a wonderfully well-rounded gun that can adapt to most situations. Truthfully, the SMG class is pretty stacked so if you don’t like using the Vaznev the Lachmann Sub, VEL 46, and even the BAS-P are all great alternatives that some players may prefer the feel of. Even so, this just about remains the king of submachine guns thanks to its superior versatility. 2. M4 Attachments Muzzle: RF Crown 50 – Barrel: 11.5″ T-H4 Barrel – Optic: Cronen Mini Pro – Stock: Tempus P80 Strike Stock – Rear Grip: Sakin ZX Grip – Perks Base Perk 1: Scavenger – Base Perk 2: Tracker – Bonus Perk: Fast Hands – Ultimate Perk: Ghost – A jack of all trades but a master of none, the M4 provides a perfect mix of everything but doesn’t necessarily jump off the page. The easy-to-use AR will come in clutch for multiple types of engagements but still falls a little short of the TAQ-56 regarding firepower. It’s clear to see why the M4 was one of the first guns banned in Ranked Play. It’s unmatched consistency makes it hard to compete with. Even if it doesn’t quite have the TAQ’s raw firepower it is a very strong competitor that some MW2 players will prefer. 1. TAQ-56 Attachments Muzzle: Komodo Heavy – Barrel: 17.5″ Tundra Pro Barrel – Optic: Cronen Mini Pro – Underbarrel: FTAC Ripper 56 – Rear Grip: Demo Cleanshot Grip – Perks Base Perk 1: Battle Hardened – Base Perk 2: Scavenger – Bonus Perk: Fast Hands – Ultimate Perk: Ghost – Ever since Ranked Play was released the TAQ-56 has remained the by far the most popular gun in Modern Warfare 2. It’s easy to see why as MW2’s rendition of the SCAR-L offers the perfect combination of low recoil and incredible damage across all ranges. Using stats provided by sym.gg, the TAQ 56 beats out the M4, Kastov 762, and Kastov 74-U in TTK speed from most ranges relevant in multiplayer matches. Combine that with its ease of use and this is the standout weapon in both 6v6 and 4v4. What is the best gun in Modern Warfare 2? As showcased above, we believe the TAQ-56 is the best weapon in Modern Warfare 2. It’s a bit of a boring pick as the AR has been relevant and a part of the competitive season since Season 1, but no other gun really comes close when it comes to sheer ability. Be aware that every playstyle, map, and game mode naturally favors certain types of weapons, so the TAQ-56 might not be the best gun for you. Even so, it’s the best all-around weapon that offers a bit of everything. All guns in Modern Warfare 2 Modern Warfare 2 Assault Rifles Modern Warfare 2 SMGs Modern Warfare 2 Sniper Rifles Modern Warfare 2 Marksman Rifles Modern Warfare 2 Shotguns Modern Warfare 2 LMGS Modern Warfare 2 Battle Rifles Modern Warfare 2 Handguns This tier list will change a lot as balance updates for Modern Warfare 2 are rolled out and new weapons are added. Best Warzone weapons: Ultimate tier list with meta loadouts | Call of Duty 2024: Early leaks, concept art, Warzone 2.0, Treyarch & more | Call of Duty: Modern Warfare III — Everything we know | Best M4 Warzone 2 loadout | Best Modern Warfare 2 weapons: Ultimate tier list with the best classes | Modern Warfare 2 best settings on PC for FPS, graphics, visibility, more

Best Modern Warfare 2 SMGs: loadouts, attachments & perks ActivisionModern Warfare 2’s SMGs are a varied bunch, but with so many to choose from it can be hard to know which are the strongest and how should they should be used. Here are the best MW2 SMGs, alongside recommended loadouts. Modern Warfare 2 is just about settling down into a tangible meta, with players naturally gravitating toward certain weapons, attachments and play styles. As ever, there’s a diverse and varied pool of submachine guns for players to wade through. Each has its own strengths and weaknesses, but which are the best to use in the Season One Reloaded era? Here, we’re ranking the best SMGs in Modern Warfare 2, from nine all the way down to one. We’ll also run through our recommended builds for each to ensure you can get the most out of your SMG, whichever you take into a game with you. Best SMGs in MW2 9. VEL 46 Best MW2 VEL 46 Loadout Muzzle: FTAC Castle Comp – Barrel: Schlager RV-8 – Laser: Schlager ULO-66 Laser – Stock: VEL A-568 Collapsed – Underbarrel: Edge-47 Grip – The VEL 46 is the MP7 from CoD history. However, it doesn’t hit nearly as hard as some MP7s of the past and, resultantly, we can’t really recommend it all that much. A buff is needed in the near future. 8. MX9 Best MW2 MX9 Loadout Muzzle: Forge DX90-F – Barrel: 508mm Rear Guard – Optic: SZ Mini – Comb: FTAC C11 Riser – Magazine: 32 Round Mag – The MX9 is easy to use thanks its complete lack of recoil. Unfortunately, it comes with mags that are too small and range that leaves a lot to be desired. 7. BAS-P Best MW2 BAS-P Loadout Barrel: 10.5″ Bruen Typhon – Laser: VLK LZR 7MW – Underbarrel: FSS Sharkfin 90 – Rear Grip: D37 Grip – Magazine: 50 Round Drum – The BAS-P has a decent TTK thanks to its fast fire-rate. Hitting shots regularly is a challenge though, as it comes with considerable kick that you’ll need to learn in order to master. 6. PDSW 528 Best MW2 PDSW 528 Loadout Muzzle: Spiral V3.5 Flash Hider – Barrel: 9.5″ Duke-30 – Stock: CQB Stock – Rail: Integrated Reflex Rail – Ammunition: 5.7x28mm Overpressured – The PDSW’s major strength is in having 50-round magazines by default, meaning you won’t need to reload very frequently. It may be a jack-of-all-trades but it really is the master of none. 5. Fennec 45 Best MW2 Fennec 45 Loadout Muzzle: Bruen Cubic Comp – Optic: Cronen Mini Pro – Rear Grip: Fennec Stippled Grip – Underbarrel: FFS Sharkfin 90 – Stock: FTAC Stock Cap – Where it dominates Warzone 2 right now, the Fennec’s kick and frequent need to reload definitely hold it back to a greater extent in multiplayer. If you’re up close though, there’s no weapon you’d rather have. 4. Minibak Best MW2 Minibak Loadout Muzzle: XTEN RR-40 – Barrel: BAK-9 279mm Barrel – Laser: STOVL DR Laser Box – Stock: Otrezat Stock – Rear Grip: True-Tac Grip – The Minibak hits hard, has a large mag, and handles well. The only thing holding it back from a top three spot on this list is its fire-rate, which leaves you vulnerable to being outgunned by other SMGs up close. 3. FSS Hurricane Best MW2 FSS Hurricane Loadout Barrel: FSS Cannonade 16″ Barrel – Muzzle: XTEN Razor Comp – Underbarrel: VX Pineapple Vert Grip – Rear Grip: Saxin ZX Grip – Stock: Demo Fade Pro Stock – The FSS Hurricane, much like the PDSW, is a bit of an all-rounder in multiplayer. It comes in third thanks to its lack of recoil, handling, mobility and overall consistency. 2. Lachmann Sub Best MW2 Lachmann Sub Loadout Muzzle: XTEN Razor Comp – Barrel: L38 Falcon 226mm Barrel – Stock: No Stock – Ammunition: 9mm Hollow Point – Underbarrel: Lockgrip Precision 40 – The Lachmann Sub – or the MP5 – is reliable at close and medium ranges, with a strong TTK and very good handling. There’s a bit of recoil here but a bit of practice will be enough to get you laser-beaming opponents with this SMG behemoth. 1. Vaznev-9K Best MW2 Vaznev-9K Loadout Muzzle: Lockshot KT85 – Laser: Schlager Peq Box IV – Optic: Cronen Mini Red Dot – Stock: Otrezat Stock – Rear Grip: True-Tac Grip – The Vaznev-9K is the best SMG in Modern Warfare 2 by virtue of its rapid TTK. Its fire-rate isn’t the best but high damage and a lack of recoil mean it’s comfortably the most reliable SMG in the game. There’s a reason all the pros are rocking it in CDL matches. That rounds off our list of the best SMGs in Modern Warfare 2. Be sure to check back in the future because as the game’s meta changes, so will this list!

Best MW2 Ranked Play Loadouts ActivisionModern Warfare 2 Ranked Play brings out the true competition to Call of Duty. It requires high skill and the best loadouts possible while sticking to the mode’s tight restrictions. Here are the best loadouts to use in MW2 Ranked Play. Infinity Ward introduced its own iteration of Ranked Play as part of MW2’s Season 2 update. Ranked brings a much different experience than public matches or the CDL Moshpit Playlist. Players can earn rewards and reach new Skill Divisions by winning matches. The game mode uses the Call of Duty League’s official rule set, meaning many guns, equipment, and killstreaks are completely banned. In order to reach the highest Ranks and Skill Divisions, you need the best loadout. Here are the best loadouts to use in MW2 Ranked Play. Contents Best Ranked Play Primary weapons – Best Ranked Play Secondary weapons – Best Ranked Play Perks and equipment items – Best Ranked Play loadout: Field upgrades – Best Ranked Play Primary weapons TAQ-56 Muzzle: FJX Fulcrum Pro – Barrel: 17.5″ Tundra Pro Barrel – Underbarrel: Edge-47 Grip – Stock: TV Xline Pro – Rear Grip: Demo Cleanshot Grip – Pros only use one AR, the TAQ-56. Devastating damage and long-range capability make it the only truly viable AR in Ranked Play. Season 3 nerfed the hard-hitting AR’s headshot damage, but it isn’t that noticeable. We recommend using a muzzle attachment to reduce recoil, with us opting for the FJX Fulcrum Pro, which improves vertical and horizontal recoil. LA Thieves main AR Sam ‘Octane’ Larew claimed most pros have chosen this muzzle. For a more aggressive AR build, the TV Xline Pro stock increases sprint speed and ADS speed at the cost of recoil control. While the TV Cardinal Stock increases aim walking speed and sprint speed and sacrifices aiming stability. Lachmann-556 Muzzle: Komodo Heavy – Stock: Lachmann S76 Factory Stock – Underbarrel: Edge-47 Grip – Ammunition: 5.56 High Velocity – Rear Grip: LMK64 Grip – Truthfully, the TAQ-56 is usually the best choice but buffs to the Lachmann-556’s effective range at the start of Season 3 Reloaded have made it at least worth considering. Much like the TAQ, the 556 is an extremely accurate assault rifle that beams at about any range. Furthermore, it has a highly competitive TTK and surprisingly good mobility given its accuracy. Our recommended build focuses on minimizing recoil to be able to compete with opposing players using the TAQ-56 while also making the gun more mobile where possible. It might not be the obvious choice but some players will prefer how the Lachmann-556 feels over the TAQ-56. Vaznev-9K Muzzle: Bruen Cubic Comp – Stock: Otrezat Stock – Underbarrel: Edge-47 Grip – Rear Grip: True-Tac Grip – The Vaznev-9K’s mid to long-range damage has been nerfed on multiple occasions. However, XclusiveAce revealed that even after nerfs, it still remains the best overall SMG thanks to the attachments it gets access to and the Vaznev’s easy to control spray pattern. We recommend using just four attachments on the Vaznev-9k, as any more will detract from the weapon. For maximum aggression, players can drop the muzzle attachment to avoid the ADS hit but the Bruen Cubic Comp does make the Vaznev far more effective at mid-range. Lastly, the Otrezat Stock improves sprint and walking speed, and the True-Tac Grip helps improve sprint-to-fire and ADS speed. Lachmann Sub Muzzle: Bruen Pendulum – Underbarrel: Agent Grip – Rear Grip: Lachmann TCG-10 – Stock: FT Mobile Stock – If you aren’t a fan of the Vaznev, the Lachmann Sub is the next best option. The SMG is based on the classic MP5, which was a go-to CDL weapon in Modern Warfare 2019. After the Season 3 Reloaded nerfs to the Vaznev-9K, the Lachmann Sub is extremely similar stats-wise. A blistering fast TTK speed and mobility put the MP5 a cut above other SMG options. We recommend using the Bruen Pendulum muzzle to improve the weapon’s vertical and horizontal recoil. Next, the Agent Grip improves hip fire accuracy and aiming idle stability at the cost of walking speed. Lastly, the Lachmann TCG-10 rear grip improves recoil control, and the FT Mobile Stock improves aiming stability, crouch movement speed, and ADS speed. VEL 46 Underbarrel: EDGE-47 Grip – Magazine: 30 Round Mag – Rear Grip: Schlager Soldier Grip – Stock: Demo RXT Stock – Once strictly a niche SMG, the VEL 46 has undergone multiple buffs that now place it right at the top next to the Vaznev-9K and Lachmann Sub. It’s more suited to traditional aggressive SMG play than mid-range engagements but the VEL 46 still excels on certain maps. Inspired by OpTic Texas star, Anthony ‘Shotzzy‘ Cuevas-Castro, we built this loadout with ADS speed and mobility in mind. The Schlager Soldier Grip and Demo RXT Stock improve ADS speed at the cost of recoil control. Players are free to add a Barrel or underbarrel to improve recoil control, as this loadout only used four attachments. MCPR-300 Ammunition: .300 Mag High Velocity – Magazine: 5 Round Mag – Rear Grip: Cronen Cheetah Grip – Stock: FSS Merc Stock – Bolt: Cronen Smooth Bolt – The MCPR-300 hits like a truck, and that’s why some pros opt to use this weapon if they decide to pull out a sniper. A downside of dealing massive damage is slower mobility. To help compensate for the weapon’s sluggishness, the Cronen Cheetah Grip, FSS Merc Stock, and 5 Round Mag improve ADS speed and sprint-to-fire speed. SP-X 80 Ammunition: .300 High Velocity – Bolt: FSS ST87 Bolt – Rear Grip: Schlager Match Grip – Stock: MAX DMR Precision – Just like the L-AB 330, the SP-X is a lightweight sniper with an emphasis on aggressive lane pushes. In most cases the SPX-50 is the best sniper to use in Ranked Play thanks to its superior handling characteristics. We maximized the weapon’s mobility by equipping the Schlager Match Grip and Max DMR Precision to improve ADS and movement speed. The FSS ST87 Bolt allows you to reload faster. Signal 50 Barrel: FSS Jetstream – Optic: SP-X 80 Optic – Stock: SO Inline Stock – Rear Grip: SA Finesse Grip – Ammunition: .50 Cal High Velocity – A few CDL pros opted to use the Signal 50 at CDL Major 4, including FaZe superstar Cellium. The sniper rifle is unique, as it offers an extremely fast fire rate yet still takes down enemies in one shot. Its slower handling means that in most cases the SP-X 80 is better but from time to time you’ll stumble across a situation where the Signal 50’s superior fire rate scores you multiple kills. Best Ranked Play: Secondary weapons X12 Muzzle: XRK Ventor-900 – Trigger Action: XRK Ligting Fire – Rear Grip: Cronen Lima-6 – Most CDL Pros use the X12, as the speedy pistol boasts impressive mobility and fire speed. The Combat Knife provides superior mobility but can leave you exposed and isn’t as effective in the water. The XRK Lighting Fire will allow you to get off consecutive shots faster. The Cronen Lima-6 and XRK Ventor-900 improve ADS speed and recoil control, respectively. Best Ranked Play loadout: Perks and equipment Perks All ultimate perks are banned in competitive matches, so players only need to worry about the three base perks and one bonus perk. For the first two perk slots, we recommend choosing between Double Time, Battle Hardened, and Bomb Squad. Battle Hardened and Bomb Squad help alleviate grenade spam on respawn game modes, while Double Time is essential for moving around quicker in SnD or Respawn. Fast Hands should be the go-to selection for the bonus perk slot. The last thing you want is to lose a gunfight because you get caught reloading a weapon. Snipers can use Focus to remove flinch from their weapons, and Cold Blooded comes in handy for being undetected by Cruise Missiles on more open maps. Equipment For lethal grenades in Ranked Play, we recommend using either a frag grenade or semtex. It comes down to personal preference, as frag grenades can bounce into rooms, while semtex grenades stick to whatever surface you throw them at. Each option has a proper occasion for use. As for tactical grenades, stun grenades come in handy for any game CDL mode. Best CDL Moshpit loadout: Field upgrades For Ranked, players should look at Dead Silence or the Trophy System as their go-to field upgrade choice. For respawn game modes, it’s always essential to have a trophy system on the objective, while Dead Silence makes more sense for SnD matches, where the pacing is usually slower,

Best Minibak Warzone 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks ActivisonThe Minibak is a devastating Warzone 2 SMG with an impressive damage output and excellent ammo capacity. We’ve put together the best Minibak loadout in Warzone 2, complete with the top attachments and Perks to complement it. While gun skill and mechanics will always be the most important factor for winning Warzone 2 matches, a solid loadout is also extremely important, especially now that loadout drops are even easier to get hold of While the M4, TAQ-56, and Fennec 45 have stood out as brilliant options, there’s another gun that’s receiving a lot of attention from the community. We’re of course talking about the Minibak, a powerful SMG that melts opponents’ health bars and is best built to perform as a sniper support-style weapon. In order to transform the Minibak into a meta contender, you’ll need a top-tier loadout and luckily, we’ve got you covered. Contents Best Minibak Warzone 2 loadout – Best Minibak Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the Minibak in Warzone 2 – Best Minibak alternatives in Warzone 2 – Best Minibak Warzone 2 loadout Attachments Muzzle: FTAC Castle Comp – Barrel: BAK-9 279MM – Optic: Cronen Mini Pro – Stock: Otrezat Stock – Rear Grip: True-Tac Grip – For starters, you’ll want to equip the FTAC Castle Comp Muzzle and the BAK-9 279MM barrel. These attachments not only aid the Minibak’s recoil, but they also significantly boost its bullet velocity, damage range, and overall TTK. Following this, make sure to utilize the True-Tac Grip and Otrezat Stock to enhance the SMG’s ADS speed for snapping onto opponents, as well as mobility for outplaying enemies during intense skirmishes. Finally, round off the loadout with the Cronen Mini Pro, a top-tier optic that allows you to lock onto opponents with ease. All these attachments come together to create a lethal sniper-support loadout that beams down foes at medium range in Warzone 2. Best Minibak Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment Perk Package: Weapon Specialist Base Perk 1: Overkill – Base Perk 2: Strong Arm – Bonus Perk: Spotter – Ultimate Perk: Survivor – Lethal: Grenade – Tactical Equipment: Stun Grenade – As the Minibak is best when used as a sniper support, we’ve opted for the Weapon Specialist perk package to gain access to Overkill. We recommend running the MCPR-300, EBR-14, or SP-X 80 alongside the SMG for powerful and versatile loadout. Next, Strong Arm allows you to be more precise with your throwables and toss them further. On top of that, Spotter ensures you’ll never be caught off guard by enemy equipment, field upgrades, or killstreaks. Finally, for the Ultimate Perk, Weapon Specialist uses Survivor which pings any enemies you get downed by and allows allies to revive you quicker. As for equipment, running a Grenade is a solid choice paired with Strong Arm, and a Stun Grenade is always frustrating for an opponent to deal with. How to unlock the Minibak in Warzone 2 In order to unlock the Minibak in Warzone 2, you’ll need to level up the Kastov-74u to level 18. While being forced to use a specific weapon is frustrating, luckily the Kastov-74u is immensely strong and we even have a meta build for the gun right here. Best Minibak alternatives in Warzone 2 If the sniper support Minibak doesn’t fit your play style, you may want to check out the Fennec 45. This devastating SMG has an incredible TTK thanks to its best-in-class fire rate, making it perfect for aggressive players. With the correct build, the gun can absolutely shred through foes in milliseconds and will give you an advantage in the majority of your close-quarter skirmishes. That’s all for our Minibak loadout! For more of our Warzone 2 coverage, check out these guides below: Do Warzone skins carry over to Warzone 2? | What are Strongholds in Warzone 2? | All Warzone 2 vehicles and Gas Stations | Does Warzone 2 have SBMM? | How do Warzone 2 circles work?

Best Minibak MW2 loadout: Class setup, Attachments & Perks ActivisionThe Minibak is a great SMG that offers both fast TTK and good mobility in Modern Warfare 2, if you are looking to draw out all its strengths, you need the best Perks, attachments, and equipment that can be found right here. Season 4 of Modern Warfare 2 has begun, but the Minibak did not receive any major changes, this means the gun is still easy to use and deadly at close range. Based on the real-world PP-19 Bizon, the Minibak is an SMG in Modern Warfare 2 that excels at close range. It offers exceptional mobility and has a forgiving recoil pattern making it an easy gun to use. Its stand-out feature is its unique helical magazine that holds 64 rounds by default which is the most of any SMG and even comparable to some LMGs. With the arrival of Ranked Play, the Minibak has become a popular off-meta option. Its huge magazine and fast handling make it perfect for taking down an entire team without having to reload. Contents Best Minibak MW2 loadout: Attachments – Best Minibak MW2 loadout: Perks & Equipment – How to unlock the Minibak in MW2 – Best alternatives to the Minibak in MW2 – Best Minibak MW2 loadout: Attachments Muzzle: AVR-T90 Comp – Laser: Corio LAZ-44 v3 – Optic: Cronen Mini Pro – Stock: Otrezat Stock – Rear Grip: True-Tac Grip – The AVR-T90 Comp is the most important attachment on the Minibak as this muzzle improves the SMG’s otherwise challenging horizontal recoil. As this attachment alone makes the recoil easy to control the remaining slots can be used to improve handling. To optimize weapon handling use both the True-Tac Grip and Otrezat Stock to enhance the Minibak’s ADS speed and overall mobility. This will turn ensure that the Minibak maintains its strengths as an SMG and dominates close quarter gunfights. Although the Minibak’s iron sights are decent there’s no harm in improving visibility whilst firing. It’s ideal to use a clear close range optic such as the Cronen Mini Pro to make tracking enemy movement easier. If you want to make the Minibak handle even faster the Corio LAZ-44 v3 is an excellent laser to use. However, this can’t be used in Ranked Play so for competitive it’s best to run just four attachments. Best Minibak MW2 loadout: Perks & Equipment Base Perk 1: Battle Hardened – Base Perk 2: Tracker – Bonus Perk: Cold-Blooded – Ultimate Perk: Ghost – Lethal: Frag Grenade – Tactical: Stim – Kick off your perk choices with Battle Hardened, a Base Perk that reduces the intensity and duration of tactical equipment. It’s especially useful against Flash Grenades which are incredibly strong in Modern Warfare 2. Next up is Tracker, a brilliant perk for SMG users who want to hunt down their foes by tracking their footprints. It’s useful for those who prefer an aggressive playstyle as you can locate enemies quicker. When it comes to your Bonus Perk, Cold Blooded is an excellent choice to avoid being killed by enemy killstreaks. There’s nothing worse than having a good run ended by a VTOL Jet or Chopper Gunner. For your Ultimate Perk, Ghost is guaranteed to be useful as it keeps you concealed from the opposing team when looking to flank. It’s a must for players trying to get behind the other team without being noticed. The best Lethal Equipment is the Frag Grenade as it can be cooked to detonate just as it lands next to an opponent preventing them from dodging. As for tactical equipment, a Stim is fantastic for healing up and taking consecutive gunfights in quick succession. How to unlock the Minibak in MW2 Unlocking the Minibak in Modern Warfare 2 requires you to level up several other weapons in the Kastov platform. Here are the full requirements for unlocking the Minibak in MW2: Level up to an overall rank of 23 to unlock the Kastov 762 – Level up the Kastov 762 to level 10 to obtain the Kastov 545 – Level up the Kastov 545 to level 13 to get your hands on the Kastov-74U – Level up the Kastov-74U to level 15 and you’ll get the Vaznev-9K – Finally ranking up the Vaznev-9K to level 14 will unlock the Minibak – Best alternatives to the Minibak in MW2 If it’s the Minibak’s large magazine that appeals to you then both the PDSW 528 and FSS Hurricane offer good alternatives. Their 50 round mags aren’t quite as big but should still get the job done. For Ranked Play, the Vaznev-9K and Lachmann Sub are the best alternatives as they perform well at close and medium range and are perfect for playing fast. Now that you have the best Minibak loadout, you can check out some other guides we’ve compiled for Modern Warfare 2: All Modern Warfare 2 beta maps and game modes | How to use Modern Warfare 2’s Gunsmith: Receivers and Blueprints explained | Modern Warfare 2 new equipment guide: Lethals and Tacticals explained | How to unlock MP5 SMG loadout in Modern Warfare 2 | How to Slide Cancel in the Modern Warfare 2 Beta | How to unlock Oni Operator & Blueprint in Modern Warfare 2 | All Modern Warfare 2 Killstreaks | What is Modern Warfare 2 Spec Ops mode? | All Modern Warfare 2 perks | All Modern Warfare 2 Field Upgrades

Best Milano 821 Warzone class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Setup ActivisionBlack Ops Cold War’s Milano 821 is back in the meta and can be a beast of an SMG in Warzone with the right build. To help you get ahead of the competition, we’ve put together the optimal loadout to dominate the competition. Ever since its arrival with the release of Black Ops Cold War, the Milano has seen its fair share of highs and lows in Warzone. The SMG has never quite reached the top of the pack, though it’s certainly still a contender in the right hands. However, thanks to changes in the recent Season 2 Reloaded patch, it’s now secured a spot as a top-tier SMG and one of the most popular weapons currently in the game. With that in mind, here’s a guide on how to get the most out of the SMG; from how to unlock it, to the best attachments, we’ve got everything you need to know. Contents Best Milano 821 loadout – The best perks and equipment – How to unlock the Milano 821 – An alternative to the Milano 821 – Best Milano 821 loadout for Warzone Attachments Muzzle: Agency Suppressor – Barrel: 10.5 Ranger – Laser: Tiger Team Spotlight – Stock: Raider Stock – Ammunition: STANAG 55 Rnd Drum. – Despite having a fairly slow fire rate, the Milano is now one of the strongest of any gun in the category. And along with the recent TTK changes, the gun holds up fairly well for both Rebirth Island and Caldera. Starting things out, the Agency Suppressor and 10.5″ Ranger Barrel are crucial. Both of these attachments combine to give the gun a huge boost in bullet velocity and overall damage, significantly increasing the Milano’s TTK. As with most SMGs, aiming down sights is often a secondary consideration. As a result, adding the Tiger Team Spotlight laser will keep you as accurate as possible when you’re not doing so. Last but not least are the Raider Stock and STANAG 55 Rnd Drum. The former will improve sprint to fire timing but will slightly hinder your hip-fire accuracy. For ammunition, the increased magazine size will keep you firing in more drawn-out engagements. Best Milano 821 loadout for Warzone: Perks & Equipment Perks Perk 1: Double Time – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Equipment Lethal: Throwing Knife – Tactical: Heartbeat Sensor – When it comes to just about any SMG loadout in Warzone, there’s only one set of Perks worth considering. Double Time, Overkill, and Amped are all equally essential when building the optimal SMG class. For starters, Double Time allows you to sprint for greater distances. Combined with the mobility of an SMG like the Milano, this will have you dashing through Verdansk as quickly as possible. Meanwhile, Overkill and Amped let you swap between devastating primary weapons in the blink of an eye, adapting your playstyle at a moment’s notice for the situation at hand. With the addition of the Combat Recon perk in Season 5, it could be an option to run Cold-Blooded if you feel like you’re being dominated by players using it. However, Double Time should always be your go-to, as it provides so much mobility. In terms of equipment, nothing quite edges out the Throwing Knife and Heartbeat Sensor combo this season. The former will clean up kills as soon as you down an enemy while the latter will help give you the jump on nearby targets. Both are essential for high-kill games with the Milano. How to unlock the Milano 821 in Warzone No different from unlocking any other weapon that arrived with Black Ops Cold War, all you need to do here is level up. Getting your hands on the Milano 821 requires you to reach level 13. That’s all there is to it. Once you’ve passed this level, the Milano 821 is all yours to experiment with and begin the real grind to unlocking all the attachments. Alternative to the Milano loadout If you’re looking for an alternative loadout to the Milano, then check out our Owen Gun loadout. The Australian SMG was added to Warzone with Vanguard’s integration and is one of the most popular SMGs in Warzone due to the Welgun nerfs. Overall, the Owen Gun is a great pick for those that want to aggressively rush enemy squads. Looking for more of the best Warzone loadouts? Check out our list of guides below: Grau 5.56 | Kilo 141 | Krig 6 | CR-56 AMAX | M4A1 | FFAR 1 | MP5 | Kar98k | HDR | Bullfrog | Most popular weapons | Best Assault Rifles | Best Snipers | The best Warzone loadouts | Mac 10

Best Milano 821 loadouts for Black Ops Cold War beta ActivisionThe Milano 821 SMG has started to stand out from the pack during the Black Ops Cold War beta. So, we’ve got a few classes you can use once it starts back up again. [jwplayer S757WrdH] As we creep ever closer to the release of Black Ops Cold War, CoD fans have had their chance to get involved with early access through the Alpha and Beta. In the Alpha, weapons like the XM4 and AK74U immediately stood out – especially in the hands of Call of Duty League pros. In the Beta, however, other weapons have got their moment in the spotlight. The Milano, otherwise known as the Uzi, has been making a case to be known as the best SMG around. So, if you want to rock it like the pros do, we’ve got a few helpful set-ups that should help when the Beta starts back up again. Close-quarters loadout for Milano 821 This first set up is perhaps better suited to objective game modes or when you want to really get up close and personal with an enemy. Equipping the steady aim laser as the body, with the Foregrip as the underbarrel, and the Impact Handle as the handle will give you better control in tight situations. The Tactical Stock also helps on top of that. The 8.8 Extended barrel will help the weapon’s muzzle speed. This is the sort of setup that you can rip through unsuspecting enemies with if you manage to hit a well-timed flank. Barrel: 8.8 Extended – Body: Steady aim laser – Underbarrel: Foregrip – Handle: Impact Handle – Stock: Tactical Stock – Minimal recoil loadout for Milano 821 If your playstyle is more reactionary rather than barreling in headfirst and leading the attack, well, you’ll need to be able to draw the 821 out a little quicker than usual. Well, that’s where the Quickdraw Handle and Tactical Stock come into play. You’ll be able to draw the weapon much with them attached, while the Foregrip and Muzzle Break will help with the recoil. Barrel: 9.7 Cavalry Lancer – Underbarrel: Foregrip – Muzzle: Muzzle Break 9 – Handle: Quickdraw Handle – Stock: Tactical Stock – While these loadouts and weapon setups are helping some players, you might find that a tiny tweak helps you. Say, adding a magazine instead of a barrel or muzzle. Though, you won’t know until you try it out. If you haven’t been able to get into the Black Ops Cold War beta so far, it opens up again on October 15-16 for Xbox, PS4, and PC early access players. October 17-19 will be the open for everyone period, so you will get a chance to test it if you want to.

Best Milano 821 loadout for Call of Duty: Black Ops Cold War TreyarchIf you’re always aggressively rushing onto the objective and playing aggressively in Black Ops Cold War, then this Milano 821 loadout will give you the edge needed to secure plenty of kills. While Assault Rifles are there to help you in mid to long-range gunfights, the game’s SMGs are always about up-close engagements. As a result, you’re going to want to fine-tune your Milano 821 to fit this hyper-aggressive playstyle. Rather than equipping attachments to improve your aim or your reveal distance, for example, speed should be the top priority. Thankfully, the Milano 821 offers plenty of choices and it’s one of the fastest guns in the game. Here’s how you can get the most out of it. Best Milano 821 loadout for Black Ops Cold War Optic: Microflex LED – Muzzle: Infantry Compensator – Barrel: 10.6 Task Force – Body: SWAT 5mw Laser Sight – Underbarrel: SFOD Speedgrip – Magazine: Vandal Speed Loader – Handle: Speed Tape – Stock: Marathon Stock – Secondary 1911 – Throwables Stimshot – Semtex – Field Mic – Perks Perk 1: Flak Jacket + Tactical Mask – Perk 2: Assassin + Scavenger – Perk 3: Ninja + Ghost – Wildcard Perk Greed – We recommend picking the Infantry Compensator Muzzle over the Socom Eliminator. While the latter provides even more vertical recoil control, it comes at the expense of movement speed. Your goal here is to be as quick as possible, so hindering speed is a big deal-breaker for this loadout. The 10.6 Task Force Barrel is one of the strongest attachments in Cold War. Not only does it boost your overall weapon damage, but also the range of the SMG, along with its bullet velocity. There is no better way to bump the lethality of the gun, but obviously, it comes with some steep tradeoffs. You’re giving up on the notion of having a precise aim in favor of an outright beastly weapon. This thing will shred with the right Barrel, but it won’t be easy to control. So you’re going to want to play from a closer range and always be pushing your opponents. Read More: Best KSP 45 loadout for Black Ops Cold War – With the 5mw Laser Sight, there isn’t much of a need to actually aim down sights. Your recoil is going to be tough to handle to begin with, so firing from the hip will often be the easier choice. No need to reduce flinch with this particular weapon since you’ll rarely be aiming down sights. Instead, opting for the simple Speed Tape Handle is the way to go. This will give a slight buff to your ADS speed without any downsides. Read More: Best M16 loadout for Black Ops Cold War – Make sure you’re running Ninja and Ghost in the third perk slot as well. This is a complete game-changer for SMG classes as you’ll be able to get the drop on your foes, gunning them down before they can even react. If you’re trying to mix things up and swap out from the fast-paced SMG action, be sure to check out our other weapon guides over on our CoD hub.

Best MG42 Warzone loadout: Class setup, Attachments, Perks ActivisionThe best MG42 Warzone loadout comes packed with high damage, huge amounts of ammo, and a fast rate of fire. This makes it a fantastic pick for those looking to claim plenty of kills in Season 1 on Caldera. Vanguard’s MG42 is a great choice for Warzone players looking for a dominant LMG class. In fact, this beefy gun can shred through multiple enemies, particularly when it’s kitted out with the best attachments. While LMGs may not be as popular as the game’s best Assault Rifles and SMGs, the MG42 has quickly risen up the ranks. This high-damage LMG can barrage enemies with a constant stream of bullets, which makes it a great pick for those that enjoy gunning for squad wipes. Whether you’re bored of the meta Automaton and STG44 loadouts or just want to try another powerful Vanguard gun, then this MG42 build will do just that. Contents Best MG42 Warzone loadout – Best MG42 setup (Perks & equipment) – How to unlock the MG42 in Warzone – Best MG42 loadout Warzone tips – Alternatives to the MG42 Warzone loadout – Best MG42 Warzone loadout Muzzle: MX Silencer – Barrel: VDD 890mm 32M Luftschutz – Optic: G16 2.5X – Stock: VDD 64M – Underbarrel: M1941 Hand Stop – Magazine: 6.5 Sakura 125 Round Drums – Ammo Type: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Polymer Grip – Proficiency: Sleight of Hand – Kit: Tight Grip – The best MG42 Warzone loadout boosts the gun’s damage and accuracy, which enables you to effortlessly beam down your foes without having to wrestle for control. First up is the VDD 890mm 32M Luftschutz barrel, Polymer Grip, VDD 64M, and Tight Grip. All these attachments drastically reduce the MG42’s recoil, enabling you to hit those mid to long-range shots with ease. This is made even easier thanks to the 2.5x magnification from the G16 optic. In order to stay competitive against ARs, we’ve attached the M1941 Hand Stop. Read More: Best STG44 Warzone loadout – This underbarrel helps alleviate the ADS penalty and makes the MG42 a little more reactive. Sleight of Hand has also been chosen for this reason as it speeds up the gun’s sluggish reload times. Fortunately, the 6.5 Sakura 125 Round Drums ensure that you have enough ammo to cut through multiple targets. Lastly, the Lengthened ammo type increases the MG42’s bullet velocity, while the MX Silencer keeps you from appearing on the minimap when firing. Best MG42 setup (Perks & equipment) Perks & Equipment Perk 1: E.O.D. – Perk 2: Ghost – Perk 3: Amped – Secondary: Top Break – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Stim – Our MG42 Warzone loadout utilizes all the standard meta perks. Both EOD and Amped keep you safe from any explosive blasts, while also giving increased speed when swapping to your secondary weapon. This enables you to quickly switch to the Top Break in close-quarter firefights. Meanwhile, Ghost also enables you to stay hidden from enemy UAVs – an area that is incredibly important in late-game circles. Once you have Ghost, you can run through Caldera without the fear of being spotted on the map by enemy squads. Lastly, both the Semtex and Stim will give you the tools needed to flush out pesky campers and the ability to quickly heal yourself when you take damage. How to unlock the MG42 in Warzone In order to unlock the MG42 in CoD Warzone, you’ll need to reach player rank 4. This means that most Warzone players will have the deadly LMG unlocked. Even if you don’t, you can simply play a few games of Vanguard or Warzone, and you’ll unlock the MG42 in no time. Once you have access to this iconic LMG, then you’ll be able to start grinding out all the best attachments outlined above. Best MG42 loadout Warzone tips In Warzone Pacific Season 1, the MG42 has been dominating as one of the best LMGs currently in the game. If you’re interested in giving our MG42 loadout a go, we’ve got you covered with some tips that you’ll to need to know. Being that the MG42 is a LMG, it comes with a very large magazine capacity. This means you don’t necessarily have to reload that often. When fighting a squad, trio or even duo, use this to your advantage and you will be able to take out multiple enemies at once. – While this weapon can handle its own in medium to long range engagements, the slow handling speeds mean that its not the most efficient up close. Supplement this loadout class by having a SMG like the OTs9 or MP40 as a secondary. – Even though the handling speeds on this LMG can’t compare to that of the best SMGs in Warzone, the MG42’s fire rate will down enemies with ease at close range. In the event you don’t have an optimal close range weapon, the MG42 can still hold its own. – Alternatives to the MG42 Warzone loadout Despite the recent nerfs, the Automaton is still an incredibly powerful weapon in Warzone. Not only does it have great accuracy, but the gun’s damage range also makes it an extremely versatile option in Caldera. If the low mobility and sluggish reload of the MG42 is causing you trouble, then the Automaton will likely be a more preferable option. Be sure to check out our best Automaton Warzone loadout to give you the edge needed to beat the competition. So, there you have it, the best MG42 loadout that can reward you with plenty of kills in Warzone. If you want to keep updated with all the latest Warzone and Vanguard news and updates, then be sure to check out our Call of Duty page.

Best MG42 CoD Vanguard class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Proficiency, Setup ActivisionThe MG42 is one of CoD Vanguard’s strongest LMGs and with the right setup, it can be nearly impossible to stop. We’ve got the perfect attachments and the best Perks right here with a complete guide on building the optimal MG42 loadout. Compared to the more agile SMGs and ARs in CoD Vanguard, LMGs stand their ground as some of the most devastating weapons on offer. With some of the highest damage output in the game, getting the right LMG loadout could have you topping the scoreboards in every match. As the first LMG unlocked in Vanguard, the MG42 comes in as one of the best picks in the category. Not only is it easy to control off the bat, but with the right attachments, it can be morphed into something even better. To get you mowing down entire lobbies in no time, here’s our ultimate MG42 loadout in CoD Vanguard. Contents Best MG42 Vanguard loadout – Best MG42 Vanguard loadout (Perks, Equipment, & Field Upgrade) – Best MG42 class Vanguard tips – How to unlock the MG42 in Vanguard – Alternative to the MG42 Vanguard loadout – Best MG42 CoD Vanguard loadout Muzzle: F8 Stabilizer – Barrel: Krausnick 450MM B42MG – Optic: ZF4 3.5x Rifle Scope – Stock: VDD 64M – Underbarrel: M1941 Hand Stop – Magazine: 13MM Anti-Material 125 Round Drums – Ammo Type: Blocked by Magazine – Rear Grip: Stippled Grip – Proficiency: Sleight of Hand – Kit: Fully Loaded – With our optimal MG42 loadout, the goal is to boost overall damage while keeping your recoil in check. If you lean too far in either direction, it’s going to be a nightmare to control. However, a good mix will see you striking the right balance to form the most powerful yet reliable LMG in Vanguard. Starting it all off we have the F8 Stabilizer Muzzle. This is a staple for just about any LMG class due its accuracy and damage range boosts. The extra 10% range will have you dealing full damage much further than the default setup. Next is the Krausnick 450MM B42MG Barrel which fills the same role as our chosen Muzzle. Providing an extra 36.4% damage range to the MG42, along with 40% extra Bullet Velocity and recoil improvements to boot, this attachment can’t be overlooked. While we’ve settled on the ZF4 3.5x Rifle Scope Optic, this category is purely down to personal preference. It’s worth keeping an eye out for Optics that come with positive boosts though. Some are purely visual upgrades, but others, like the ZF4 3.5x Rifle Scope, actually improve the MG42’s recoil. The VDD 64M Stock is another must-pick for this MG42 loadout. A huge improvement to accuracy once again keeps your LMG firing like a laser even from long distances. Now here’s where things get interesting with the 13MM Anti-Material 125 Round Drum Magazine. Although this option comes with huge downsides in terms of accuracy, we’ve countered most of the negative effects with other attachments. This attachment provides a huge 25% damage buff along with an extra 20% Bullet Velocity. It’s the most important attachment here and completely changes how the MG42 functions. It’s worth noting, however, the Magazine is so powerful that it prevents you from picking an Ammo Type. Therefore, that attachment slot will be left empty for this particular loadout. Moving on we have the Stippled Grip Rear Grip to once again counteract the recoil effects of the Magazine. This option provides another small boost to keep your shots on point even with the extra damage. Closing things out, we’ve gone with the Sleight of Hand to increase the reload speed of this LMG, and the Fully Loaded Kit to start you off with far more ammo than usual. Best MG42 CoD Vanguard loadout (Perks, Equipment, & Field Upgrade) Perk 1: Ghost – Perk 2: Piercing Vision – Perk 3: Double Time – Secondary: 1911 – Lethal: Thermite – Tactical: Stim – Field Upgrade: Armor – For the rest of this MG42 build, your Perks, Equipment, and Field Upgrade should all complement a guns blazing playstyle. As a result, we’ve settled on Ghost, Piercing Vision, and Double Time for the Perks. Ghost is crucial to keeping your streaks going as you reposition between lengthy gunfights and Double Time will help get you there faster. Meanwhile, Piercing Vision is perhaps the most important Perk overall. Landing just one or two shots on an enemy reveals their position through walls, smoke, and anything else in between. Given the strength of the MG42, this allows you to keep firing with perfect accuracy. Running a 1911 as your Secondary is always handy if reloading isn’t an option. Whether you’re out of ammo or an enemy is simply too close for an LMG, quickly swapping to this deadly pistol will keep you in the fight. Thermite and Stim are both great picks for lethal and tactical equipment here as the former can cover an area in lethal fire, while the latter will quickly heal you back up after a close gunfight. Last but not least, the Armor Field Upgrade complements the LMG playstyle perfectly. A little extra health is always a good thing so equipping it with your MG42 is essential. Best MG42 class Vanguard tips The MG42 is currently one of the more popular LMGs in Vanguard due in part to its incredibly rapid fire rate. However, using an LMG comes with some very specific drawbacks. Here are a few tips on how to maximize our best MG42 Vanguard loadout: This weapon is LMG. Therefore, you’re movement and handling speed will be significantly slower than Assault Rifles and SMGs. Holding lines of sight and pre-aiming is a great habit to develop. – The perk “Double Time” allows you to tactical sprint for longer, which is important when using an LMG in Vanguard. Use this increased mobility to help you flank enemies or get to the objective faster. – LMGs are easily some of the best weapons when it comes to “wall-banging” or shooting enemies through walls. With the perk Piercing Vision equipped, you’ll be able to see tagged enemies through walls and surfaces allowing you to take advantage of the MG42’s capabilities. – The perk “Ghost” will allow you to reposition between areas without being spotted on the mini-map. Use this to get to better vantage points and post up with the MG42. – Also, remember to always develop a playstyle that feels the best for you. With that said, if you’re still struggling to succeed with the MG42, these tips should be helpful. How to unlock the MG42 in Vanguard You won’t need to do any grinding to start up with the MG42 as this LMG is accessible as soon as you unlock custom classes at level 4. This means after just one or two games you can jump right in with the MG42 and start leveling it up to unlock every attachment. Alternative to the MG42 Vanguard loadout LMGs certainly aren’t for everyone in CoD Vanguard. If the MG42 isn’t doing it for you, an AR might be more up your alley. The AS44 is one such AR that still packs a solid punch just like this LMG setup. With the best AS44 loadout, you can tick all the boxes on your way to dominating lobbies in Vanguard. So that’s all there is to know about the very best MG42 loadout in CoD Vanguard. With new updates coming through almost every week, however, we’ll keep you posted here with any changes to the build as various attachments are buffed or nerfed. For now, be sure to check out some other top-tier Vanguard loadouts before you jump back in: Best Automaton loadout | Best Itra loadout | Best MP40 loadout | Best M1928 loadout | Best STG44 loadout

Best MCW Warzone loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks ActivisionDespite dominating the Warzone meta for a good chunk of time in Season 2, the MCW has seen a bit of a dropoff, but it’s begun to climb back up to the top for Season 4 Reloaded. When using the right attachments, the MCW is still a great weapon choice in the game and should not be ignored. Here is the optimal loadout we have for the gun that will give you the best chance of victory in Warzone Season 4 Reloaded. Contents: Best MCW loadout – MCW loadout: perks and equipment – How to unlock MCW in Warzone – Best alternative to MCW in Warzone – Best MCW Warzone loadout Conversion Kit: JAK Raven Kit – Barrel: Kimura Blackiron Heavy Short Barrel – Rear Grip: RB Rapidstrike Grip – Underbarrel: DR-6 Handstop – Magazine: 40 Round Mag – This MCW loadout begins with the JAK Raven Kit to make the weapon a little more efficient while in short- to mid-range combat scenarios. While this does reduce its power from the longest distances, this is completely fine as most skirmishes in Warzne will be closer. Next up is the Kimura Blackiron Heavy Short Barrel will be a massive help in keeping your shots on-target and make each shot more accurate. The RB Rapidstrike Grip and DR-6 Handstop are both going to help keep your mobility up-to-par through ADS Speed and movement speed. This is going to make you more accurate on the battlefield to nail your targets when you need to. Finally, the 40 Round Mag offers you more bullets per magazine, which means that you can keep fire sustained on a target for longer, at the cost of a slight increase to your reload time. MCW Warzone Loadout: Perks and Equipment Perk 1: Double Time increases the duration of Tac Sprint – – Perk 2: Sleight of Hand reload faster – – Perk 3: Quick Fix starts health regeneration when killing a player or inserting a plate – – Perk 4: Resolute gives you a speed boost when hit by enemy shot – – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Smoke – These Perks are here to help you move around faster and keep yourself alive in the heat of a battle, starting with Double Time to give you more Tac Sprint and extending to Resolute that will give you greater speed when hit with a shot. You will also have Sleight of Hand to keep your gun loaded and able to fire back in a bind. Rounding it out is Quick Fix which will help you keep your health maxed out by performing certain tasks. How to unlock MCW in Warzone To unlock the MCW in Warzone, you’ll need to reach level 44. Alternatively, those who own MW3 can extract it in Zombies to skip the grind entirely. Either way, you’ll need to progress through 28 gun levels to unlock all of the MCW’s unique attachments. Best alternative to MCW in Warzone Those looking for another laser-accurate rifle like the MCW should consider using the SOA Subverter battle rifle, which has remained a powerful option ever since it arrived with Season 2 Reloaded’s update. Assault Rifles continue to dominate the meta in Warzone, so check out the loadouts for other ARs like the SVA 545, MTZ-556, and Holger 556.

Best MCW Loadout Modern Warfare 3: Class setup, attachments, perks Modern Warfare 3The MCW stands out in MW3 as a formidable Assault Rifle, offering great damage, range, pinpoint accuracy, and enhanced mobility. It’s a true all-rounder and amongst MW3’s top weapons, especially with this best-class setup, attachments, and perks. Echoing the glory of the classic ACR, the MCW has established itself as a dominant force across multiplayer lobbies and the pro scene in MW3. You might be wondering why the MCW is used ahead of the Holger 556 in the game. Indeed, the Holger 556 is definitely more powerful, but the MCW is easier to use as it functions like a laser beam while shooting enemies across all ranges. If you are a fan of the MCW and want to use it in MW3 Season 4 Reloaded, then you’ll want to use this optimized loadout. Best MCW MW3 loadout Conversion Kit: JAK Raven Kit – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Rear Grip: RB Rapidstrike Grip – Muzzle: ZEHMN35 Compensated Flash Hider – Underbarrel: DR-6 Handstop – No matter how you build it, the MCW is considered one of the best guns in the game. The following loadout closely mirrors what pros use in the Call of Duty League, and even if pro play doesn’t tickle your fancy, this setup is one of the best in the business. The backbone of this build is the JAK Raven Kit to improve the mobility of the MCW and give you a faster rate of fire. This turns the weapon into something closer to an SMG, but one that can still dominate a match of multiplayer. This particular build for the MCW is catered towards enhancing your stability and handling of the AR. The JAK Glassless Optic has become the go-to across both multiplayer and Warzone for most players, but you can also try the Mk. 3 Reflector or Slate Reflector. The DR-6 Handstop and the ZEHMN35 Compensated Flash Hider remain two of the best attachments to use. They improve several key stats including gun kick, recoil control, firing aim stability, aiming idle sway, bullet velocity, and damage range. Finally, the RB Rapidstrike Grip will improve the ADS speed of the MCW even further, as well as improving your movement speed and overall mobility. MCW MW3 Loadout: Perks and Equipment Vest: Infantry Vest Increases Tactical Sprint duration and reduces refresh time. – – Gloves: Scavenger Gloves Pick up ammo when running over a dropped weapon – – Gear: EOD Padding Reduces damage from non-killstreak enemy explosive and enemy fire. – – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Stun – Field Upgrade: Trophy System – Modern Warfare 3’s new perk system lets you equip vests and gear for benefits as opposed to selecting perks. To best take advantage of this use the Infantry Vest, allowing for a greater Tac Sprint duration which will help you get around much easier. The Scavenger Gloves ensure ammo will never be a problem for you. This will come in handy on big maps where you might be close to a kill streak, but you run out of ammo. EOD Padding is a fantastic option for gear thanks to its damage negation to help keep you alive. Lastly, a Trophy System comes in handy in game modes such as Hardpoint or Domination, where you are likely to get bombarded with grenades and flashes while playing the objective. Of course, this combination of Gear and Field Upgrade is built to negate the effects of incoming equipment, so you may want to consider swapping one of them out for something that better suits your playstyle. For example, the Munitions Box can be used to replenish grenades, or perhaps the Portable Radar field upgrade which helps you gain additional info on enemy whereabouts. How to unlock MCW in MW3 To unlock the MCW in Modern Warfare 3, you must reach level 44 in multiplayer or Zombies. Alternatively, you can extract with an MCW in Zombies to skip the grind. Best MCW alternative in MW3 The MCW is already one of the best weapons in Modern Warfare 3, but if you are looking for an alternative the Holger 556 is worth choosing. It isn’t as accurate but boasts a more impressive TTK. You can also go with the MTZ 556, a powerful alternative to the MCW at lower levels. Now that you’re all caught up, be sure to check out other MW3 content such as the best MW3 AR loadouts, best controller settings, or how to play the game at 120 FPS on PS5.

Best MCW 6.8 Warzone loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks Although it’s often overlooked the MCW 6.8 is a genuinely fantastic option in Warzone Season 4 Reloaded that can hold its own against the very best with an optimized loadout like this. Even after the MTZ Interceptor was nerfed it’s still the most used marksman rifle, leaving its competitors largely overlooked. This is especially true of the MCW 6.8 which is a fantastic weapon that offers a nice balance of mobility, handling, and range. While it’s not quite top-tier, this high-caliber version of the MCW does fill a niche for those wanting a precision weapon suited to an aggressive playstyle. It is extremely rewarding if you can land consistent headshots, especially in its maximum damage range. To get the most out of the MCW 6.8 in Warzone you’ll need an optimized loadout and we’ve got just that. Best MCW 6.8 Warzone loadout Muzzle: VT-7 Spiritfire Suppressor – Underbarrel: Bruen Heavy Support Grip – Optic: Corio Eagleseye 2.5x – Rear Grip: RB Claw-PSL Grip – Magazine: 30 Round Mag – Since the MCW 6.8’s recoil is mostly just visual, it’s best to instead prioritize damage range and bullet velocity with the VT-7 Spiritfire Suppressor muzzle. The Bruen Heavy Support Grip is here to give you better recoil control and stability when firing your weapon. This is also going to be helped by the RB Claw-PSL Grip which provides recoil control both vertically and horizontally. The build is rounded off with a 30 Round Mag and Corio Eagleseye 2.5x optic. The larger magazine reduces the frequency you need to reload and makes it possible to chain multiple downs, while the Corio is a classic medium to long-range optic, perfect for plays typical of a marksman rifle like the MCW 6.8. MCW 6.8 Warzone Loadout: Perks and Equipment Perk 1: Double Time increases the duration of Tac Sprint – – Perk 2: Sleight of Hand faster reloading – – Perk 3: Quick Fix starts health regeneration when killing a player or inserting a plate – – Perk 4: Resolute gives you a speed boost when hit by an enemy shot – – Lethal: Throwing Knife – Tactical: Smoke Grenade – Even though this isn’t an overly mobile build, it’s still worth using Double Time as it simply offers more value than any other Perk 1 or 2 in Warzone. Speaking of Perk 2, Sleight of Hand is great for ensuring you are always locked and loaded for your next fight. Quick Fix is a great way to keep your health up at all times. You will be replacing your armor plates frequently throughout a match, so having your character heal at the same time can be a literal lifesaver. Resolute is an underrated option for Perk slot 4 that automatically helps you get out of a tight spot. The Throwing Knife is a solid option for lethal as it provides a quick and efficient way of taking an enemy out, provided you can hit your target.. Finally, a Smoke Grenade is perfect for giving yourself cover when you don’t have any around you. How to unlock MCW 6.8 in Warzone The MCW 6.8 can be acquired as an Armory Unlock, first accessible from level 25. Once the Armory can be accessed, activate the MCW 6.8 and either complete daily challenges or win enough matches. Alternatively, this grind can be skipped by extracting with an MCW 6.8 in Zombies. Best alternative to MCW 6.8 in Warzone Not only is the MTZ Interceptor a direct competitor to the MCW 6.8, but it’s also one of the best guns in Warzone altogether, even after it was nerfed. It has unmatched consistency and incredible range making it undoubtedly top-tier. While Marksman Rifles are solid, the meta of Warzone is largely dominated by ARs, SMGs, and Sniper Rifles. So check out the best loadouts for guns like the Kar98k, Holger 26, Superi 46, FJX Horus, and the standard MCW.

Best MCW 6.8 loadout in Modern Warfare 3: Class setup, attachment, perks ActivisionAre you looking to pick up the MCW 6.8 marksman rifle in Modern Warfare 3? Here is everything you need to know about the weapon including the class setups, attachment, and perks. Marksman rifles are not very popular in Modern Warfare 3, especially in a meta dominated by Assault Rifles. However, there is one marksman rifle that can match some of the strongest weapons in the game. This weapon is the MCW 6.8 which is known for its damage, stability, and reliability. It may not be considered one of the top “meta” weapons MW3, but it’s certainly a great choice to dominate a match. Therefore, if you are looking to pick up the MCW 6.8, we have got you covered. The following few sections include a comprehensive loadout guide for this marksman rifle. Content Best MCW 6.8 loadout in Modern Warfare 3 – MCW 6.8 loadout: Perks and equipment – How to unlock MCW 6.8 in Modern Warfare 3 – Best alternative to MCW 6.8 in Modern Warfare 3 – Best MCW 6.8 loadout in Modern Warfare 3 Muzzle: Shadowstrike Suppressor – Barrel: Second Line Mammoth Heavy Barrel – Optic: Mk. 3 Reflector – Magazine: 30 Round Mag – Reargrip: RB CLAW-PSL GRIP – This loadout begins with the Shadowstrike Suppressor, which offers the benefit of stealth to the loadout. With it, you can get around and fire at enemies without being spotted, a great way to keep the other team on their toes. Next up is the Second Line Mammoth Heavy Barrel to increase the damage range and bullet velocity of the MCW 6.8. In addition, it also has a big boost to your mobility so you can get around the match much easier. The Mk. 3 Reflector is here to give you some more precise shooting and can help get those long-distance shots off better than the iron sights. The 30 Round Mag will slow you down just a little bit, but that is more than made up for by the larger clip that will allow you to get off more shots at a time than the standard one. Finally, using the RB CLAW-PSL GRIP is going to give you better recoil control, both vertically and horizontally. MCW 6.8 MW3 loadout: Perks and equipment Vest: Infantry Vest extends duration of Tac Sprint – – Gloves: Commando Gloves reload while sprinting – – Boots: Stalker Boots faster strafing speed and ADS movement speed – – Gear: Bone Conduction Headset improves audio to allow you to hear enemy footsteps and gunfire – – Field Upgrade: Frag Grenade – Tactical: Flash Grenade – These Perks will help keep your movement up as much as possible, which is absolutely the style that is dominating MW3. It starts with the Infantry Vest to give you more Tac Sprint at a time, and the Stalker Boots are there to provide greater movement speed when strafing or aiming down your sights. The Commando Gloves will be great to reload on the go so that you won’t have to find a place to hide and do so. And the Bone Conduction Headset can help with that so that you know if anyone is coming up on you to take you by surprise. How to unlock MCW 6.8 in Modern Warfare 3 MCW 6.8 can be unlocked as part of the Armory Unlock challenges, unlocked after reaching level 25. You need to activate the challenge and complete 5 Daily Challenges to unlock the marksman rifle. Best alternative to MCW 6.8 in Modern Warfare 3 If you are looking for an alternative to MCW 6.8 in Modern Warfare 3, you can go for the Bruen Mk.9. This weapon is easy to use and provides both stability and damage comparable to the MCW 6.8. This concludes everything that you need to know about the MCW 6.8 in Modern Warfare 3. If you found it informative, do not forget to check out some of our other guides at Dexerto. Best Modern Warfare 3 AR class loadouts | How to slide cancel in Modern Warfare 3 | Best controller settings in Modern Warfare 3 | All maps & modes | How to play Modern Warfare 3 at 120 FPS on PS5

Best MCPR-300 Warzone 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks ActivisionThe MCPR-300 remains the most popular sniper rifle in the game in Season 4 even if this category of weapons is somewhat falling out of favor. If you need the best loadout to maximize MCPR-300’s potential on Warzone 2 then you are in the right place. Warzone 2’s Season 3 update reintroduction of one-shot sniper builds thanks to the buffed explosive rounds, marking the point at which MCPR-300 was instantly brought back into popularity. Now in Season 4, the sniper rifle’s popularity is not waning one bit as it is currently sitting at an impressive 9% pick rate according to WZRanked. Despite this, snipers require a high level of skill and accuracy to master. Fortunately for you, the MCPR-300 dominates long-range engagements and is an ideal weapon for new players and skilled veterans alike. The MCPR-300 brings back shades of Call of Duty’s iconic Barett .50cal which isn’t surprising as it’s based on the real world Barrett MRAD. The heavy-duty sniper can be kitted to suit multiple playstyles. Luckily, we’ve put together the ultimate meta MCPR-300 loadout in Warzone 2. Contents Best MCPR-300 Warzone 2 loadout – Best MCPR-300 Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the MCPR-300 in Warzone 2 – Best TAQ-56 alternatives in Warzone 2 – Best MCPR-300 Warzone 2 loadout Attachments Muzzle: Nilsound 90 – Barrel: 22″ OMX-456 – Laser: FSS OLE-V Laser – Ammunition: .300 Mag Explosive – Magazine: 5 Round Mag – Our loadout focuses on achieving the one-shot kill potential the MCPR-300 is built for. To be able to one shot it’s essential that you use the .300 Mag Explosive ammunition attachment. Without this attachment, the MCPR-300 can not one-shot a fully plated enemy. Unfortunately, the explosive rounds lower the MCPR’s bullet velocity quite a lot. To offset this it’s best to use both the Nilsound 90 muzzle and 22″ OMX-456 barrel. These increase bullet velocity, damage range, and offer the added bonus of making any shots fired quieter. This combination of muzzle and barrel does noticeably slow down the MCPR-300. To improve its ADS and make it feel snappier you’ll want to equip both the Corio LAZ-44 V3 laser and 5 Round Mag. These two attachments significantly speed up ADS speed making it easier to snap onto targets. It’s recommended to use the Corio LAZ-44 V3 over the previously preferred FSS OLE-V Laser as the latter projects a highly visible laser that can give away your position. Both provide an identical improvement to ADS so you aren’t missing out on much anyway. Best MCPR-300 Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment Base Perk 1: Overkill – Base Perk 2: Double Time – Bonus Perk: Spotter – Ultimate Perk: Ghost – Lethal: Proximity Mine – Tactical Equipment: Smoke Grenades – Having Overkill is essential for any Sniper Rifle loadout. It allows you to equip an SMG or AR to provide a short-range option when not holding a sniping angle. A good sniper support weapon is essential as a heavy sniper like the MCPR-300 is incredibly difficult to use up close. Next, Double Time lets you move around the map faster. Although this isn’t an aggressive build and focuses more on stationary gameplay it’s still useful to have the ability to sprint longer. Plus the 30% increase in crouch movement speed provided by Double Time is fantastic for sneaking around. Spotter ensures you’ll never be caught off guard by enemy equipment, killstreaks, or field upgrades. Meanwhile, Ghost partners well with a silenced sniper as it keeps you off the radar and makes it harder for enemies to figure out your location. Finally round off the setup with a Proximity Mine which can shut off an entrance or force opposing players to give away their position before pushing you and Smoke Grenades which are fantastic for emergency repositioning. How to unlock the MCPR-300 in Warzone 2 Thankfully, you don’t need to do anything to unlock the MCPR-300 in Modern Warfare 2 or Warzone 2. This is the default sniper and is therefore unlocked as soon as you get into the game. However, you will need to level up the MCPR all the way to max level to use the best build in Warzone 2 as that’s when you unlock the .300 Mag Explosive ammunition type. Best MCPR-300 alternatives in Warzone 2 The Victus XMR is a comparable Sniper Rifle to the MCPR-300. It handles a little slower but packs a nasty punch. Another good alternative is the new FJX Imperium which brings back the iconic Intervention and can even secure one-shot kills. That’s all for our MCPR-300 loadout! For more of our Warzone 2 coverage, check out these guides below: Do Warzone skins carry over to Warzone 2? | What are Strongholds in Warzone 2? | All Warzone 2 vehicles and Gas Stations | Does Warzone 2 have SBMM? | How do Warzone 2 circles work?

Best MCPR-300 Modern Warfare 2 loadout: Class setup, Attachments & Perks ActivisionModern Warfare 2’s MCPR-300 is one of the first Sniper Rifles made available to you. However, just because it’s one of the first doesn’t mean it’s not one of the most powerful Snipers in the game. But that power can only be achieved with the right loadout. Modern Warfare 2 has a plethora of weapons to cater to any type of soldier. One such weapon is the Sniper Rifle. It’s a deadly style of fighting that places the player on the tactical sides of the map as they use coordination and skill to pick off the enemy without being seen. One of the best Snipers in Modern Warfare 2 is the MCPR-300. It packs a punch, and can be extremely versatile when needed. However, to get that versatility, players need the best loadout. We’ve got exactly how to build the MCPR-300 here. If you’re looking for a powerful Warzone 2 MCPR-300 loadout instead, we’ve got a perfect choice. Contents Best MCPR-300 Modern Warfare 2 loadout – Best MCPR-300 Modern Warfare 2 class – How to unlock the MCPR-300 in Modern Warfare 2 – Alternatives to the MCPR-300 Modern Warfare 2 loadout – Best MCPR-300 Modern Warfare 2 loadout Barrel: 19″ Silentfire Barrel – Laser: Corio Laz-44 V3 – Ammunition: .300 Mag High Velocity – Magazine: 5-Round Mag – Rear Grip: Cronen Cheetah Grip – We start off our best MCPR-300 loadout with a 19″ Silentfire Barrel, perfect for a bit of extra damage and suppressing shots to keep you safe when firing. This works perfectly with the .300 Mag High Velocity ammo which helps you land those tough shots from range while also making them as deadly as possible. Despite the MCPR-300 having great damage and distance, it’s a relatively bulky weapon that’s tough to use in mid to close-range combat. With the Corio Laz-44 V3 laser, you can greatly improve your ADS speed and help your hipfire shots. This ADS speed is greatly improved with the Cronen Cheetah Grip, which also aids your sprint-to-fire speed allowing you to get the drop on the enemy. Lastly, we recommend using the 5-Round Mag to increase your reload, movement, and aiming speed as well as providing you with enough bullets to keep on shooting. Best MCPR-300 Modern Warfare 2 class Base Perk 1: Tracker – Base Perk 2: Battle Hardened – Bonus Perk: Fast Hands – Ultimate Perk: Ghost – Lethal: Proximity Mine – Tactical: Stim – The best Base Perks to choose when sniping are Tracker and Battle Hardened. Tracker allows you to keep a closer eye on the enemy while watching their movements, and Battle Hardened will keep you safe when the enemy inevitably try and flush you out. The next Perk to choose is Fast Hands. This will allow you to quickly swap over to your second weapon just in case things get a little too close for comfort. As for the ultimate, Ghost is a fantastic all-around Perk that will keep you concealed from any potential threat. Lastly, you can’t go wrong with a Proximity Mine and a Stim. One will keep you alive when you need it and the other will block off a blind spot so you know when someone’s sneaking up on you. How to unlock the MCPR-300 in Modern Warfare 2 Thankfully, you don’t need to do anything to unlock the MCPR-300 in Modern Warfare 2. This Sniper will unlock as soon as you get into the game. However, you’ll need to use the gun and level it up to level four before you begin to unlock the attachments. Alternatives to the MCPR-300 Modern Warfare 2 loadout If you’re finding the MCPR-300 just isn’t for you then it’s worth taking a look at the LA-B 300, which doesn’t have as much power but holds its own in fire rate, handling, and mobility. However, if you want to stray from the Sniper Rifles, it’s worth taking a look at some of the fantastic Marksman Rifles like the SP-R 208 or the LM-S for great close-up capabilities. Now that you have the best MCPR-300 loadout in Modern Warfare 2, you can check out some other guides we’ve compiled for Call of Duty: How to use Modern Warfare 2’s Gunsmith: Receivers and Blueprints explained | Modern Warfare 2 new equipment guide: Lethals and Tacticals explained | How to unlock MP5 SMG loadout in Modern Warfare 2 | How to Slide Cancel in Modern Warfare 2 | How to unlock Oni Operator & Blueprint in Modern Warfare 2 | All Modern Warfare 2 Killstreaks | What is Modern Warfare 2 Spec Ops mode? | All Modern Warfare 2 perks | All Modern Warfare 2 Field Upgrades

Best Marshal Warzone class loadout: Attachments, setup, perks Treyarch/ActivisionThe Marshal handgun has arrived in Warzone Season 5 and while this weapon isn’t as reliable as an AR or SMG, it certainly packs a punch with the right attachments. Season 5 of Warzone is well underway and players are getting stuck into all of the new content that Raven Software has been adding. Whether it’s tearing up Verdansk with the TEC-9 SMG, or beaming down enemies from afar with the EM2 AR, there’s plenty of new weapons to master following the major update. Primary guns aside, a new secondary has also been added to Cold War and Warzone in the form of the Marshal. This bulky break action pistol deals a serious amount of damage at close range, and with the right attachments, it can be top-tier alongside a versatile AR. So, without further ado, let’s break down exactly what attachments and loadout you should be running with the newly added Marshal. Best Marshal loadout for Warzone Attachments Barrel: 6.5″ Cut Down – Stock: Dual Wield – Optic: – – Ammunition: – – Perks Double Time – Ghost – Amped – Equipment Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Heartbeat – Primary: Krig 6 – First of all, you’ll want to equip the Marshal with the 6.5″ Cut Down for increased bullet velocity and effective damage range. While the handgun will never be a weapon that can pick off enemies from afar, the boost in range will ensure it always does maximum damage in those close encounters. Most importantly, remember to use the Duel Weild Stock attachment to significantly boost the gun’s damage at close range, as two Marshal will always be better than one in most cases. Finally, it’s best to leave the other attachments slots unused as the incendiary ammo will decrease the initial damage of the Marshal and the optic will remove the ability to use Dual Wield. How to unlock the Marshal in Warzone Luckily, Raven Software has made unlocking the Marshal relatively easy in Warzone, so it shouldn’t take you too long to get your hands on the new weapon. All you need to do is land one headshot with any handgun in 15 different games, these being in either Warzone or Cold War multiplayer. To complete this challenge quickly, we recommend heading into Cold War as the matches are much quicker and it’s a lot easier to complete weapon challenges. So, there you have it, that’s the best Marshal loadout in Warzone’s current meta. Don’t forget to check out our Call of Duty homepage for all the latest news, guides, and leaks.

Best Marine SP loadout in Black Ops 6 beta: Class setup, attachments, perks DexertoThe Marine SP is arguably one of the worst weapons in the Black Ops 6 beta, but the shotgun shines with the right loadout. You’ll need to trust the process with the Marine SP. Without any attachments, poor damage range and mobility hold the shotgun back from being a true contender. However, after you level up the weapon and progress through every weapon level, you will get attachments that make everything easier. Let’s jump right into which loadout works best. Best Black Ops 6 Marine SP loadout Muzzle: Modified Choke – Barrel: Long Barrel – Fire Mods: Rapid Fire – Laser: Fast Motion Laser – Rapid Fire increases the rechambering speed and will be helpful when you need one more shot to kill an enemy but wouldn’t have fired fast enough previously. Next up, the Modified Choke muzzle makes it easier to land a one-shot kill with a headshot thanks to the improved aim-down sight pellet spread. With this attachment all of the bullets will be closer together and more accurate. One of the weakest aspects of this weapon is its poor damage range. So, with that in mind, the Long Barrel increases damage range and magazine ammo capacity. We still expect the shotgun to struggle in some engagements, but this attachment helps. There will be instances where you don’t have enough time to aim down sight in a gunfight. For those engagements, the Fast Motion Laser improves jumping, diving, and sliding, hip-fire spread. Best Perks, Equipment & Combat Specialty for Marine SP The Marine SP suffers from poor mobility, so we recommend using a perk set that makes it easier to get closer to enemies without getting caught. Gung-Ho, Double Time, and Dexterity all improve mobility and Ghost keeps you off the mini-map and protects from UAVs constantly sweeping the area. Using the three red Perks, you unlock the Enforce combat specialty, which grants a temporary buff to movement speed and heal regeneration rate after killing enemies. This is the best combat specialty and should be on every loadout. To gain these benefits, you’ll want to use these perks and equipment: Wildcard: Perk Greed – Perk 1: Ghost – Perk 2: Gung-Ho – Perk 3: Double Time – Perk 4: Dexterity – Lethal: Thermo Grenade – Tactical: Concussion – Field Upgrade: Trophy System – How to unlock Marine SP in Black Ops 6 Beta The Marine SP is unlocked by reaching level 4, making it one of the more accessible weapons. In addition, that should happen in no time, as all experience rates are doubled in the beta. For more meta builds, check out our Black Ops 6 gun tier list, as well as the best Jackal PDW and best C9 loadouts, both of which are dominating the beta. Also, you’ll want to make sure that your controller settings are optimized to avoid being hindered.

Best Marco 5 Warzone loadout: Attachments, Perks, Setup ActivisionThe best Marco 5 SMG Warzone loadout is proving incredibly popular in Season 5 Reloaded, so here are all the attachments and Perks you need to boost its overall power. Warzone Season 5 Reloaded is well underway and players can now unlock the Lienna 57 LMG and BP50 bullpup AR. However, when it comes to SMGs, the Marco 5 SMG has been getting a lot of attention from the game’s player base and is currently sitting at an impressive 3.9% pick rate. This is largely down to its incredible mobility and close-range damage potential. In fact, when the Marco 5 SMG is kitted out with the best attachments, it absolutely shreds through opponents in a matter of seconds. The community has quickly identified this with the Marco 5 already securing a spot as one of the most popular SMGs in the game. However, to maximize the power of this gun, you’ll need a top-tier loadout and luckily, we’ve got you covered. Contents Best Marco 5 Warzone loadout – Best Marco 5 setup (Perks & equipment) – How to unlock the Marco 5 in Warzone – Alternative to the Marco 5 in Warzone – Best Marco 5 Warzone loadout Muzzle: Recoil Booster – Barrel: Imerito 342mm 04P – Optic: Slate Reflector – Stock: Imerito FR – Underbarrel: Mark VI Skeletal – Magazine: 9mm 48 Round Drums – Ammo Type: Subsonic – Rear Grip: Taped grip – Perk 1: Gung-Ho – Perk 2: Quick – The best Marco 5 Warzone loadout utilizes attachments that greatly raise its TTK. First up is the Recoil Booster and Subsonic, which increase the gun’s fire rate and stealth capabilities. These attachments synergize very well with the movement speed boost from the Taped Grip and Quick Perk. In fact, when these attachments are utilized, you’ll have access to one of the fastest loadouts in the game. In order to control the Marco 5’s recoil, we’ve attached the Mark VI Skeletal, Imerito FR, and Imerito 342mm 04P. These attachments greatly improve handling, allowing you to effortlessly beam your foes without the need for any major recoil management. The Slate Reflector offers the perfect magnification needed to line up those all-important head and body shots, while Gung-Ho and 9mm 48 Round Drums really help with the Marco 5’s run and gun playstyle. Best Marco 5 setup (Perks & equipment) Perks & Equipment Perk 1: E.O.D. – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Secondary: Cooper Carbine – Lethal: Throwing Knife – Tactical: Stim – Similar to many Warzone setups, our Marco 5 loadout utilizes E.O.D, Amped, and Overkill. E.O.D greatly reduces the damage taken from non-killstreak explosives and fire, which, in a game like Warzone, is a great addition to your setup. Amped allows you to switch between weapons faster, making it particularly useful if you do run out of bullets mid-fight. Lastly, Overkill will enable you to equip the meta Cooper Carbine loadout as your secondary. As the Marco 5 is purely tailored around close-range combat, the Cooper Carbine is the perfect option for securing mid-range kills. Versatility is key in Warzone and having weapons that can secure kills across various distances can lead to more successful kills. To round off this loadout, we’ve utilized the Throwing Knife and the Stim in the Lethal and Tactical slots. The Throwing Knife is great at instantly finishing off downed enemies, which also enables you to avoid wasting ammo. Meanwhile, the Stim gives you the ability to stave off any major damage – giving you the ability to reset fights and turn the tide of even the toughest battles. How to unlock the Marco 5 in Warzone In order to unlock the Marco 5 in Warzone, you’ll need to reach Tier 15 in the Season 4 Battle Pass. Simply play games of Warzone or Vanguard and the gun will be yours in no time. Of course, you can always utilize tier skips to speed up this process should you wish to unlock the gun right away. Alternative to the Marco 5 in Warzone If you’re looking for an alternative to the Marco 5, then you really can’t go wrong with the MP40. Currently sitting as the second most popular SMG in Warzone, it’s a reliable option that’s guaranteed to secure you kills. This is largely down to its incredibly high fire rate, mobility, and close-range damage. If that wasn’t enough, the MP40 also has decent mid-range capabilities. While it may not beat any ARs, the added range can help with securing kills outside of traditional SMG scenarios. So, there you have it, the best Marco 5 loadout you should be using in Warzone Season 5 Reloaded. Make sure you check out our Warzone page and weapon loadouts below to get an edge in the new update. Best streamer loadouts | Most popular Warzone weapons| Best Assault Rifles | Top 20 highest-earning players | Welgun | MP40 || PPSh-41 | AK-47 | Best controller settings | Top 10 best class setups and loadouts | Highest-earning Warzone players | Armaguerra 43 | Swiss K31 | Best STG44

Best Marco 5 Vanguard loadout: Attachments, Perks, Setup ActivisionThe Marco 5 is a highly mobile close-range SMG new to Vanguard Season 4, which lets players dual-wield weapons for the first time. Here’s our best Marco 5 Vanguard loadout to help you unlock its potential. Vanguard Season 4 is here, and it’s brought plenty of exciting new content to the game. The new Battle Pass is stuffed full of unlockables for players to grind for and the return of the Shi No Numa Zombies map has long-time CoD fans eager to jump in. New weapons are the most intriguing part of any new update and Season 4 has delivered by adding two on day one. Arguably the most interesting new weapon is the Marco 5, Vanguard’s first dual-wield weapon that revolves mainly around hipfire. Before you head out to try this new in Season 4, you’ll need to know the ideal setup. Here’s our best Marco 5 loadout in Vanguard, including the best attachments and Perks. Contents Best Marco 5 Vanguard loadout – Best Marco 5 Perks & equipment – How to unlock the Marco 5 in Vanguard – Alternative to the Marco 5 in Vanguard – Best Marco 5 Vanguard loadout Muzzle: Recoil Booster – Barrel: Botti 240MM VL – Stock: Botti HF Folding – Magazine: 8mm Nambu 60 Round Drum – Ammo Type: Subsonic – Rear Grip: Fabric Grip – Proficiency: Akimbo – Kit: Fully Loaded – The Marco 5 boasts very good mobility and a blistering fire rate, so our setup focuses on those features, as well as hipfire accuracy to make it deadly when Akimbo is equipped. We kicked things off with a Recoil Booster and the Botti 240MM VL to drastically increase the rate of fire and lower the overall TTK. Next, the Botti HF Folding Stock is crucial as it boosts both hipfire accuracy and sprint-to-fire speed, along with the Fabric Grip for even more mobility and better hipfire recoil recovery. We’ve also picked the 8mm Nambu 60 Round Drum for a massive increase in recoil control and accuracy. Finally, we chose Subsonic rounds to keep you off the minimap when firing, and Fully Loaded to ensure you have more than enough ammo to burn through. With this setup, the Marco 5 becomes perfect for rushing around the map and mowing down enemies at close-range. Best Marco 5 Perks & equipment Perk 1: Fortified – Perk 2: Forward Intel – Perk 3: Lightweight – Secondary: Machine Pistol – Lethal: MK2 Frag Grenade – Tactical: Stun Grenade – Field Upgrade: Armor – Perks are an essential part of CoD Vanguard, and paring the right ones with the Marco 5 is vital to success. We recommend starting with Fortified, to help you soak up explosive and fire damage when tearing around the map. Forward Intel highlights where enemies are spawning, allowing you to quickly move into position and secure easy kills. Finally, Lightweight is a must since it boosts mobility even further, letting you get the jump on the opposing team with rapid movement. When it comes to equipment, it’s largely down to personal preference. We think the simple Frag Grenade and Stun Grenade combination is the most effective, while the Armor Field Upgrade gives you an extra layer of protection in sticky situations. How to unlock the Marco 5 in Vanguard To unlock the Marco 5 in CoD Vanguard, all you have to do is reach Tier 15 of the Season 4 Battle Pass by earning XP. Don’t worry, this is one of the many free tiers in Season 4, so players can earn the Marco 5 without having to buy the Battle Pass. Alternative to the Marco 5 in Vanguard The Akimbo option makes the Marco 5 SMG pretty unique in Vanguard, but if you’re not enjoying it you can always go for a different meta SMG. The MP40 has dominated the game ever since it launched, so we think this would be your best bet. It has virtually no recoil and isn’t limited to poor range in the same way as other SMGs. Not to mention it also kills incredibly fast, meaning it’s ideal for almost any situation a multiplayer match can throw at you. For more on CoD Vanguard, be sure to check out our other useful guides:

Best MAC-10 Warzone loadout: Class setup, Attachments, Perks ActivisionThe best Warzone Season 4 Reloaded MAC-10 loadout is still a monster and is still one of the best SMGs in Warzone. Discover which attachments and perks you should equip to make the strongest MAC-10 build. Weapons such as the Blixen and Marco 5 have been tearing things up recently in Warzone Season 4 Reloaded, but thanks to midseason buffs and nerfs, things are changing. The MAC-10 is still a highly viable option to use in Caldera, Rebirth, or Fortune’s Keep. Since the game’s release, the MAC-10 has been an insanely popular SMG in Warzone with many players equipping the best attachments in order to get an advantage over their foes. This mobile SMG comes packed with a lightning-fast rate of fire, solid damage, ludicrous hip-fire accuracy, and practically becomes a pinpoint laser with the right attachments. Contents Best MAC-10 Warzone Loadout – Best MAC-10 setup (Perks & Equipment) – How to unlock the MAC-10 in Warzone – Best MAC-10 loadout Warzone tips – Alternative MAC-10 loadout – Best MAC 10 loadout for Warzone Attachments Muzzle: Agency Suppressor – Barrel: 5.9” Task Force – Laser: Tiger Team Spotlight – Stock: Raider Stock – Ammunition: STAGNAG 53 Rnd Drum – The best MAC-10 loadout bolsters the gun’s damage, but it also gives you the recoil reduction and increased mag size to down multiple foes inquick succession. First up is the Agency Suppressor, and as the name suggests, this noise-reducing attachment keeps your shots concealed from the mini-map, and like Modern Warfare’s Monolithic Suppressor, it helps with your damage at range. The 5.9″ Task Force improves the MAC-10’s bullet velocity, damage, and effective damage range — making it an excellent boost to the lethality of the Agency Suppressor and creating more opportunities to hit targets outside of close-quarter scenarios. While you’ll mainly want to use this SMG in more tightly-packed sections of a map, the extra range can really help in those situations where you’re caught reloading your ranged weapon. See the latest Call Of Duty deals here To complement the range and damage attachments, the Tiger Team Spotlight and Raider Stock reduce your recoil, increase strafe speed, and enhance overall mobility. However, if you wish to increase the MAC-10’s mobility even further, then you could always use the Serpent Wrap as an alternative attachment. Rounding things off at the bottom is the STAGNAG 53 Rnd Drum. This magazine gives you the ammunition necessary to down groups of foes without reloading, crucial given the MAC-10’s ability to quickly tear through its ammo reserves. Best MAC 10 Perks and Equipment Attachments Perk 1: E.O.D. – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Secondary: KG M40 – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Stim – The best MAC-10 loadout uses E.O.D and Amped to keep you safe from any explosive blasts, while also giving increased speed when swapping from your primary weapon to your secondary weapon. These Perks are important for most meta Warzone loadouts, but especially those that rely on the run-and-gun approach to the game’s combat. Meanwhile, Overkill enables the use of the best KG M40 loadout – which still remains a top AR in Warzone after all this time. Alongside the MAC-10, it gives you complete versatility in any gunfight and will allow you to come out on top no matter how close or far away your opponent is. Lastly, both the Semtex and Stim help with flushing out pesky campers and increase your survivability. Simply rush into enemy-controlled buildings and let the bullets and explosives fly, as well making sure your finger is poised over the Stim button for a quick pick-me-up. How to unlock the MAC 10 in Warzone In order to unlock the MAC-10 in Warzone, simply equip an SMG and kill two or more players rapidly in 15 different matches. Doing this in Warzone can be a little trickier, so hop over to Vanguard, Black Ops Cold War, or Modern Warfare’s multiplayer modes and play Team Deathmatch or Free-for-All. Once you’ve completed the above challenge, you’ll finally be able to claim the MAC-10 as your prize and go crazy with it in CoD Warzone. Best MAC 10 loadout Warzone tips The MAC-10 has had an incredible run in Warzone. Even though it’s not quite as popular, due to the introduction of the MP40, it’s still trying to compete for the top spot in the SMG meta. With that said, this weapon is still highly effective and we’ve decided to share some tips to take full of advantage of it: The MAC-10 excels at close-range. Its fire rate and speedy handling all lend to these capabilities, and despite Caldera’s more open spaces and fights, contained areas and buildings are the optimal spots for the MAC-10. – This SMG has fast handling and superb mobility. This makes it quite easy to be aggressive, execute quick flanks, and out-maneuver enemies. – The Heartbeat Sensor tactical is great for locating enemies that are in close proximity. If you suspect an enemy is nearby, and you don’t have the option of using a UAV, this tactical can pinpoint their exact location. – Alternative to the Warzone MAC 10 loadout If you’re looking for an alternative loadout to the MAC-10, check out our MP40 loadout. This punchy SMG has been dominating Warzone Pacific and still continues to sit comfortably near the top of the SMG rankings, thanks to its damage output and excellent mobility. With its fast handling speeds, great accuracy, and high damage output – the MP40 is a great pick for those that want a little more range in gunfights. So, there you have it, the best MAC-10 loadout that can destroy even the most skilled Warzone players. Make sure you check out our other Warzone guides to get a competitive edge in CoD’s battle royale game: Best streamer loadouts | Most popular Warzone weapons | Best Sniper Rifles | All Warzone bunker codes | FFAR Warzone class | Top 20 highest-earning players | Best Warzone weapons: Ultimate tier list with meta loadouts | Best Warzone landing spots on Caldera map If you click on a product link on this page we may earn a small affiliate commission.

Best M82 Warzone loadout class: Attachments, setup, perks Treyarch/ActivisionThe M82 certainly isn’t a weapon for those who are looking to rush into gunfights aggressively, but it remains a solid sniper rifle with the correct attachments equipped. While the M82 was previously known for its fast fire rate, drastic changes in the Season 3 Reloaded update saw the sniper completely reworked. Now, it’s a semi-automatic rifle with a slower fire rate in exchange for higher damage output. Other picks may top the list while the M82 finds its footing in this new role, but for early adopters, you can be rewarded with one of the most devastating guns in Warzone today. With the right attachments, this Black Ops Cold War sniper can be absolutely devastating at medium to long-range. Without further ado, let’s check out exactly how you should kit out your M82. Best M82 sniper loadout in Warzone Attachments Muzzle: Wrapped Suppressor – Barrel: 22.6″ Tiger Team – Optic: Ultrazoom Custom – Underbarrel: Bipod – Rear Grip: Airborne Elastic Wrap – With a completely new rate of fire, any of your previous M82 loadouts will more than likely be redundant. Rather than trying to boost this stat, you’re now free to focus on other areas of improvement thanks to the Season 3 rework. Therefore, our build prioritizes Bullet Velocity and Recoil Control above all else. For starters, the Wrapped Suppressor Muzzle and 22.6″ Tiger Team Barrel are must-picks to get the most out of the M82. With an added 50% Bullet Velocity, shots will be connecting with targets much faster than usual. The only big downside to these two powerful attachments is your mobility. You’ll need to time shots well and accept a slower ADS speed by default. This can be improved somewhat with the Airborne Elastic Wrap, but don’t expect a world of difference. Last but not least, we run with the Bipod Underbarrel to keep the Ultrazoom Custom OpTic on point at all times. Best M82 sniper loadout in Warzone (Perks & Equipment) Perk 1: E.O.D. – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Secondary: AK-74u SMG – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Heartbeat Sensor – Given how slow you’ll be firing with the new M82, you won’t be able to rely on it for close-range gunfights. Quickscoping simply isn’t a great idea with a lowered ADS speed. As a result, keeping a powerful SMG on standby is absolutely the way to go, that’s where the AK-74u comes in. Rocking the Overkill perk allows you to prepare for any type of engagement. Moreover, Amped will have you swapping between guns in the blink of an eye to quickly adapt no matter where you are in Verdansk. Read More: Best Warzone Sniper Rifle loadouts – There’s no looking past the typical Semtex and Heartbeat Sensor to round things out as well. They’re by far the most common picks in the current meta so there’s no reason to avoid using them. Hopefully, this guide has provided you with a deadly M82 setup that will help you dominate your Warzone games. Don’t forget to check out our dedicated aim guide if you’re struggling to land all of your shots.

Best M82 loadout in Black Ops Cold War: Attachments, perks, more Activision / TreyarchBlack Ops Cold War’s M82 is capable of dropping enemies in just one shot to the head or chest. The M82 is one of the most lethal guns out there, but what attachments should you be using? The M82 (Barret .50cal) is the last sniper rifle unlocked in Black Ops Cold War. This gun performs very similarly to Modern Warfare’s Rytec AMR, giving players the ability to quickly pump out lethal headshots. Whether you’re a fan of CoD sniping or just want to see how lethal this weapon is, then you’ll want to use this deadly weapon. In order to help you get the most out of this gun, we’ve put together an M82 loadout you can use to dominate your enemies in Black Ops Cold War’s multiplayer modes. Best M82 loadout for Black Ops Cold War Here’s how you need to kit out your M82 to deliver those montage-worthy headshot kills. Barrel: 22.6” Tiger Team – Underbarrel: Infiltrator Grip – Magazine: 7 RND – Handle: Airborne Elastic Wrap – Stock: Raider Pad – Secondary 1911 – Throwables Tactical: Stun Grenade – Lethal: Grenade – Field Upgrade: Field Mic – Perks Perk 1: Flak Jacket + Tactical Mask – Perk 2: Assassin + Gearhead – Perk 3: Cold Blooded + Ghost – Wildcard Perk Greed – The M82 has absolutely incredible damage and speed when kitted out with these attachments, allowing you to quickly take down multiple hostiles in a matter of seconds. This loadout utilizes the 22.6” Tiger Team barrel, which bolsters the sniper’s damage, fire rate, and bullet velocity. As a result, this barrel is an absolute must as it drastically increases your kill potential across all ranges. Not only is it easier than ever to pick up those one-shot multi-kills, but it’s also more forgiving should you fail to miss any shots. Read More: Best Bullfrog loadout in Black Ops Cold War – Snipers can often be rather cumbersome when it comes to mobility, so the Infiltrator Grip and Raider Pad increase movement speed and aim walking speed. While it’s often best to hold an angle and wait for players to come to you, there will be times when you need to reposition. Fortunately, these attachments make doing so less of a hassle. Due to the M82’s increased fire rate, we’ve utilized the 7 RND mag to enable you to unleash more one-shots without having to constantly reload. Lastly, the Airborne Elastic Wrap decreases the time needed for ADS. Quickscoping is still off the table with this setup, but it will certainly keep any deaths caused by slow ADS animations to a minimum. Meanwhile, the Stun Grenade is an obvious choice when it comes to stopping any highly mobile enemy’s dead in their tracks. Simply throw out the Stun Grenade and quickly deliver a lethal headshot or switch to your 1911 in close-quarter fights. In terms of perks, Greed Wildcard is the way to go. This enables the use of Cold Blooded and Ghost, which keeps you hidden from enemy Spy Planes. When you combine these perks with the survivability from Flak Jacket + Tactical Mask, you have a sniper loadout that is incredibly difficult to counter. The Assassin Perk also gives you free intel and highlights any enemies that are currently on killstreaks, enabling you to quickly shut them down before they snowball out of control. Lastly, Gearhead reduced the Filed Upgrade Cool Down, enabling multiples uses of the Field Mic. Simply find a decent vantage point and begin decimating your foes with lethal precision. So there you have it, this is the best M82 loadout you can use to wreak havoc across the battlefield. If you want to keep updated with all the latest Call of Duty news and updates, then follow us over on @DexertoIntel.

Best M4A1 Warzone loadout class: Attachments, Perks, Setup Infinity WardThe M4A1 has always been a consistent weapon but it fell out of the meta in favor of newer and more popular Vanguard ARs. The M4A1 is back and better than ever after the Warzone Season 4 update. No gun comes close to reaching the popularity status of the NZ-41, but the M4A1 perfectly fits the current long-range AR meta. Although there are other long-range options, such as the STG44, Cooper Carbine, and Kilo 142, Modern Warfare’s M4A1 is always a solid choice. While it may not be the top-tier meta weapon at the moment, it’s always reliable and can be incredibly effective with the correct setup. Without further ado, let’s check how you can unlock and kit out your M4A1 to get the most out of the gun. Best M4A1 Warzone loadout Attachments Muzzle: Monolithic Suppressor – Barrel: Stock M16 Grenadier – Optic: VLK 3.0x Optic – Underbarrel: Commando Foregrip – Ammunition: 60 round mags – Perks Perk 1: Double Time – Perk 2: Ghost – Perk 3: Combat Scout – Equipment Tactical: Heartbeat Sensor – Lethal: Semtex – First up, you’ll notice the Monolithic Suppressor and Stock M16 Grenadier. These attachments will offer a significant boost to damage range, as well as stabilizing shots to a significant degree. Not to mention a suppressor is key in the battle royale environment to remain undetected. Next up is the Commando Foregrip, which will augment your recoil control and maximize your efficiency in distant gunfights. This will be complemented by the 60 round mags, which enable you to take on multiple players simultaneously, without the need to stop and reload. Finally, the VLK 3.0x Optic is one you can swap out for a different sight if you prefer. We’re just recommending optics in this class because the M4A1’s iron sights aren’t ideal for long-range engagements. How to unlock the M4A1 in Warzone The M4A1 is available for Warzone players to use as soon as they start the game as it is unlocked at level 1. Although there are no requirements to use the assault rifle, you will need to unlock the best attachments for the gun. You can do this by playing in matches and completing the various challenges associated with the weapon. Once you have done so, you’ll need a top-tier loadout to get the most out of the weapon. Alternative M4A1 Warzone loadout If you’re looking for an alternative loadout, professional Warzone player FaZe Booya has his own preferred setup for the M4A1 that turns it into a deadly SMG. He opts to use Muzzle: Monolithic Suppressor – Laser: Tac Laser – Underbarrel: Merc Foregrip – Ammunition: 9mm Para 32-Round Mags – Perk: Sleight of Hand – If you want to try out some different weapons in Warzone or even Multiplayer, check out our full list of the 10 most popular Warzone weapons tier list.

Best M4 Warzone loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks ActivisionThe M4 is a classic and effective choice in Call of Duty, particularly in Warzone. Here’s our top M4 loadout for Warzone, including the most effective attachments and perks. Warzone‘s Season 4 update is well underway, and the meta so far remains extremely similar to what we saw at the end of Season 3 Reloaded, with some classics coming back in popularity. Success in Warzone comes down to picking the right weapon, and the M4 has already secured a spot in the meta as the safe, beginner-friendly, overall pretty good weapon. The classic Assault Rifle is one of Modern Warfare 2’s best guns and has quickly taken over Warzone’s Al Mazrah as well. With a lethal TTK, an easy-to-control recoil pattern, and a solid damage range, you can’t go wrong with the M4 as your go-to AR in WZ. Check out the best M4 loadout in Warzone below, along with the best combination of attachments, Perks, and equipment. Contents Best M4 Warzone loadout – Best M4 Warzone class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the M4 in Warzone – Best M4 alternatives in Warzone – Best M4 Warzone loadout Muzzle: Harbinger D20 – Barrel: Hightower 20″ Barrel – Underbarrel: FTAC Ripper 56 – Optic: Aim-OP V4 – Magazine: 60 Round Mag – We begin our best M4 loadout with the Harbinger D20, which improves the weapon’s bullet velocity while also suppressing the weapon. Then we’ve gone for the Hightower 20″ Barrel, for another boost to bullet velocity as well as general damage range. Optics are mostly down to personal preference, but we like the Aim-OP V4 as it offers great accuracy at medium to long range. In the Underbarrel slot, we recommend the 5.56 High Velocity Ammunition, which improves the weapon’s firepower in long-range engagements. Lastly, if you’re playing Warzone on squads, you’re going to need enough ammo to take down multiple enemies without reloading. That’s why we’ve picked the 60 Round Mags to help you dispatch as much of the opposing team as possible before having to change clips. Best M4 Warzone class: Perks & equipment Base Perk 1: Overkill – Base Perk 2: Bomb Squad – Bonus Perk: Resupply – Ultimate Perk: High Alert – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical Equipment: Flash Grenades – The first Perk is Overkill, which allows you to bring another primary weapon, such as an SMG or Sniper Rifle. Explosives can end your match quickly if you’re not careful, so Bomb Squad is ideal for extra protection. Then, Resupply refills your own equipment every 30 seconds. Al Mazrah is full of buildings for players to hide in, so it’s hard to spot every enemy team. Luckily, the Vanguard package features High Alert, which causes your screen to pulse when spotted by a rival player. Equipment-wise, you can’t go wrong with Semtex to quickly flush a squad out of a building, paired with Flash Grenades to disorientate players before moving in for the kill. How to unlock the M4 in Warzone Luckily, the M4 is one of the guns available from the start in Warzone, so all you have to do is reach Level 4 to unlock Gunsmith and begin experimenting with loadouts. Best M4 alternatives in Warzone It may take some time for you to find the perfect weapon in Warzone, so if the M4 isn’t working you could switch to the TAQ-56 AR. Another powerful long-range AR, the TAQ-56 makes short work of foes with its strong damage output and top-tier stability. But if you want something a little more mobile, the Kastov-74u could be the way to go. It’s absolutely lethal and is perfectly paired up alongside a meta sniper. While you won’t be beaming anyone from a distance with this trusty AR, it’s hard to outmatch this gun at medium range. For more on Warzone, be sure to check out our other guides: Do Warzone skins carry over to Warzone? | What are Strongholds in Warzone? | All Warzone vehicles and Gas Stations | Does Warzone have SBMM? | How do Warzone circles work?

Best Modern Warfare 3 M4 loadout: Class setup, Attachments & Perks ActivisonThe M4 is a versatile AR in Modern Warfare 3. Here are the top perks, attachments, and equipment to maximize its effectiveness. The fan-favorite rifle since Call of Duty 4: Modern Warfare, the M4, hasn’t changed much. This reliable AR has been featured in every Modern Warfare game offering a strong all-around option for those interested. Throughout Modern Warfare’s lifespan the M4 has established itself as a top-tier assault rifle. It is well-rounded with a fast fire rate, great TTK, and easy-to-control recoil. It truly is the weapon you pick when you want a primary that covers just about every scenario. We’ve put together the best Modern Warfare 3 M4 loadout below, complete with the best attachments, Perks, and equipment. Contents Best M4 MW3 loadout – M4 MW3 loadout: Perks & Equipment – How to unlock the M4 in Modern Warfare 3 – Alternatives to the M4 MW3 loadout – Best Modern Warfare 3 M4 loadout Muzzle: FTac Castle Comp – Barrel: Hightower 20″ Barrel – Optic: Cronen Mini Dot or Cronen Mini Pro – Stock: Corio Precio Factory – Rear Grip: Phantom Grip – Even when left stock the M4 is already a versatile assault rifle without many flaws. This gives us the freedom to build it how we want. To suit multiplayer’s fast pacing it’s best to optimize for mobility while also looking to reduce the M4’s recoil where possible. For recoil control, we use both the FTac Castle Comp and Phantom Grip. These combine to significantly reduce recoil and make the M4 more accurate during sustained fire. In saying that, this M4 loadout is more suited to the shorter sightlines found in 6v6 than the likes of Ground War and Invasion. To improve mobility it’s recommended to use both the Corio Precio Factory Stock and Hightower 20″ Barrel. The barrel improves ADS speed without any notable downsides making it a good choice for any build. Meanwhile, the stock massively improves ADS strafe speed, and tactical sprint speed. The final attachment is the most flexible but we’ve opted for the Cronen Mini Pro to provide the clearest optic possible. Those comfortable with the M4’s iron sights should consider a suitable underbarrel or mobility improving laser instead. Modern Warfare 3 M4 loadout: Perks & Equipment Vest: Overkill Vest – Gloves: Scavenger Gloves – Boots: Lightweight Boots – Gear: Mag Holster – Secondary: Expedite 12 – Tactical: Flash Grenade – Lethal: Frag Grenade or C4 – We’re opting for the Overkill Vest instead of the Infantry Vest, granting an extra primary weapon alongside perks, with weapon handling and reload buffs.. Choosing Scavenger Gloves ensures ammo drops from eliminated enemies, keeping you supplied. Lightweight Boots increase movement and swim speed, while Mag Holster speeds up reloads. With this setup, you’ll stay stocked on ammo, reload faster, and swap weapons quickly, ideal for the primary weapon in the secondary slot. The Expedite 12 shotgun, from Modern Warfare 2, boasts high damage, and with the Expedite L-Bolt attachment, it gains even faster fire rate, enhancing its stopping power. How to unlock the M4 in Modern Warfare 3 Thanks to a new feature called Carry Forward, all players will have the opportunity to obtain, utilize, and level up the M4 in both Warzone and MW3 if they had acquired it previously in the last game. If you haven’t played MW2, you can still unlock this gun in MW3, but it will take considerably more time. To unlock the M4, you must reach player level 55 and complete the associated challenge. You can find this challenge in the weapon selection menu within the loadout screen. Alternatives to the Modern Warfare 3 M4 loadout If you find that the M4 doesn’t quite cut it for you, then there are other options for you to try out such as the Lachman-556, which is just as versatile in all situations. However, if you want something that packs more punch, the TAQ-56 is a fantastic option with it being the most used gun in MW2 and dominating Ranked Play loadouts. That’s our guide for the best M4 loadout in MW3! For more content on the game, check out our guides below: Best Modern Warfare 3 AR class loadouts | How to slide cancel in Modern Warfare 3 | Best controller settings in Modern Warfare 3 | All maps & modes | How to play Modern Warfare 3 at 120 FPS on PS5 | Modern Warfare 3 TTK | How long is the Modern Warfare 3 campaign? | Campaign mission list | How to fix packet burst | How to play MW3 Zombies in third person

Best M1928 Vanguard class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Proficiency, Setup ActivisionThe best M1928 loadout in CoD Vanguard isn’t to be overlooked, helping you to shred through matches with lightning-fast speed. From optical attachments to equipment and perks, here’s all you need to know for the SMG class. With most SMG classes in Vanguard, speed is king. The game has such a fast TTK that improving your agility is really all that matters. That’s exactly the case with this optimal M1928 loadout. While the gun can be molded into a longer-range tool, it best serves as a fast-firing weapon in close-range battles. As a result, prioritizing ADS speed, movement speed, and sprint to fire speed are all essential. Here’s the best way to do just that with our ultimate M1928 Vanguard loadout. Contents Best M1928 Vanguard loadout – Best M1928 Vanguard class setup – How to unlock the M1928 in Vanguard – Alternative to the M1928 Vanguard loadout – Best M1928 Vanguard loadout Attachments Muzzle: Gutts Compensator – Barrel: Chariot 2.5” Rapid – Optic: Spitfire MK.3 Reflector – Stock: CGC S Adjustable – Underbarrel: M1941 Handstop – Magazine: .45 ACP 30 Round Fast Mags – Ammo Type: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Fabric Grip – Proficiency: Frenzy – Kit: Quick – Vanguard’s Gunsmith takes things to an entirely new level by allowing 10 different attachments on a single gun. Therefore, it’s possible to fine-tune a perfect build for a specific playstyle. With this M1928 setup, it’s all about speed and mobility. Starting things off is the Gutts Compensator Muzzle. This is one of few attachment categories that we use in this build to improve recoil. With almost everything else focusing on speed, accuracy can take a hit. So it’s important to have at least a handful of attachments keeping your aim on point. Speaking of that speed, the Chariot 2.5” Rapid Barrel is the first important pick to make you a demon on any given map. With an improved fire rate, you’ll be taking down foes in an instant before they can properly react. When it comes to choosing an Optic, it’s ultimately down to your own preference. We’ve gone with the simple Spitfire MK.3 Reflector, but whatever you pick, just be sure to keep it simple. There’s no need for a sniper-equivalent scope on an SMG, especially not one based around agility. Further adding to the M1928’s mobility, the CGC S Adjustable Stock is one of the more important picks for this build. While it comes at a cost of overall accuracy, it compensates with an impressive boost to movement speed and sprint-to-fire speed. This will have you running and gunning better than anyone else on the map. The M1941 Handstop Underbarrel comes in to make up for the hit to accuracy once again. Your initial bursts will be that much more focused with this attachment equipped. Choosing the right Magazine is no simple task but with speed our top priority here, the .45 ACP 30 Round Fast Mags are the most logical option. All others come with downsides that are just too impactful. Here, you get a decent boost to reload speed at the cost of a smaller mag size. A worthy sacrifice considering how often you’ll be reloading. Read More: Best Vanguard STG44 loadout – As with most Vanguard loadouts, bullet velocity is essential, so choosing the Lengthened Ammo Type will only help hit your enemies quicker than usual. Next comes the Fabric Grip Rear Grip to once again improve your mobility. This has a combined buff for ADS speed and sprint to fire speed, meaning your SMG will be extremely snappy. Last but not least are the two weapon perks that come through Proficiency and Kit. Here, we’ve settled on Frenzy and Quick respectively. Frenzy is just too powerful to ignore, triggering health regen immediately after securing a kill. Quick makes you that little bit faster when moving around the map, truly making this the ultimate build for SMG mobility. Best M1928 Vanguard class (Perks, Equipment, & Field Upgrade) Perk 1: Ghost – Perk 2: Radar – Perk 3: Double Time – Secondary: Combat Knife – Lethal: MK2 Frag Grenade – Tactical: Stim – Field Upgrade: Armor – For the rest of your M1928 SMG build, picking the right Perks, Equipment, and Field Upgrades will only improve your chances of success in any given match. As a loadout based on mobility, you’ll almost always be on the run. Therefore, Ghost and Double Time are no-brainers to keep you hidden and allow you to sprint for longer. Add Radar to the mix and you’ll be a menace on any given map, constantly aware of enemy positioning. When it comes to a secondary weapon, you’ll likely never be firing an actual sidearm. So instead, we recommend picking the Combat Knife just to help you sprint that little bit faster off a fresh respawn. However, if you want a little bit more assurance, it can be handy to have a Machine Pistol on standby. If your smaller mags run out, quickly swapping to this beastly sidearm should keep you on your feet. For Equipment, the standard MK2 Frag Grenade comes in handy no matter what mode you’re playing. Similarly, Stim is absolutely vital for this SMG build. Not only does it replenish your health in a jiffy, it also restores your Tac Sprint, keeping you on the move at all times. Closing things out is the Armor Field Upgrade that’s simply the strongest pick in Vanguard today. Surviving a few extra shots could be the difference between a win or a loss, so there’s no reason not to pick this option. So that’s all there is to know about the ideal M1928 SMG class in Vanguard. It won’t help you win long-range gunfights anytime soon, but with the best movement speed possible, you’ll be rushing through the map and getting the jump on everyone in no time. Read More: Best MP40 Vanguard class loadout – Just remember, always stay on the move with this setup, you never want to stay in one place for too long or you’ll risk being picked off from a distance. While this may be optimal for now, new updates are often tweaking weapon balance and even attachment effects. So check back often as we’ll keep this loadout guide up to speed with all the latest Vanguard changes. How to unlock the M1928 in Vanguard In order to unlock the M1928 in Call of Duty: Vanguard, you’ll need to reach account level 20. This shouldn’t take too long if you make use of double XP tokens or play with the Assault and Blitz Combat Pacing. Read More: Top 10 most popular weapons in Vanguard – To maximize XP, also make sure to play the objective in game modes like Domination, Patrol, and Hardpoint. Best M1928 class Vanguard tips The M1928’s main strength is its insanely fast fire rate. Although this weapon isn’t considered to be the best in Warzone, there are a few things you can do to maximize the potential of this loadout. The M1928 is best at close-range. Try to avoid medium to long-range engagements. – Because of the fast fire rate, hip firing at point-blank ranges is recommended. – The perk “Ghost” will conceal you from the enemy mini-map. Don’t be afraid to be aggressive! – The perk “Radar” allows you to see enemies when they fire unsilenced weapons. This paired with “Ghost” is a deadly combo! – Also, remember to always develop a playstyle that feels the best for you. With that said, if you’re still struggling to succeed with the M1928, these tips should be helpful. Alternative to the M1928 Vanguard loadout If you’re looking for an alternative to the M1928, then check out our PPSH-41 loadout. This SMG has already been regarded as one of the best SMGs in Vanguard due to its fast fire rate and quick reaction times. Players who enjoy using the M1928 will have an easy time transitioning to the PPSH-41. Like the M1928, it has a very fast rate of fire, making it a perfect SMG for those who favor an aggressive playstyle. Looking for more Call of Duty: Vanguard updates and information? Check our list of guides below: Best CoD Vanguard FOV settings | Best MP40 Vanguard loadout | Best M1928 Vanguard loadout | Every CoD Vanguard perk

Best M1916 Warzone loadout: Class setup, Attachments, Perks ActivisionThe M1916 is the latest Marksman Rifle to join Warzone and Vanguard in the Season 3 update. Here’s the best attachments you should be using to get a competitive edge in the BR. The Warzone and Vanguard Season 3 update is well underway, giving players the opportunity to add the M1916 to their loadouts. This Marksman Rifle rifle features great damage and a fast rate of fire, which makes it a great choice for those who enjoy being more mobile when hunting for headshots. Whether the M1916 has what it takes to beat the Kar98k as the best Sniper in Warzone remains to be seen, but for now, the game’s new weapon certainly packs a punch. So, if you’ve unlocked this new Marksman Rifle and wish to put it to the test, then our best M1916 Warzone loadout has you covered. Contents Best M1916 Warzone loadout – Best M1916 setup (Perks & equipment) – How to unlock the M1916 in Warzone – Alternative to M1916 Warzone loadout – Best M1916 Warzone loadout Attachments Muzzle: Mercury Silencer – Barrel: ZP 762mm Precision – Optic: G16 2.5x – Stock: ZP M502 Custom – Underbarrel: Carver Foregrip – Magazine: 6.5mm Sakura 20 Round Mags – Ammunition: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Grooved Grip – Perk: Quickscope – Perk 2: On-Hand – The best M1916 Warzone loadout boosts the gun’s accuracy, range, control, and damage. First up is the Mercury Silencer, which helps reduce horizontal bounce and enhances the rifle’s bullet velocity. This attachment works wonders with the added bullet velocity from Lengthened, which makes hitting distant targets easier. While the M1916 won’t be able to one-shot targets at long ranges, the ZP 762mm Precision does drastically improve the gun’s range and control. This means you can comfortably land lethal hits in mid-range firefights Read More: Best Nikita AVT Warzone loadout – Seeking out targets is also made a lot easier thanks to the 2.5x magnification given from the G16 Optic. To make matters even better, the increase in ADS speed from this Optic makes target acquisition incredibly quick, but it does come at a cost to vertical recoil. Fortunately, this is alleviated by Carver Foregrip, Grooved Grip, and Quickscope Perk. These three attachments minimize recoil and bounce, giving you better accuracy when firing. Lastly, the 6.5mm Sakura 20 Round Mags give you plenty of ammunition needed to barrage your foes with high-damage shots. Best M1916 setup (Perks & equipment) Perks & Equipment Perk 1: E.O.D. – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Secondary: Cooper Carbine – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Stim – The best M1916 Warzone loadout utilizes all the standard meta perks. Both EOD and Amped keep you safe from any explosive blasts, while also giving increased speed when swapping to your secondary weapon. Overkill also enables you to carry another primary of your choice. This is incredibly important considering this loadout is tailored around long-range firefights, so we recommend either taking a mid-range AR or SMG to help with close-quarter engagements. Once you have two primary weapons, you’ll want to secure another loadout drop to grab Ghost. Lastly, both the Semtex and Stim will give you the tools needed to flush out pesky campers and the ability to quickly heal yourself when you take damage. How to unlock the M1916 in Warzone In order to unlock the M1916 in Warzone, players will need to reach Tier 15 in the Battle Pass. Simply play matches in Season 3 to add the new Marksman Rifle to your collection. It’s also important to note that the M1916 can be unlocked for free. This means every player can gain access to this new weapon without spending any money on COD Points. If you wish to unlock it instantly, then you can always purchase a weapon blueprint or tier skips. Alternative to M1916 Warzone loadout The Modern Warfare Kar98k is one of the most popular Marksman Rifles in Warzone Season 3. In fact, this iconic weapon also has great speed and mobility — something that the M1916 shares. This is partly thanks to its fast chambering, quick ADS speeds, and great mobility. If you’re not a fan of the M1916 but still enjoy the pace from the Marksman Rifle class, then you really can’t go wrong with the Kar98k. Be sure to check out our best Kar98k Warzone loadout to help you secure those montage-worthy headshots. So, there you have it, the best M1916 Warzone loadout that can give you a competitive edge in the BR. Looking for more of the best Warzone loadouts and tips? Check out our list of guides below: Best warzone settings to increase FPS on PC| Most popular Warzone weapons | Best Sniper Rifles | All Warzone bunker codes | MAC-10 loadout | Best Warzone loadouts | Top 20 highest-earning players

Best M1916 Vanguard class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Proficiency, Setup ActivisionThe best M1916 Vanguard loadout greatly enhances your kill potential, giving you a huge advantage on larger maps. Find out which attachments you should equip to make the strongest build. Vanguard Season 3 is finally here, which means players can get their hands on a number of new weapons. One of them is the M1916 – a new semi-automatic Markman Rifle that plays similarly to the DMR-14. Whether it will end up dethroning any of the game’s best Snipers remains to be seen, but it can prove fairly lethal once you’ve gotten used to its playstyle. Not only does this weapon come packed with decent speed, but it can also dish out some great damage, provided you kit it out with the right attachments. If you’re looking for the best M1916 Vanguard loadout and want to maximize your kills, then this build will enable you to do just that. Contents Best M1916 Vanguard loadout – Best M1916 Vanguard class (Perks, Equipment & Field Upgrade) – How to unlock the M1916 in Vanguard – Alternative to M1916 Vanguard loadout – Best M1916 Vanguard loadout Attachments Muzzle: G28 Compensator – Barrel: Wyvern 532mm Full-Auto – Optic: Slate Reflector – Stock: ZP M502 Custom – Underbarrel: M1941 Handstop – Magazine: 8mm Klauser 40 Round – Ammo Type: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Fabric Grip – Proficiency: Vital – Kit: Fully Loaded – The best M1916 Vanguard loadout is tailored around boosting the gun’s accuracy and ammo. First up on the list is the Wyvern 532mm Barrel. This attachment is the most important as it turns the M1916 into a full-auto rifle, drastically enhancing the gun’s fire rate, ADS speed, and recoil control. In order to keep the gun stable when fired, we’ve utilized the G28 Compensator, M1941 Hand Stop, ZP M502 Custom, and Fabric Grip. All four of these attachments greatly reduce the M1916’s recoil, which will help keep your shots accurate when fired full-auto. As Vanguard’s maps are much smaller and favor close to mid-range engagements, our loadout has ditched traditional Sniper Optics for the Slate Reflector. This Optic is perfect for speedy target acquisition and has enough zoom for landing headshots. Next up you’ll want to equip Lengthened and the Vital Proficiency to increase the rifle’s bullet velocity and critical hit area. Pair this with the 8mm Klauser 40 Rounds and Fully Loaded to ensure you have plenty of ammunition. Best M1916 Vanguard class (Perks, Equipment & Field Upgrade) Perk 1: Ghost – Perk 2: Radar – Perk 3: Double Time – Secondary: Machine Pistol – Lethal: MK2 Frag Grenade – Tactical: No 69 Stun Grenade – Field Upgrade: Dead Drop – The best M1916 Vanguard loadout utilizes the usual Perks you find in other loadouts. Ghost is essential to keep your movements hidden from enemy Spy Planes, while Radar enables you to see where enemies are firing from. Next up is Double Time, which is essential for running around the map faster. This will give you the added advantage of being able to constantly outmaneuver your foes – an area that is incredibly important on smaller maps. The Machine Pistol is also a great choice here as it can make short work of any player that tries to rush you down in close-quarters engagements. For the equipment, we’ve used the MK2 Frag Grenade and No 69 Stun Grenade. Rounding things off is the Dead Drop Field Upgrade, which is particularly potent as it will save your Killstreak progress. How to unlock the M1916 in Vanguard In order to unlock the M1916 in Vanguard, players will need to reach Tier 15 in the Battle Pass. Simply play matches in Season 3 to add the new Marksman Rifle to your collection. It’s also important to note that the M1916 can be unlocked for free. This means every player can gain access to this new weapon without spending any money on COD Points. If you wish to unlock it instantly, then you can always purchase a weapon blueprint or tier skips. Alternative to M1916 Vanguard loadout If you’re looking for another Marksman Rifle you can use in Vanguard, then the SVT-40 is a great choice. Just like the M1916, the SVT-40 has a fast rate of fire and can quickly pepper enemies with bullets. Read More: Warzone & Vanguard Season 3 Battle Pass – In fact, this reliable rifle can kill your enemies with just two bullets. This makes it extremely deadly when used by an eagle-eyed player. Be sure to check out our best SVT-40 Vanguard loadout to increase your kill count. So, there you have it, the best M1916 Vanguard loadout that you can use in the Season 3 update. Looking for more of the best Vanguard loadouts and tips? Check out our list of guides below: Best CoD Vanguard FOV settings | Best MP40 Vanguard loadout | Best M1928 Vanguard loadout | Best STG44 Vanguard loadout | Every CoD Vanguard perk | Best Vanguard controller settings | Unlock Atomic camo

Best M1912 Warzone loadout: Class setup, Attachments, Perks Treyarch/ActivisionThe M1912 has been overlooked by the majority of Warzone players since arriving with Vanguard, but this lethal SMG has a lot to offer with the correct loadout. When it comes to picking a weapon in Warzone Pacific the majority of players are opting for the MP40, STG44, or Bren. While all of these guns are extremely strong in the current meta, their popularity is leading the community to overlook a lot of other deadly weapons that arrived with the Vanguard integration. One that has definitely flown under the radar is the M1912, a high fire rate SMG that shreds opponents at close-range, and even comes with hefty ammo capacity. Of course, to get the most out of the weapon you’ll need to run a meta loadout, and luckily, we’ve got you covered. Contents Best M1912 Warzone loadout – Best M1912 Warzone class – How to unlock the M1912 in Warzone – Alternative to the M1912 Warzone loadout – Attachments Muzzle: Mercury Silencer – Barrel: CGC 12″ Cooling – Optic: Slate Reflector – Stock: CGC S Adjustable – Underbarrel: M1930 Strife Angled – Magazine: 9mm 50 Round Drum – Ammo Type: Incendiary – Rear Grip: Polymer Grip – Perk: Frenzy – Perk2: Quick – First of all, you’ll want to equip the Mercury Silencer and the CGC 12″ Cooling barrel to increase the overall stability and control of the weapon, making it easy to land every single bullet. Not only that, the silencer conceals your gunfire on the radar, which is key in Warzone when attempting to remain undetected. After that, utilize M1930 Strife Angled, CGC S Adjustable, as well as the Polymer Grip to boost your mobility and completely bolster the recoil of the SMG. These attachments paired with the Slate Reflector will ensure you never miss a shot, and with the M1912’s incredible fire rate, that’s extremely important. When it comes to bullets, make sure you run Incendiary to make use of the burn damage as well as the 9mm 50 Round Drum to decrease ADS time and increase the gun’s fire rate. Finally, round off the loadout with the Frenzy perk for a burst of regen after a kill, as well as the Quick perk so you can surprise enemy squads with your mobility and catch them off-guard. Best M1912 Warzone class Perks & Equipment Perk 1: E.O.D. – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Lethal: Throwing Knife – Tactical: Stim – When it comes to perks, our M1912 setup runs the typical meta choice with E.O.D to protect you from explosive damage, as well as Amped to make it easier to switch to your AR or Sniper for long-range skirmishes. Next, you’ll definitely want to run Overkill with this class as the M1912 will struggle to compete from a distance, so having the long-range secondary will ensure you’re ready for any encounter. Finally, finish off the class with a Throwing Knife to take out downed enemies and a Stim for a boost of health in the middle of a skirmish. How to unlock the M1912 in Warzone Unlike some of the other weapons that arrived with Vanguard, the M1912 is relatively easy to unlock and should only take several hours of gameplay. In order to get your hands on the SMG, you’ll need to reach level 20, so it’s just a case of collecting as much XP as possible. Alternative to the M1912 loadout in Warzone While the M1912 has its place in Warzone, it’s hard to compete with the dominance of the MP40 in the current meta. This pint-sized weapon has taken over Caldera and currently stands as the most popular weapon in the game. So, if the M1912 doesn’t fit your playstyle, it may be time to follow the crowd and pick up the MP40, You can check out our dedicated guide for the weapon here where we lay out the best loadout for the gun. If you want to keep updated with all the latest Warzone and Vanguard news and updates, then be sure to check out our Call of Duty page.

Best M16 Warzone 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks ActivisonThe M16 is a powerful burst AR in Warzone 2 that thrives at medium to long-range, but you’ll need the best possible loadout to maximize its damage on Al Mazrah. While Warzone 2 weapons like the Fennec 45 and Lachmann Sub are perfect for taking down foes at close quarters, ARs are better suited for medium to long-range skirmishes. However, as there are so many options available to players, picking one from the bunch can be a difficult decision. Well, if you’re a fan of burst-fire guns, the M16 may be an ideal choice, allowing you to instantly down opponents from afar if you can land your shots. Offering a huge amount of damage and accuracy, this is an option that’s going under the radar in the current meta, but with a top-tier build, it can definitely deliver you to victory in Warzone 2. Contents Best M16 Warzone 2 loadout – Best M16 Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the M16 in Warzone 2 – Best M16 alternatives in Warzone 2 – Best M16 Warzone 2 loadout Attachments Muzzle: Harbinger D20 – Barrel: 14″ Carbine Shroud – Optic: Schlager 3.4X – Underbarrel: VX Pineapple – Magazine: 45-Round Mag – For starters, make sure to equip the Harbinger D20 muzzle and the 14″ Carbine Shroud barrel for a huge boost of bullet velocity, damage range, and overall recoil smoothness. Not only that, but the Harbinger also comes with the added sound suppression bonus which is essential for remaining undetected on Al Mazrah. Following this, utilize the VX Pineapple to bolster the M16’s kickback even more, and an added element of hip-fire control. This may not be useful from a distance, but it ensures you’ll land your bullets on target just in case you get caught off-guard by a foe up close. After that, use the Schlager 3.4X for a clear and easy-to-use scope that thrives at medium to long-range, and of course, the 45-Round Mag so you never have to worry about ammo troubles. Best M16 Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment Perk Package: Weapon Specialist Base Perk 1: Overkill – Base Perk 2: Strong Arm – Bonus Perk: Spotter – Ultimate Perk: Survivor – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical Equipment: Stun Grenade – We’ve opted for Weapon Specialist as it adds an extra element of versatility to the M16 and allows you to compete at any distance. For starters, Overkill is solid in Warzone 2 as the ability to wield a second primary immediately makes your loadout more well-rounded. Whether you run a sniper, marksmen rifle, or SMG, it all depends on how you prefer to rack up kills. Next, Strong Arm allows you to be more precise with your throwables and toss them longer distances. On top of that, Spotter ensures you’ll never be surprised by enemy equipment, killstreaks, or field upgrades. For the Ultimate Perk, Weapon Specialist uses Survivor which alerts your teammates of any enemies you get downed by with a ping and allows allies to revive you quicker. Finally round off the setup with Semtex for flushing opponents out of cover and Flash Grenades for clearing encloses spaces. How to unlock the M16 in Warzone 2 In order to unlock the M16 in Warzone 2, you need to level up the 556 Icarus to level 14. This can be done in battle royale or in MW2 multiplayer and shouldn’t take you too long. Best M16 alternatives in Warzone 2 If the burst fire of the M16 isn’t working for you, then consider checking out the TAQ-56. In the current meta, this is being labeled as the pound-for-pound best AR in Warzone 2, and for good reason. Fit with a devastating TTK, solid accuracy, and great bullet velocity if well-worth testing this weapon out in your matches, but make sure to do it with top-tier meta loadout. That’s all for our M16 loadout! For more of our Warzone 2 coverage, check out these guides below: Do Warzone skins carry over to Warzone 2? | What are Strongholds in Warzone 2? | All Warzone 2 vehicles and Gas Stations | Does Warzone 2 have SBMM? | How do Warzone 2 circles work?

Best M16 Modern Warfare 2 loadout: Class setup, Attachments, Perks ActivisionThe M16 assault rifle is a stone-cold classic when it comes to Call of Duty, and now, the fan-favorite weapon is back in Modern Warfare 2. Whether you’re looking to equip the right Perks or Tactical equipment, here’s how to setup the best loadout for the M16. Appearing in more than five Call of Duty games, the M16 assault rifle has remained an iconic weapon for players everywhere. Time and time again, this popular AR has emerged as a driving force, no matter what game mode might be on the cards. Modern Warfare 2 has brought the M16 back, alongside other great choices such as the Lachmann-556 AR and MP5 Sub. Before you get to work on dominating your enemies, put this essential M16 loadout to good use. Best M16 assault rifle class in Modern Warfare 2 The M16’s three-round burst may seem off-putting for full-auto enthusiasts, but its firing power isn’t to be mistaken. With the right attachments in place, the M16 is nothing short of a bonafide slaying machine. We recommend using the following attachments for your M16: Muzzle: Forge-Tac Castle Comp – Stock: Demo Fade Pro Stock – Rear Grip: Sakin ZX Grip – Optic: Cronen Mini Red Dot – Underbarrel: VX Pineapple Vert Grip – Now you’ve got the weapon in shape for battle, make sure you equip the best Perks too. Best M16 assault rifle setup: Perks and Tactical equipment When it comes to getting your Perks setup, here are the best ones to pair with the M16: E.O.D – Scavenger – Quick Fix – Bird’s Eye – As you’ll be sacrificing your firing rate, every shot matters. Using E.O.D will give you a health buff against non-explosive killstreaks. While you’re fighting off those explosions, make sure to use Scavenger to keep your ammo stocked up. Quick Fix will grant you faster health regeneration with each kill, while Bird’s Eye will reveal more of the mini-map. You’ll also be able to ping enemies and see their locations too in classic red dot style. Lastly equip the Flash Grenade and Semtex, though your grenade can be altered for your preference. With the full game touted to release on October 28, 2022, we’ll be keeping this page updated as tweaks emerge to this already powerful choice. In the meantime, be sure to check out our other loadout guides to beat out the competition.

Best M16 Warzone class loadout: Attachments, Setup, Perks Activision / TreyarchThe iconic M16 Assault Rifle is one of the strongest burst ARs in Warzone, but you’ll need an effective loadout to get the most out of the weapon in Warzone Pacific Season 1. While burst ARs have never historically done well in Warzone, the M16 has proven this wrong. In fact, this Black Ops Cold War rifle has wreaked havoc across Verdansk thanks to its highly accurate firing pattern, incredible range, and high damage. It may not be the powerhouse weapon that it was back at the start of Season 3, but it’s still a decent choice in the Warzone Pacific meta. The M16 offers great deadly precision at medium to long ranges and its overall DPS isn’t bad either. If you’re looking for the best M16 loadout in Warzone that can secure you plenty of kills, then this class has all the attachments and perks you should be using to help you dominate the competition. Contents Best M16 loadout in Warzone – Best M16 setup (Perks & equipment) – How to unlock the M16 in Warzone – Alternative to the M16 class loadout – Best M16 loadout in Warzone Attachments Muzzle: Agency Silencer – Barrel: 16.3″ Rapid Fire – Optic: Axial Arms 3x – Underbarrell: Field Agent Foregrip – Ammunition: STANAG 60 Rnd – This specific M16 build is all about reducing the gun’s ADS time and increasing its effective damage in medium-range gunfights. While a lot of M16 loadouts will focus on making the weapon deadly at long range, this class is designed for aggressive players who want to push their opponents with the M16. In fact, these particular attachments make the gun ridiculously powerful. The Axial Arms 3x optic provides a great magnification, offering a clear sight that doesn’t clutter the screen and gives the gun optimal precision at close and medium range. Read More: Best FARA 83 Warzone class loadout – After that, you’ll want to equip the Field Agent Foregrip to significantly reduce the gun’s horizontal and vertical recoil. This will ensure you always have the precision needed to take out an opponent before they can retaliate. While a lot of builds focus on reducing the M16’s speed, this loadout sacrifices some of this to aid the weapon’s effectiveness across mid to longer engagement ranges. Next, you’ll want to use the 16.3″ Rapid Fire barrel to increase the M16’s fire rate and reduce the downtime between shots. This will allow you to compete against the likes of the lightning-fast MAC-10 loadouts that thrive in close-range gunfights. Of course, as with any Cold War AR, you’ll want to run the Agency Silencer to boost the gun’s effective damage range and remain undetected on the radar. Finally, don’t forget to equip the STANAG 60 Rnd mag to ensure you never run out of ammo in an intense gunfight. After all, being able to take down multiple foes with deadly bursts will always be beneficial. Best M16 setup (Perks & equipment) Perk 1: E.O.D. – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Secondary: MP49 – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Heartbeat Sensor – Just like our PPSh and Swiss K31 loadouts, this M16 class also utilizes EOD and Amped. EOD greatly reduces the damage from non-killstreak explosives and fire, while Amped gives you faster weapon swap and equipment speeds. The Overkill perk enables the use of our MP40 loadout, which still remains the most best SMGs in Warzone Pacific Season 1. While Overkill keeps you competitive across all engagement ranges, you’ll still want to pick up Ghost as soon as you can. Lastly, both the Semtex and Heartbeat Sensor help track down nearby enemies and give you the tools needed to flush out nearby campers. How to unlock the M16 in Warzone Unlocking the M16 in Warzone is incredibly simple and only requires you to reach level 10 in Black Ops Cold War or Warzone. Read More: Best Automaton Warzone class loadout – Once you’ve unlocked it, simply head over to Warzone and begin making your class from the loadout screen. Alternative to the M16 class loadout The AUG is another burst rifle gun that shares a similar playstyle to that of the M16. Despite receiving a nerf to its base recoil, this weapon continues to be a decent pick thanks to its excellent precision. Read More: Best OTs 9 Warzone class loadout – Make sure you check out our AUG loadout guide to begin wracking up those kills. Looking for more of the best Warzone loadouts and tips? Check out our list of guides below: C58 | Grau 5.56 | Kilo 141 | Krig 6 | CR-56 AMAX | FFAR 1 | Mac 10 | MP5 | Kar98k | Best controller settings | Top 10 best class setups and loadouts | Top highest-earning Warzone players

Best M16 loadout for Call of Duty: Black Ops Cold War Activision / TreyarchThe M16 assault rifle continues to be a popular pick in Black Ops Cold War, but this reliable rifle’s kill potential greatly increases when you use this lethal loadout. This burst AR’s highly accurate firing pattern, fantastic range, and decent damage make it a popular pick across Cold War’s multiplayer modes. However, the M16 really dominates on the game’s larger maps and 40 player Fireteam: Dirty Bomb mode. While it may not deal as much damage as the overpowered AK74u loadout or have the blisteringly-fast fire rate of the MP5, it certainly packs a mean punch. If you’re after a reliable Tactical Rifle that can effortlessly secure you those all-important headshot kills, then the M16 is one gun that you’ll want to add to your arsenal. In fact, this burst-fire weapon can even compete against the game’s semi-automatic assault rifles and SMGs, making it an extremely versatile pick. Best M16 loadout for Black Ops Cold War Here’s the best attachments you can use on your M16 in Cold War: Millstop Reflex – Infantry Compensator – Steady Aim Laser – Field Agent Foregrip – 45 Rnd Mag – Airborne Elastic Wrap – Raider Pad – Perk: Flak Jacket – Scavenger – Ghost – Equipment: Lethal: Grenade – Tactical: Stimshot – Field Upgrade: Field Mic – While you can still build a decent M16 loadout with just five attachments, this build is greatly enhanced by the three additional attachments gained from the Gunfighter Wildcard. In fact, these extra attachments make this particular M16 ridiculously powerful. The Millstop Reflex provides a 1.37x magnification, offering a clear sight that doesn’t clutter the screen and giving the gun great precision across multiple engagement ranges. Next up is the Infantry Compensator and Field Agent Foregrip. Both of these attachments decrease the M16’s vertical recoil, making it extremely useful when you’re trying to aim for those all-important headshots. Meanwhile, the Steady Aim Laser gives you decent hipfire accuracy when you need to blast your foes in close-quarter firefights. The Airborne Elastic Wrap adds a 30% increase to your ADS speed and 90% Flinch Resistance, allowing you to remain competitive against semi-automatic guns. While the MP5 and Milano will likely make short work of you in close-quarter scenarios, you’ll at least have a fighting chance in these situations. Meanwhile, the 45 Rnd Mag gives you plenty of extra bullets to snag those all-important multi-kills, which is a must if you wish to get access to the best scorestreaks. You also want to add this mag attachment if you’re planning to play Cold War’s Fireteam: Dirty Bomb mode. This massive 40 player map can get a little hectic, so having the extra bullets will give you the firepower needed to shred through even the most well-armored foes. Read More: Best M16 Warzone loadout – Rounding things off at the bottom of the list is the Raider Pad. This attachment increases your sprint to fire speed and aim walking movement speed, allowing you to quickly zero in on targets. The Raider Pad is incredibly important, especially when playing on the game’s more intimate maps. After all, being able to snap onto a target’s head and beam them with deadly bursts will always be beneficial. If you want to keep updated with all the latest Call of Duty news and updates, then follow us over on @DexertoIntel.

Best M13B Warzone 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks ActivisionThe M13B AR is enjoying a comeback to popularity within Warzone 2’s community in Season 4, skyrocketing from a niche pick to one of the meta weapons, it’s a lethal assault rifle, here’s everything you need to know about the meta loadouts, perks, and attachments for the M13B in Warzone 2. Warzone 2‘s Season 4 update is underway, and the meta shifted significantly. M13B is a great example of that, as its pick rate went bananas. The powerful AR made a name for itself in Warzone 1 because of its lightning-quick fire rate and incredible accuracy. The Warzone 2 rendition of the M13 keeps the high fire rate but didn’t have the effective range of the original. That is until now. To make the most of the buffed M13B you’ll need the best loadout possible and thankfully, we’ve got you covered. Contents Best M13B Warzone 2 loadout – Best M13B Warzone 2 class: Perks & Equipment – How to unlock the M13B in Warzone 2 – Best M13B alternatives in Warzone 2 – Best M13B Warzone 2 loadout Attachments Muzzle: FTAC Castle Comp – Optic: SZ Recharge-DX – Underbarrel: Lockgrip Precision-40 – Ammunition: 5.56 High Velocity – Magazine: 60 Round Mag – The M13B is an excellent long range weapon but its lower damage output when compared to other rifles makes it uncompetitive up close. Due to this, we focus exclusively on making the M13B as accurate as possible to make the most of its ranged capabilities. The best way to make a gun effective at long range is to reduce its recoil. To do this it’s best to use both the FTAC Castle Comp muzzle and Lockgrip Precision-40 underbarrel. When combined these improve overall recoil by around 35%. Another important attachment for any ranged weapon is a clear and effective optic. There are a few good options but the SZ Recharge-DX is the best thanks to its ease of use. Some players may prefer alternatives such as the Aim OP-V4, Schlager 3.4X, or VLK 4.0. Unlike the original M13, its successor doesn’t have amazing bullet velocity. This can make shooting targets from afar rather difficult. To fix this you’ll want to use the 5.56 High Velocity rounds. Finally, a 60 Round Mag is perfect for minimizing time spent standing around reloading, especially in Trios and Quads. Best M13B Warzone 2 class: Perks & Equipment Base Perk 1: Double Time – Base Perk 2: Overkill – Bonus Perk: Resupply – Ultimate Perk: High Alert – Lethal: Drill Charge – Tactical Equipment: Smoke Grenade – For Base Perks, Double Time is useful as it doubles your tactical sprint duration making getting around both Al Mazrah and Ashika Island faster. It’s also recommended to use Overkill to run a secondary that covers the M13B’s weaknesses like a meta SMG. Resupply is an effective Bonus Perk as it constantly regenerates both Equipment slots and Field Upgrade. Given the importance of equipment for pushing other teams and maneuvering having constant access to them is fantastic. For the Ultimate Perk, High Alert is a superb choice as it provides free intel by highlighting the direction of enemy players aiming at you from behind. With Warzone 2’s short TTK, this is one of the few ways to give yourself enough time to react before being downed. Equipment is flexible as there are several strong choices but a Drill Charge and Smoke Grenade are the top picks here. Drill Charges are excellent for flushing out players from hard to reach areas while Smoke Grenades allow you to reposition through open spaces without being punished. How to unlock the M13B in Warzone 2 To get your hands on the M13B Assault Rifle, you need to complete a challenge in the new DMZ mode of the game. You need to defeat ‘The Chemist’ (an AI boss) in the radiation zone, loot his body, and extract the blueprint. Alternatively, it can be unlocked by extracting with any M13B blueprint in DMZ. This blueprint can be taken from an enemy player or dropped by a friend who has already unlocked the assault rifle. Best M13B alternatives in Warzone 2 If you are a fan of fast-firing yet still accurate weapons we recommend giving the Lachmann-556 a try. Alternatively, the ISO Hemlock is a slower firing but harder hitting option that is easy to control. That’s all for our M13B loadout! For more of our Warzone 2 coverage, check out these guides below: Best Warzone weapons: Ultimate tier list with meta loadouts | Best Warzone 2 loadouts: Meta weapons and classes to dominate in Al Mazrah | Call of Duty 2024: Early leaks, concept art, Warzone 2.0, Treyarch & more | Call of Duty 2023: Early leaks, Modern Warfare 2, Warzone 2, more | Best M4 Warzone 2 loadout | Best Modern Warfare 2 weapons: Ultimate tier list with the best classes | Modern Warfare 2 best settings on PC for FPS, graphics, visibility, more

Best M13B Modern Warfare 2 class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Setup The M13B is a fully automatic assault rifle added in Modern Warfare 2 Season 1. If you want a hyper-accurate AR that can beam enemies from just about any range then this could be the gun for you. Here’s our best M13B loadout to use in MW2. Introduced in Season 1, the M13B is a returning gun having first featured in Modern Warfare (2019). Based on the Sig Sauer MCX, the M13B is a full-auto assault rifle that trades raw firepower in favor of impressively low recoil. When built correctly the M13B is arguably the most accurate assault rifle in Modern Warfare 2. It’s a fantastic choice for players looking to stretch their gunfights out to longer ranges or in large-scale game modes like Ground War and Invasion. Despite its strengths, you’ll need to be using the best M13B loadout possible to get the most out of it in Modern Warfare 2. Thankfully, we’ve got you covered. Contents Best M13B MW2 Loadout – Best M13B MW2 class: Perks & Equipment – How to unlock the M13B in Modern Warfare 2 – Best M13B alternatives in Modern Warfare 2 – Best M13B MW2 Loadout Attachments Muzzle: Sakin Tread-40 – Laser: 1mW Quick Fire Laser – Optic: Cronen Mini Pro – Underbarrel: FSS Sharkfin 90 – Rear Grip: D37 Grip – Given the M13B’s main strength is its accuracy it’s best to focus on this and build around it. To minimize recoil and make the M13B a true laser we use both the Sakin Tread-40 muzzle and D37 Grip. These combine to counteract most of the AR’s recoil making it extremely easy to control. To further improve accuracy it’s highly recommended to use a good close to medium-range optic. The visual recoil in MW2 can be intense at times so using a clear optic like the Cronen Mini Pro makes it easier to track targets. To improve handling and avoid the M13B feeling too slow use the 1mW Quick Fire Laser. This improves Aim Down Sights speed while having zero drawbacks. Those comfortable with playing with a visible laser should consider using the Accu-Shot 5mW Laser for even faster handling. The last attachment is interchangeable. We opt for the FSS Sharkfin 90 which improves Aiming Idle Stability with no downsides. Some other good alternatives include the Commando Foregrip, 5.56 High Velocity rounds, and 7″ Bruen B-M20 barrel which may be better depending on your playstyle. Best M13B MW2 class: Perks & Equipment Base Perk 1: Bomb Squad – Base Perk 2: Battle Hardened – Bonus Perk: Resupply – Ultimate Perk: Ghost – Lethal: Proximity Mine – Tactical: Flash Grenade – The M13B is an assault rifle that benefits from a slightly slower playstyle that takes advantage of its fantastic long-range capabilities. As such the best Base Perk to use is Bomb Squad which will make it harder for enemies to flush you out of cover using explosives. Equally, Battle Hardened is another great Base Perk for playing defensively. It reduces the impact of most tactical equipment with its resistance to Flash Grenades and Snapshot Grenades being most notable. For the other two perk slots we recommend Resupply and Ghost. Resupply will keep your equipment topped up making your loadout more versatile. As for Ghost, it’s always a powerful Ultimate Perk to use offering immunity to enemy UAVs keeping you from appearing on their radar. The best equipment will vary by playstyle but a Proximity Mine is a solid choice. They can be placed down to cut off lanes, be used for scouting, and even finish off a player baited in to chase you. As for tactical, Flash Grenades are a classic choice that blind opponents and turn gunfights in your favor. How to unlock the M13B in Modern Warfare 2 The M13B can be unlocked in Modern Warfare 2 by defeating the Chemist in DMZ and successfully extracting the ‘Hazardous’ M13B weapon blueprint he drops. Alternatively, extracting in DMZ with any M13B either dropped by another player, earned through an event, or purchased through the in-game store will also unlock the base version. Best M13B alternatives in Modern Warfare 2 Another strong and accurate assault rifle you should consider using is the ISO Hemlock. Even after its many nerfs the Hemlock stands as one of the best guns in MW2 as it offers both good damage and great accuracy. Alternatively, the FSS Hurricane is an SMG that has similar traits to the M13B. It doesn’t perform as well at long range but is extremely easy to control, has fantastic mobility, and comes equipped with a large 50 round magazine. That’s all for our best M13B loadout! For more of our MW2 & Warzone 2 coverage, check out these guides below: Best MW2 weapons: Ultimate tier list | MW2 & Warzone 2 Season 4 Ranked Play rewards | How to unlock ISO 45 SMG | How to unlock Tempus Razorback | Weapon buffs & nerfs in MW2 and Warzone 2 Season 4 | Can you play Modern Warfare 2 on Steam Deck? | How many people play Warzone 2? Modern Warfare 2 player count | CDL 2023 season: Standings, schedule, teams, more

Best M13 Warzone class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Setup ActivisionThe M13 in Call of Duty: Warzone still remains one of the best Modern Warfare weapons in Warzone Pacific due to its high rate of fire and low recoil. Here’s how you can take advantage of this deadly weapon with the best loadout possible. Even in Warzone Pacific Season 4, an old meta is taking back its former glories with the old, reliable M13 AR still dominating in the right hands. This well-rounded rifle has one of the best fire rates among Modern Warfare’s weapons and if you use the right attachments, it can also come with little-to-no recoil. This enables players to effortlessly beam their enemies with laser-like precision. Whether you’re tired of using the meta Assault Rifles or just want to use one of the game’s classic weapons, then our M13 loadout will enable you to remain competitive no matter the season. Contents Best M13 Warzone loadout – Best M13 setup (Perks & equipment) – How to unlock the M13 in Warzone – Alternative to the M13 in Warzone – Best M13 Warzone loadout Attachments Muzzle: Monolithic Suppressor – Barrel: Tempus Marksman – Optic: VLK 3.0x Optic – Underbarrel: Commando Foregrip – Ammunition: 60-Round Mags – Starting off with one of the most popular attachments in Warzone: the Monolithic Suppressor. This is one of the go-to AR attachments due to the fact that it reduces your sound and increases your damage range. Yes, there’s a decrease in your ADS time and your aim steadiness, but the benefits far outway the negatives. Moving onto the barrel, we have the Tempus Marksman. This also increases your damage range by 33%, while also improving the weapon’s bullet velocity by a whopping 50% and even improving recoil control. Again, it’ll have a negative impact on your ADS speed, as well as your movement speed, but the Tempus helps turn the M13 into an incredibly precise laser beam. The Commando Foregrip will also help with the M13’s recoil, while also having the added benefit of helping mitigate the aim steadiness problems caused by the Monolithic Suppressor. This attachment also ensures your shots remain accurate when using the VLK 3.ox Optic. Finally, we have the 60-round magazine, which will help you stay on target longer – an area that is incredibly important if you wish to aim for those all-important squad wipes. Best M13 setup (Perks & equipment) Perk 1: Cold-Blooded – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Secondary: Marco 5 – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Stims – You’d be surprised how many people are still running Combat Scout in Warzone, so having Cold-Blooded is perfect for keeping you hidden when being shot. The Overkill perk enables the use of the Marco 5 – which still remains arguably the best SMG in Warzone — and only does this enable you to remain competitive in late-game circles, but it also allows for some incredibly mobile plays. While Amped enables you quickly swap to your secondary in close-quarter scenarios. These perks are found on all of our meta Warzone loadouts, especially since they increase your overall survivability and combat effectiveness. Lastly, Semtex and Stims give you the tools needed to hunt enemy players and flush out pesky campers. How to unlock the M13 in Warzone The M13 AR is unlocked by reaching Level 39 in CoD Warzone. This is one of the easiest guns to unlock and will only take a few sessions to grind through instead of needing challenge requirements to overcome. It can be an especially quick process if you pop some 2XP codes and hunt down as many contracts as possible in the likes of Plunder or Rebirth. Alternative to the M13 in Warzone If you’re looking for an alternative to the M13, check out our STG44 class. This powerful AR is still one of the most popular guns in Warzone, thanks to its high damage and lightning-fast rate of fire. Despite its fire rate, this deadly AR still offers great handling across close to mid ranges. It’s certainly not hard to see why so many players often gravitate towards this AR. Looking for more of the best Warzone loadouts and tips? Check out our list of guides below: Best streamer loadouts | Most popular Warzone weapons| Best Sniper Rifles | All Warzone bunker codes | MAC-10 loadout | FFAR Warzone class | Top 20 highest-earning players | Best Warzone weapons: Ultimate tier list with meta loadouts | Best Warzone landing spots on Caldera map

Best M13 loadout for Call of Duty: Mobile ActivisionModern Warfare’s M13 has finally dropped in Call of Duty: Mobile alongside Season 8, so here’s how to get the best out the fully automatic AR – whether you want to use it up close or at those longer ranges. Call of Duty: Mobile’s eighth season dropped on September 22, celebrating two years since the game first came to handheld devices. Naturally, the new season brought with it a plethora of content, including a new Blackout map and a Lightning Strike scorestreak reward. It also saw a couple of Modern Warfare 2019’s weapons added – the R9-0 shotgun and the M13 assault rifle. While the former will probably struggle to massively affect the game’s meta, the latter has the potential to become one of the game’s most popular weapons. To that end, here are a couple of classes for different play styles. Best long-range M13 loadout in CoD: Mobile Barrel: RTC Heavy Long Barrel – Rear Grip: Granulated Grip Tape – Ammunition: .300 RTC 30 Round Reload – Stock: No Stock – Laser: OWC Laser – Tactical – The above class comes from CoD Mobile YouTuber BobbyPlays, who recommends the attachments for their balance – improving the gun’s accuracy and range while also keeping its handling quick. You’ll notice that not many attachments are devoted to recoil control – that’s largely because the M13 is easy to control. If you struggle for accuracy, try switching up the stock or adding an underbarrel to stabilize your fire. Best close-range M13 loadout class in CoD: Mobile Barrel: RTC Silencer Barrel – Rear Grip: Granulated Grip Tape – Ammunition: Large Extended Mag B – Stock: No Stock – Laser: OWC Laser – Tactical – There aren’t many attachment changes for Bobby’s close range class. Swapping the heavy barrel out instantly improves handling and mobility, as well as keeping shots discrete with the silencer. Furthermore, the extended magazine gives players extra bullets to spray as they push enemies. While there’s even less of an emphasis on recoil control here, you should be able to manage due to the closer range gunfights this is designed for. For perks, we’ll recommend the standard combination Lightweight, Toughness, and Dead Silence. In terms of equipment, we’d recommend tailoring these to your play style. If you’re using the long-range class, think about defensive equipment, but if you’re going run-and-gun then grab your stuns and nades and drop in.

Best M1 Garand CoD Vanguard class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Proficiency, Setup ActivisionThe M1 Garand is an extremely powerful Marksman Rifle and we’ve got the ultimate CoD Vanguard loadout guide to help you get the most out of it. From the ideal attachments to the best Perks, here’s how to build the perfect M1 Garand class. Although Marksman Rifles are never at the forefront of the meta in CoD, they’re still capable of serious damage with the right setups. Just a few quick shots from any range can be enough to take down foes before they can even react. With the M1 Garand serving as the first Marksman Rifle in Vanguard, you’ll want to build the right class around it as early as possible. So we’ve got you covered with the perfect M1 Garand loadout in CoD Vanguard to have you tapping the trigger and climbing through the rankings in no time. Contents Best M1 Garand Vanguard loadout – Best M1 Garand Vanguard class (Perks, Equipment, & Field Upgrade) – How to unlock the M1 Garand in Vanguard – Alternative to the M1 Garand Vanguard loadout – Best M1 Garand CoD Vanguard loadout Muzzle: F8 Stabilizer – Barrel: Cooper 21” Shrouded – Optic: Cooper S MI – Stock: Chariot S3 TC – Underbarrel: Heavy Foregrip – Magazine: .30-06 16 Round Drums – Ammo Type: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Polymer Grip – Proficiency: Vital – Kit: On-Hand – Up first we have the F8 Stabilizer Muzzle to keep your shots on target. Not only does this attachment boost accuracy a great deal, but an extra 10% damage range will make it easier to take long-range gunfights as well. The same logic applies for the Cooper 21” Barrel that also serves to improve range and recoil control. A whopping 54.5% extra range makes this M1 Garand loadout as deadly as possible. Moreover, the added 40% bullet velocity will have your shots connecting from any range in the blink of an eye. When it comes to settling on an Optic, you have 21 different options to pick from. While this is mostly down to personal preference, we’ve gone with the Cooper S MI Optic for two key reasons. First, it keeps this M1 Garand class simple with basic iron sights. But most importantly, it comes with a slight buff to ADS speed too. Moving on we have the Chariot S3 TC Stock which is arguably the most important attachment here. A staggering 100% boost to sway control will make your M1 Garand the most accurate Marksman Rifle possible. Similarly, the Heavy Foregrip Underbarrel is the best pick to complement the rest of this build, as it comes with even more accuracy buffs. So long as your aim is on point, you’ll rarely be missing a shot with this lethal setup. Things get a little more interesting when it comes to equipping the .30-06 16 Round Drums Magazine, however. While other options in this category come with major downsides, this pick is the most well-rounded of the bunch. It doubles both your starting ammo and your magazine size, and also trims the reload speed down by 30%. Although it comes at a cost of ADS and movement speed, the tradeoff is well worth it in this case. Next up is the Lengthened Ammo Type, a staple pick for just about any rifle in Vanguard. The M1 Garand is no different as Bullet Velocity reigns supreme here, so adding another 30% boost to this stat is crucial. Rounding things out we’ve gone with the Polymer Grip Rear Grip for an extra 40% flinch resistance. Given the M1 Garand build is already extremely sharp, this attachment will keep your sights on target even when taking damage. For another unrivaled buff on the M1 Garand, there’s no looking past the Vital Proficiency. This attachment makes critical hits considerably easier to land. So long as you’re aiming towards the upper chest, this pick will have you two-shotting just about everyone. Last but not least we have On-Hand in the Kit section to increase the speed of any equipment use. If you happen to be going on a tear, however, Fully Loaded is a good secondary pick to further increase your ammo supply if needed. Best M1 Garand CoD Vanguard loadout (Perks, Equipment, & Field Upgrade) Perk 1: Ghost – Perk 2: Piercing Vision – Perk 3: Double Time – Secondary: 1911 – Lethal: Thermite – Tactical: Stim – Field Upgrade: Armor – Now that you’ve got the M1 Garand in top form, building the rest of the class around it is just as important. From Perks to Field Upgrades and everything in between, the right setup will only make things easier as you fry with the Marksman Rifle. So first up we have Ghost, Piercing Vision, and Double Time as our Perks for this class. Ghost is essential in nearly every rifle loadout just to help keep you alive when Spy Planes are circling overhead. Piercing Vision is a unique pick but one that pays dividends right away. Sometimes you’ll land one shot on a target before they make it behind cover. With this Perk equipped, you’ll be able to see a red outline on their character so you never lose sight after they’re damaged. Last but not least, Double Time is the best option in the third slot just to get you back in the fight quicker off a respawn. The 1911 pistol is an ideal secondary to have with your M1 Garand loadout. Not only does it pack one hell of a punch, but it’s also the quickest gun to swap to. If you need to bring out a pistol in a split second, the 1911 will keep you in the fight no matter what. As for equipment, Thermite and Stim are the strongest picks for Lethal and Tactical equipment respectively. The former coats an area in deadly flames while the second can restore your health in the blink of an eye so you can keep a streak going. And finally, Armor is simply the best Field Upgrade for the M1 Garand loadout. Having extra health is never a bad thing, especially here with this Marksman Rifle. How to unlock the M1 Garand in CoD Vanguard Unlocking the M1 Garand in CoD Vanguard doesn’t take long at all as you only need to reach level 6 to claim it. Barely a few games of multiplayer will have the M1 Garand ready to customize early on. Read More: Best MG42 CoD Vanguard class loadout – Double XP can obviously come in handy to speed things up that little bit more as well. Either way, you’ll have your hands on this Marksman Rifle in just a matter of moments after booting up Vanguard. Alternative to the M1 Garand in CoD Vanguard If the M1 Garand just isn’t doing it for you, you can’t go wrong with an automatic weapon instead. As one of the top Assault Rifles in Vanguard today, we recommend the ultimate STG44 loadout to get you going. It’s one of the strongest and thus, most popular picks so you’ll be seeing plenty of it across all maps and modes. There’s no reason not to join in on the ultra-quick killing machine fun. So that’s all there is to our best M1 Garand loadout in CoD Vanguard. The pacing certainly isn’t for everyone but with this build, it’s an extremely powerful option that can beam foes from all distances. As seasons go by we’re sure to see plenty of attachment changes to tweak balance across the board. We’ll be sure to keep you updated here as every new balance update comes into effect and change the status of the M1 Garand. In the meantime, be sure to brush up on some other top-tier Vanguard loadouts to get the most out of every setup: Best Automaton loadout | Best Itra loadout | Best MP40 loadout | Best M1928 loadout | Best STG44 loadout

Best LW3 Tundra Warzone loadout class: Attachments, Setup, Perks Treyarch/ActivisionThe LW3 Tundra is a medium to long-range sniper rifle in Warzone that excels in the battle royale environment. With the correct attachments, the weapon can be incredibly deadly and help you dominate your opponents. With so many different sniper rifles in Warzone, it can be difficult to find one that’s effective and fits your own playstyle. For fans of quick scoping and shorter-range sniper duels, the Pelington is a perfect choice. However, if you’re looking for a weapon that can deliver consistently a long-range with high bullet velocity, the LW3 Tundra is a must-pick. While the weapon certainly isn’t going to thrive in a close-range gunfight, it’s incredible at picking off enemies from afar. To get the most out of the weapon, you’ll need to run a specific loadout, luckily we’ve got you covered. Without further ado, let’s check out a deadly LW3 Tundra class for Warzone. Best LW3 Tundra loadout in Warzone Attachments Muzzle: Wrapped Suppressor – Barrel: 29.1″ Combat Recon – Underbarrel: Bipod – Stock: SAS Combat Stock – Rear Grip: Airborne Elastic Wrap – With recent updates to Black Ops Cold War snipers in the Season 3 Reloaded patch, the LW3 Tundra was buffed with an improvement to stability. As a result, you no longer need to build completely around accuracy. Instead, we can lean into the all-important Bullet Velocity and ADS Speed stats. For starters, as with any Cold War sniper in Warzone, you need to be running the Wrapped Suppressor in the Muzzle slot. This attachment offers the best Bullet Velocity and Damage Range, making it ideal for Tundra’s effectiveness at long-range. On top of this, this Muzzle also suppresses your fire which is key in Warzone to remain undetected. Next, the 29.1″ Combat Recon Barrel is ideal for the Tundra as it elevates the weapon’s damage output and allows you to consistently take down enemies in a single shot. Of course, in Warzone this is important as you may only have the chance to fire one bullet when you’re looking to pick an enemy off at range. While these two attachments will give the weapon more power, it will slow your ADS Speed. To counter this downside, run the Airborne Elastic Wrap along with the SAS Combat Stock for the best overall Tundra build in Warzone today. Best LW3 Tundra loadout in Warzone (Perks & Equipment) Perk 1: E.O.D. – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Secondary: AK-74u SMG – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Heartbeat Sensor – With one of the more accurate snipers in Warzone, you’ll be knocking down targets from afar without much of a hassle. Though when it comes to close-range fights, this gun simply won’t do the trick. As with just about any good sniper loadout these days, you’ll want Overkill at the ready so you can bring an SMG around as well. We’ve sided with the recently buffed AK-74u to maximize damage output up close. Moreover, you can surprise enemies with your rapid change of playstyle thanks to the Amped perk. Read More: Best Warzone Sniper Rifle loadouts – To wrap things up, the classic Semtex and Heartbeat Sensor combo can’t be overlooked. It’s a staple in the current Warzone meta for very good reason, use these tools to your advantage when possible. Hopefully, this guide has provided you with a top-tier LW3 Tundra loadout that’ll help you dominate your Warzone games and pick off your enemies at long range. If you think your setup stands out from the pack, be sure to join the conversation at @DexertoIntel.

Best LW3 Tundra Call of Duty: Black Ops Cold War class loadout: Attachments, Setup, Perk ActivisionDespite not being everyone’s favorite sniper rifle in Black Ops Cold War, the LW3 Tundra is still a respectable choice because it packs a bigger punch than its fellow bolt-action rifle, the Pelington 703. Here’s what you need to build one of the best loadouts for the Tundra. Right now, if you were to ask people to think about sniper rifles in Black Ops Cold War, most people would probably think about the Pelington 703. Of all the bolt-action sniper rifles in the game, it’s the one first unlocked, has better base statistics, and a faster aim-down-speed than the Tundra. Despite this, however, the Tundra is still a formidable weapon. While the Pelington is a one-shot kill to head and chest, the Tundra is a one-shot kill to both — as well as to shoulders, making it a heavy hitter. Further, you can capitalize on certain attachments to make its speed comparable to the Pelington. How to unlock the Tundra in Cold War The Tundra is unlocked by simply playing the game and reaching rank 25. No pesky challenges need to be completed here, so simply load up any game mode and get grinding those levels. Best Tundra build for Cold War Attachments Muzzle: Stabilizer .308 – Barrel: 28.2 Tiger Team – Magazine: 7 Rnd – Handle: Airborne Elastic – Stock: Raider Pad – This loadout is perfect for quick scoping as it provides a balance of both speed and damage. This means its ADS time is quick enough to take out enemies in an instant, but it also won’t trouble you with constant hit markers when you land a shot. For the muzzle, the Stabilizer .308 is your best bet. It’s the first attachment you unlock and it provides immediate control over your idle sway, aka a CoD sniper’s worst enemy after ADS speed. Getting a slight handle on that is worth it at the end of the day, not just for the Tundra, but for almost every sniper in BOCW. With the barrel, you’ll want to use the 28.2 Tiger Team, this will ensure you won’t have to worry about any hit markers as it increases the weapon’s damage and fire rate by 20%. Although the barrel decreases the weapon’s ammo capacity, it’s a worthy trade-off to be able to one-tap your opponents. Now, for the handle, the Airborne Elastic is perfect for the Tundra as it mitigates a lot of the weapon’s flaws. For one, it provides 12% ADS time which is essential for the gun as it is extremely slow without the correct attachments. As well as this, the Elastic Wrap’s 90% flinch resistance is key when taking on players head-to-head with the weapon. You’ll also want a 7 Rnd mag on the Tundra. Although this attachment doesn’t provide anything special it’s one of the few magazines that doesn’t add any serious setbacks to the weapon and the extra ammo will always be helpful while quick scoping. The last thing you’ll need for this set-up is the Raider Pad stock. This boosts the aforementioned sprint-to-fire time by 30% and also the aim walking movement speed by 40%. Best Tundra setup (Perks & equipment) Perk 1.:Tactical Mask – Perk 2: Gear Head – Perk 3: Ghost – Secondary: M1911 – Wildcard: Law Breaker – Field Upgrade: Field Mic – Tactical: Stimshot – Lethal: Semtex – Just like most Black Ops Cold War loadouts in Season 3, our Tundra loadout utilizes both Tactical Mask, Gear Head, and Ghost. Tactical Mask reduces the duration of enemy tactical equipment, while Gear Head greatly decreases the cooldown time for Field Upgrades. This ensures you have plenty of opportunities to put down your Field Mic, which will help you spot your next target. The Ghost perk will come as no surprise either as it will ensure you’re kept off of enemy Spy Planes. Lastly, both the Stimshot and Semtex will help you catch any pesky campers and ensure you have added survivability when things get a little dicey. Alternative Tundra loadout While the Tundra may be incredibly deadly, the Pelington is still a great choice in Black Ops Cold War Season 3. This Sniper Rifle features a fast rechambering animation, good damage, and great range. Not only is it a good alternative to the Tundra, but you’ll also be able to pick up plenty of close-range kills with it. If you want to use the Pelington and need a Cold War build, then be sure to check out our Pelington loadout guide. Hopefully, this guide has provided you with a powerful Tundra loadout that’ll help you dominate your online matches. Keep it locked to Dexerto for more Black Ops Cold War weapon loadouts.

Best LR 7.62 loadout in Black Ops 6 beta: Class setup, attachments, perks DexertoThe LR 7.62 is a powerful sniper rifle that deals more damage per shot than any other gun in the Black Ops 6 beta, and it can be made even better if you use a meta loadout. Sniping in Call of Duty has always been strong, with Modern Warfare 3 alone seeing powerhouses like the Kar98k and XRK Stalker dominate MW3’s meta. Early impressions suggest Black Ops 6 won’t be any different, with the LR 7.62 already showing serious potential. This heavy-duty sniper hits hard, killing in one shot almost anywhere to the body. It doesn’t have the fastest handling, and its flinch can be quite extreme at times, but that unrivaled raw damage makes it a great option regardless. To get the most out of the LR 7.62, you’ll need the best loadout possible, and we’ve got you covered. Here’s the class you want to be using with Black Ops 6’s most powerful sniper rifle. Best Black Ops 6 LR 7.62 loadout Barrel: Gain-Twist Barrel – Underbarrel: Ranger Handguard – Rear Grip: Quickdraw Grip – Stock: Balanced Stock – Fire Mods: Rapid Fire – The Rapid Fire mod is by far the most impactful attachment on the LR 7.62, as it increases the gun’s rate of fire. Although this requires weapon level 42, it is worth the grind. It makes the sniper much more forgiving when you miss a shot, which is incredibly valuable in such a fast-paced game. Similarly, the LR 7.62’s handling is too slow by default. Thankfully, the Quickdraw Grip fixes this by increasing the gun’s aim down sights speed. Once again, this is invaluable to keep up with Black Ops 6’s rapid pacing. The gun’s mobility can also be improved by using both the Ranger Handguard and Balanced Stock. These boost movement speed and even sprinting movement speed, letting you move around the map and reposition faster. For the last attachment slot, you are best off using the Gain-Twist Barrel for the increased bullet velocity it provides. Alternatively, some players may prefer using a lower zoom optic, like the Kepler Microflex or PrismaTech Reflex, especially on smaller maps where close-range gunfights are the norm. Best Perks, Equipment & Combat Specialty for LR 7.62 loadout Recon is the best combat specialty to use with snipers like the LR 7.62, as it allows you to see enemies through walls for a short period after spawning. This provides valuable intel that can be used to pre-aim angles to punish reckless opponents. To gain these benefits, you’ll want to use these perks and equipment: Wildcard: Perk Greed – Perk 1: Ghost – Perk 2: Engineer – Perk 3: Vigilance – Perk 4: Bankroll – Lethal: Frag – Tactical: Prox Alarm – Field Upgrade: Acoustic Amp – With Perk Greed equipped, you can use four different perks. The first three should be blue perks, as these need to match to activate Recon. Ghost is the best blue perk in the game, making you undetectable by enemy UAVs and Scout Pulses. For the other two slots, you should use both Engineer and Vigilance. The Engineer perk reveals enemy equipment through walls, while Vigilance shows you when you appear on the other team’s minimap, letting you better judge if it’s best to play safe or more aggressively in a given moment. The fourth perk can be anything, as it does not affect combat specialties. There are several good options, but Bankroll stands out as the best, granting you 150 score at the start of each life. This makes earning powerful streaks easier, giving you the power to flip unfavorable games in your favor. A Frag is a classic lethal that can be cooked to explode at just the right moment. The Prox Alarm is perfect for shutting down flankers, as it alerts you when other players are nearby. For Field Upgrade, the Acoustic Amp makes enemy footsteps louder, making it even harder for opponents to catch you off guard. How to unlock LR 7.62 in Black Ops 6 Beta The LR 7.62 is unlocked by reaching level 16, making it one of the harder weapons to get. However, it still shouldn’t take you too long, as all experience rates are doubled in the beta. For more meta builds, check out our Black Ops 6 gun tier list, as well as the best Jackal PDW and best C9 loadouts, both of which are dominating the beta. Also, you’ll want to make sure that your controller settings are optimized to avoid being hindered.

Best Longbow Warzone loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks The Longbow is an extremely unique sniper rifle like no other, and this is the best build to use with it in Warzone Season 4 Reloaded to make the most of its unusual characteristics. Of all the Warzone snipers we’ve seen come and go, the Longbow might just be the strangest. This sniper rifle is based on the AK-224, a bolt-action adaptation of the in-universe Kastov platform. Its bizarre origin story results in the Longbow looking like an assault rifle, coming with a 30 Round Mag, and having spectacular handling. In multiplayer, these traits make it an absolute monster but it’s pretty strong in Warzone too. Here’s a breakdown of our recommendation for the best Longbow loadout to use in Call of Duty: Warzone Season 4 Reloaded. Best Longbow Warzone loadout Muzzle: Sonic Suppressor – Laser: FSS OLE-V Laser – Barrel: Pro-99 Long Barrel – Ammunition: 7.62x39mm High Grain – Bolt: SA-M Quickbolt – Since it can’t kill enemies in one shot the Longbow is instead used for its great handling. To take advantage of this it’s best to equip both the Pro-99 Long Barrel attachment alongside the FSS OLE-V Laser. These attachments will help with stats like ADS Speed, damage range, and bullet velocity. Sniping in Warzone requires you to land shots from hundreds of meters away so a high bullet velocity stat is a must. This can be increased on the Longbow by using the 7.62x39mm High Grain ammunition with the Sonic Suppressor, which also prevents your shots from showing up on the radar. The last attachment is flexible but we like the SA-M Quickbolt as it improves the Longbow’s rate of fire by 11%. A faster fire rate lets you land follow-up shots quicker reducing its TTK and making the bolt action sniper much more consistent. Longbow Warzone Loadout: Perks and Equipment Perk 1: Double Time Increases Tactical Sprint duration and reduces refresh time. – – Perk 2: Focus Reduce flinch when aiming down sights and extend Hold Breath duration. – – Perk 3: Cold-Blooded Undetectable by thermal optics, Tactical Cameras, and Recon Drones. Does not trigger High Alert and Combat Scout. – – Perk 4: Birdseye Your UAV Killstreak, Portable Radar, or UAV Tower shows the heading of the enemy for your squad and detects players using Ghost. – – Lethal: Throwing Knife – Tactical: Smoke Grenade – Given the Longbow’s suitability for playing aggressively, Double Time is a great choice with it improving Tactical Sprint, letting you run around faster. Partnering that with Focus makes a lot of sense on a sniper as it reduces flinch making it much easier to land those crucial shots when under pressure. Speaking of Perks that are perfect for sniping, Cold-Blooded is incredible as it prevents High Alert from triggering for enemy players. This gives you plenty of time to line up shots without having to rush them. Perk 4 is a highly competitive slot with several strong options available. While it’s difficult to pick just one, Birdseye wins out here thanks to its obvious synergy with sniping. Being able to find hidden enemies on your radar means greater overwatch of specific areas. The Throwing Knife is the meta lethal option in Warzone Season 4 Reloaded thanks to its quick use and good damage when you land your throw. The Smoke Grenade offers you a chance to hide in cover that may not exist on the map. How to unlock Longbow in Warzone The Longbow can be unlocked via the Armory which is accessible at Level 25. Once the Armory can be accessed, activate the Longbow and complete five daily challenges. Alternatively, extracting with the Longbow in Zombies or purchasing MW3’s Vault Edition will also unlock the bolt action sniper. Best alternative to Longbow in Warzone Those who enjoy the feel of a bolt-action sniper should consider using the MCPR-300. It has slower handling than the Longbow but can down enemies in one shot if the correct ammunition type is used. Long-range warfare is always a good idea in the Warzone Season 4 Reloaded meta, so read up on other long-range weaponry like the MORS, KVD Enforcer, and Kar98k.

Best Longbow MW3 loadout: Class setup, attachments, perks ActivisionThe Longbow is now one of the strongest snipers in MW3 after it got a powerful new Aftermarket Part. Here’s the best loadout to take advantage of the JAK Tyrant 762 Kit and dominate multiplayer. When Modern Warfare 3 was first released the Longbow was the preferred quickscoping weapon of choice. However, it fell out of favor once the XRK Stalker came along in Season 1 offering far superior damage and range. Then in Season 2, the Longbow would reclaim its crown thanks to the addition of the JAK Tyrant 762 Kit. This Aftermarket Part was incredibly strong on release but got nerfed shortly after. Even so, it is still top-tier and incredible in the right hands. Here’s the best Longbow loadout to use in MW3 to dominate at any range being able to one-shot enemies both up close and from across the map. Contents Best Longbow MW3 loadout – Best MW3 Longbow loadout: Perks & equipment – How to unlock Longbow in Modern Warfare 3 – How to unlock JAK Tyrant 762 Kit in Modern Warfare 3 – Best Longbow alternative in Modern Warfare 3 – Best Longbow MW3 loadout Attachments Conversion Kit: JAK Tyrant 762 Kit – Laser: SL Razorhawk Laser Light – Stock: No Stock – Underbarrel: DR-6 Handstop – Rear Grip: Nought-Z3 Grip – Using the JAK Tyrant 762 conversion kit is an obvious choice as it massively boosts damage and speeds up both ADS Speed and ADS Movement Speed. This helps the Longbow secure one-shot kills far more consistently and makes it aim in fast enough to compete against both shotguns and SMGs up close. With the JAK Tyrant 762 Kit boosting damage, all four other attachments should be focused on handling and mobility. The most impactful attachment to boost these is the SL Razorhawk Laser Light which provides a massive 22% improvement to Sprint to Fire Speed and 9% to ADS Speed. The Longbow’s handling can be further enhanced using the No Stock, DR-6 Handstop, and Nought-Z3 Grip. These all improve ADS speed which is the most important stat on a sniper rifle in multiplayer. Especially a sniper rifle like the Longbow which relies on its handling to be competitive as it doesn’t have the same effective range as its competitors. This build results in a fantastic ADS Speed of just 358 ms and a staggering Sprint to Fire Speed of 106 ms. For a weapon that can instantly kill if you land a shot from the lower torso or higher that is unbelievable. This results in a Longbow build that is easily one of the best weapons in MW3 multiplayer. Best Longbow class: Perks & equipment Vest: Infantry Vest Increases Tac Sprint duration and reduces refresh time. – – Gloves: Marksman Gloves Reduced sway and flinch while ADS. – – Boots: All-Terrain Boots Significantly increased movement speed. Disabled Tactical Sprint. – – Gear: Tac Mask Reduces the strength of enemy flash, stun, and gas grenade. Immunity to shock, EMP, and Snapshot grenades. – – Lethal: Throwing Knife Retrievable throwing knife that is lethal on impact in core multiplayer. – – Tactical: Flash Grenade Blinds and deafens targets. – – In this loadout, the Infantry Vest works well as it is a most balanced vest, giving you plenty of equipment while also making Tactical Sprint last longer. Equally, the Marksman Gloves make both sniping and quickscoping a lot easier by reducing flinch and lowering the chance of you missing a vital shot when it matters most. Added in Season 3 Reloaded, the All-Terrain Boots are a great option for playing aggressively. They increase movement speed letting you get around MW3’s maps faster which compliments the Longbow’s great handling. This does come with the trade-off of disabling Tactical Sprint, but the boost provided makes this more than worthwhile. While going on the offensive is all well and good, sometimes you need to play defensively to win. For this, Tac Mask is an obvious choice reducing the strength of enemy tactical grenades. Realistically, getting stunned or flashed with a slow-firing sniper is a death sentence unless you are using this perk. Since you’ll be up close most of the time with this quickscoping loadout, a Throwing Knife is perfect for adding some extra style to your play and raking in those montage clips. For situations where you want to pressure enemies and get easy kills, a Flash Grenade will blind them leaving them unable to fight back. How to unlock Longbow in Modern Warfare 3 The Longbow can be unlocked through the Armory, first accessible at level 25. After unlocking the Armory, select the Longbow and either complete 5 Daily Challenges or win 5 matches. If you aren’t a fan of the Armory, the Longbow is also unlockable through Zombies by extracting with one. This can either be gotten from the Mystery Box, as a wall gun, or dropped by another player. How to unlock JAK Tyrant 762 Kit in Modern Warfare 3 The JAK Tyrant 762 Kit is unlocked through the Aftermarket Parts section of the Armory. After activating the conversion kit you’ll need to complete 5 daily challenges or win 5 multiplayer matches. Best Longbow alternative in Modern Warfare 3 If the Longbow doesn’t suit your needs, then the MORS is another fantastic sniper rifle for quickscoping. Added in Season 3, the futuristic railgun has an extremely forgiving one-shot kill and can be built to have very swift handling perfect for MW3’s fast-paced action. Check out more MW3 loadout guides for more alternatives to the Longbow: Best MW3 loadouts | KV Inhibitor loadout | KATT-AMR loadout | MTZ Interceptor loadout | KVD Enforcer loadout

Best long-range Warzone loadouts to replace Bren meta ActivisionCall of Duty: Warzone’s meta is primed for a shift in the mid-season update, which is expected to nerf the Bren and MP-40. If you want to prepare for the next wave, here are the long-range loadouts that may emerge. It took a little time, but after Vanguard’s Automaton got nerfed into the ground – the Bren LMG meta took the Pacific limelight. When built correctly, the Bren loadout has been a devastating long-range presence across Caldera, with minimal recoil and a lot of damage. In a January 7 update, though, developers at Raven Software explained that the Bren (and its complementary MP-40) will be getting adjusted in the “near future.” With a patch scheduled for January 12, many believe the guns will be on the chopping block. As such, it’s never too early to start preparing for the next meta. If the Bren is unusable, then there are some intriguing options that could step up. Among assault rifles and light-machine guns, the BAR, Cooper Carbine, STG-44, MG42, and Type 11 lead that pack. Best Warzone AR loadouts to replace Bren: BAR, Cooper, STG The AR options are pretty intriguing, as each of the most likely candidates to fill the meta are fairly unique. The BAR is an easy option, as FaZe Booya already proved its lethality by winning a tournament with it during the Bren meta. If the BAR’s damage isn’t enough to outweigh its slow firing rate and limited magazine, the Cooper and STG may rise instead. The Cooper Carbine loadout is best seen as a direct Automaton replacement, with lovely recoil control balanced by somewhat-limited mag capacity and damage. The STG-44 loadout, by contrast, is harder to control than either of the aforementioned guns, but it packs a punch and can do serious work if you learn its recoil pattern. Best Warzone LMG loadouts to replace Bren: MG42, Type 11 Among LMGs, the MG42 loadout is understandably getting a lot of interest – as the gun’s ground loot variant is pretty nasty. It has easily controlled recoil, a solid damage profile, and inherently comes with serious magazine capacity. There are murmurings about the Type 11, too, though. Outside of an infinite ammo exploit, some players think it could emerge as a serious contender for the next long-range beast thanks to recoil control and damage. It’s worth noting that, outside of the Bren and MP-40, any number of guns could get adjusted for Season 1.5. These are the guns worth keeping in mind for now. Who knows though, if the update buffs snipers (as the Vanguard 1.5 patch did) then maybe a gun like the Vanguard Kar98k could come into play.

Best Lockwood MK2 Modern Warfare 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments & Perks ActivisionMarksman Rifles are often underused in Modern Warfare 2, but the Lockwood MK2 is deadly with the right attachments. Here’s the best Lockwood MK2 loadout in MW2, complete with attachments, Perks, and equipment. If you are a fan of quick scoping but find MW2’s sniper offering’s too bulky, the Lockwood MK2 may be the perfect compromise. The versatile weapon can quickly dispatch enemies with its lightning-fast ADS speed and devastating power. Marksman Rifles require skill and precision when wielding, but it is worth learning how to harness the classes’ potential. The Lockwood MK2 can one-shot kill enemies, making it a perfect weapon for going on high killstreaks. If you want to run around at great speed with the ferocious MK2 Lockwood in Modern Warfare 2, then you need our best loadout for the weapon. Contents Best Lockwood MK2 Modern Warfare 2 loadout – Best Lockwood MK2 Modern Warfare 2 class – How to unlock the Lockwood MK2 in Modern Warfare 2 – Alternative to the Lockwood MK2 Modern Warfare 2 loadout – Best Lockwood MK2 MW2 loadout Laser: ACCU-Shot 5MW Laser – Barrel: 25″ Buffalo Barrel – Stock: Lockwood Bullseye Stock – Comb: Lockwood Merciless – Muzzle: FTAC Dreadnaught – The best Lockwood MK2 loadout starts off with the ACCU-Shot 5MW Laser as it increases aim down sight speed and aiming stability. Our main focus for this build was making the Lockwood MK2 as mobile and responsive as possible. We suggest using the Lockwood Bullseye Stock to increase aim down sight speed while decreasing recoil control. The 25″ Buffalo Barrel improves the rifle’s damage range, bullet velocity, hip fire accuracy, and movement speed. Following the same pattern as our other attachments, the Lockwood Merciless Comb increases sprint-to-fire speed and aim-down sight speed, while the FTAC Dreadnaught Muzzle boosts bullet velocity and recoil smoothness Best Lockwood MK2 MW2 class Base Perk 1: Tracker – Base Perk 2: Battle Hardened – Bonus Perk: Fast Hands – Ultimate Perk: Dead Silence – Lethal: Drill Charge – Tactical: Stim – Tracker allows you to see the footsteps of enemies, resulting in easy kills on unsuspecting players. Battle Hardened essentially nullifies the effects of any thrown equipment — including those positon-revealing Snapshot Grenades. Fast Hands speeds up the reloading process, which is especially useful for a Marksman Rifle. As for the Ultimate Perk, Dead Silence enables you to maneuver around maps more easily, silencing your footsteps. If you are struggling with campers in a room or holding down a “head glitch” position, the Drill Charge pierces through walls and deals with any issues. A Stim could save your life if you need a quick pick-me-up during a gunfight. How to unlock the Lockwood MK2 in MW2 In order to get your hands on this powerful Marksman Rifle in Modern Warfare 2, you need to reach Military Rank level 28. Fortunately for you, the weapon does not need to be unlocked through the game’s Platform system. Alternative to the Lockwood MK2 MW2 loadout The SP-R 208 is an unconventional weapon, but if you are looking for an alternative to the Lockwood MK2, look no further. The deadly Marksman Rifle can one-shot enemies before they know what’s hit them. Modern Warfare 2’s meta is still in the process of taking form, but the SP-R 208 is in contention of being the game’s best Marksman Rifle, and for good reason. Now that you have the best Lockwood MK2 loadout, you can check out some other guides we’ve compiled for Modern Warfare 2: How to use Modern Warfare 2’s Gunsmith: Receivers and Blueprints explained | Modern Warfare 2 new equipment guide: Lethals and Tacticals explained | How to Slide Cancel in Modern Warfare 2| How to unlock Oni Operator & Blueprint in Modern Warfare 2 | All Modern Warfare 2 Killstreaks | What is Modern Warfare 2 Spec Ops mode? | All Modern Warfare 2 perks | All Modern Warfare 2 Field UpgradesAdChoices

Best Lockwood 680 Warzone loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks ActivisionBoasting excellent damage, the Lockwood 680 is a force to be reckoned with. Thankfully, our loadout makes the Lockwood 680 a bit more powerful and mobile so you can conquer Warzone Season 4 Reloaded. Now that Overkill is a default perk in Warzone‘s integration with MW3, running a capable secondary is a must. Thankfully, MW3’s shotguns fill that void, with the Lockwood 680 a standout. Of the three new shotguns in MW3, the Lockwood 680 boasts the best-in-class damage: an incredible boon in close-quarters encounters. You’ll want to maximize your close-quarters damage and mobility. Thankfully, we’ve got you covered with a top-tier Lockwood 680 loadout so you can dominate in Warzone’s Season 4 Reloaded. Best Lockwood 680 Warzone loadout Muzzle: Crown Breaker Choke – Barrel: Lockwood Defender Heavy Long Barrel – Underbarrel: Bruen Bastion Angled Grip – Stock: Sawed Off Mod – Bolt: Express Light Bolt – With this loadout, you’ll want to help make this shotgun more mobile and still maintain its power. The Sawed Off Mod will help with that, adding some recoil to each shot but bringing faster ADS Speed and focusing the hipefire spread. The Crown Breaker Choke is here to offer you a tighter spread to your shots so that you can land them from a greater distance. This will be further aided by the Lockwood Defender Heavy Long Barrel that offers greater recoil control, aiming sway, bullet velocity, and damage range. Not only does the Bruen Bastion Angled Grip underbarrel increase your Sprint-to-Fire speed, but it also helps your recoil by providing a 4% reduction to vertical recoil and a reduction of 2% to horizontal. Rounding out the Lockwood 680, the Express Light Bolt will slightly increase your rechambering speed, which correlates to a better firing rate. Lockwood 680 Warzone Loadout: Perks and Equipment Perk 1: Double Time Increases the duration of Tac Sprint – – Perk 2: Sleight of Hand Faster reloading – – Perk 3: Quick FIx Starts health regeneration when killing a player or inserting a plate – – Perk 4: Resolute Gives you a speed boost when hit by enemy shot – – Lethal: Throwing Knife – Tactical: Smoke Grenade – Playing along with keeping your mobility up, your first perk choice should be Double Time. It’ll increase your Tac Sprint duration and reduce the refresh time, meaning you’ll run circles around the map. Playing aggressively can be a burden on your ammo supply in each clip, which is why Sleight of Hand can be used to keep your gun loaded fast and easy. Perks 3 and 4 are delegated to Quick Fix and Resolute. The former will help keep your health as high as possible by inserting armor plates in your best. Meanwhile, the latter will offer you a boost of speed whenever you are being shot at. For your equipment slots, the Throwing Knife is a great way to down an enemy in a heartbeat. Finally, the Smoke Grenade is a great way to keep your movement hidden from any opponent trying to knock you down. How to unlock Lockwood 680 in Warzone There are two ways to unlock the Lockwood 680 shotgun — reach level 4 in MW3’s multiplayer or extract it in MWZ to unlock it. Your best bet is probably to just play a few multiplayer matches and get your hands on it. Best alternative to Lockwood 680 in Warzone A good alternative to the Lockwood 680 is the Haymaker, a semi-auto shotgun that packs a punch and boasts a better rate of fire. Playing aggressive and up-close is a big part of the Warzone Season 4 Reloaded meta, so learn how to deck out guns like the FJX Horus, AMR9, Superi 46, and Striker.

Best Lockwood 680 MW3 loadout: Class setup, attachments, perks Pump action shotguns are a staple of Call of Duty having featured in every game across every setting, and Modern Warfare 3 is no different. Here’s the best Lockwood 680 loadout to use in MW3 Season 3. Making its comeback having last appeared in Modern Warfare (2019), the Remington 870 appears once again as the Lockwood 680. This classic pump-action shotgun hits hard at close range but is capable of remaining competitive much further out than its competitors. Initially, it can seem weak but when built correctly the Lockwood 680 goes from arguably the worst shotgun in MW3 Season 3 to easily the best. It’s just a matter of knowing which attachments to use. To help you figure out what attachments to run use this guide on the best Lockwood 680 MW3 loadout that aims to extend the shotgun’s damage range as far as possible. Contents Best Lockwood 680 MW3 loadout – Best Lockwood 680 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock Lockwood 680 in MW3 – Best Lockwood 680 alternative in MW3 – Best Lockwood 680 MW3 loadout Attachments Muzzle: Crown Breaker Choke – Barrel: Bryson Hammerforge Long Barrel – Stock: Sawed Off Mod – Guard: Matuzek Xray Skeleton – Bolt: Express Light Bolt – The Lockwood 680 is at its best when you maximize damage range and minimize shot spread. This makes shots not only deal more damage from further away but also more consistent and less frustrating. To maximize these key stats use both the Crown Breaker Choke and Bryson Hammerforge Long Barrel. Previously, the Lockwood Defender Heavy Long Barrel was a good option too but that received some hefty nerfs in Season 2 Reloaded making the Hammerforge the better option in Season 3. The other three attachments should all be used to heighten mobility and handling as you’ll need to run and gun with the Lockwood 680, just like any other shotgun. The Sawed Off Mod and Matuzek Xray Skeleton are both great for this as they both boost movement, resulting in a Tactical Sprint Speed of 7.4 meters per second. Forget SMGs, that’s faster than some pistols. Finally, the increased health in MW3 means that the Lockwood 680 often requires two shots to secure a kill. This isn’t ideal as a second shot can take a while to get off but the Express Light Bolt mitigates this problem by increasing the shotgun’s fire rate. Best Lockwood 680 class: Perks & equipment Vest: Overkill Vest Allows for two primary weapons, increased weapon swap speed, and can reload while sprinting. – – Gloves: Assault Gloves While jumping, accuracy and time to ADS is improved. – – Boots: Covert Sneakers Eliminates footstep sounds. – – Gear: Ghost T/V Camo While moving, blocks detection by UAVs, enemy radar sources, and Heartbeat Sensors. – – Lethal: Frag Grenade Cookable fragmentation grenade. – – Tactical: Smoke Grenade Deploys a smoke screen that blocks vision and automated targeting systems. – – MW3’s Overkill Vest compliments the Lockwood 680 as it lets you use a meta assault rifle like the Holger 556 to cover its obvious limitations. It also lets you reload while sprinting which is an excellent ability to have with a pump action that loads one shell at a time. Both the Covert Sneakers and Ghost T/V camo are necessary with the Lockwood 680. With an effective range of barely 10 meters, you’ll need to get close to enemies, and that’s going to be practically impossible without these perks. As for the Assault Gloves, these provide an additional tool for winning gunfights. They effectively let you jumpshot without the various movement penalties that would normally apply affecting you. This can catch other players off guard, especially if get up close to them, an area where the Lockwood 680 excels. Equipment-wise, you’ll want to run a Smoke Grenade to deal with opponents sitting back and making your life difficult. They can block off sightlines and let you close the gap under the cover of smoke. Finally, a Frag Grenade is a top-tier lethal that is devastating if released at just the right moment. How to unlock Lockwood 680 in Modern Warfare 3 The Lockwood 680 is unlocked in MW3 by reaching Level 4, available as soon as you first get access to the Gunsmith. Once you have the Lockwood 680, you’ll need to work through 27 gun levels to unlock all its unique attachments. Best Lockwood 680 alternative in Modern Warfare 3 There aren’t any great comparisons to the Lockwood 680 as it is still the only pump action shotgun in MW3 Season 3, but the Haymaker is another viable option that has better damage range than it is often given credit for. That’s all for this best Lockwood 680 loadout in MW3. For more Modern Warfare 3 classes, check out these guides: Best MW3 loadouts: Ultimate gun tier list | Best Riveter loadout | Best WSP Stinger loadout | Best RAM-9 loadout | Best COR-45 loadout

Best Lockwood 300 Warzone 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks ActivisionSeason 4 saw shotguns like the Lockwood 300 rise in popularity after a class-wide buff. They now offer a viable option up close being able to outgun SMGs when used right. But you’ll need a top-tier Lockwood 300 loadout to get the most out of it in Warzone 2, and we’ve got you covered. The Season 4 update saw the Lockwood 300 receive a wide range of buffs. These increased most of its damage multipliers, improved its handling, and made it much more consistent. It’s still a situational weapon as it can only chamber two rounds at once, but those two shots are now far more likely to down someone. This makes the Lockwood surprisingly useful in Solos and Duos where you can afford to be reloading regularly after securing a kill. To make it consistent though you’ll need to use a very specific setup. This is our best Lockwood 300 loadout to use in Warzone 2. Contents Best Lockwood 300 Warzone 2 loadout attachments – Best Lockwood 300 Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the Lockwood 300 in Warzone 2 – Best Lockwood 300 alternatives in Warzone 2 – Best Lockwood 300 Warzone 2 loadout attachments Muzzle: Bryson Series XII Choke (+0.06, +0.30) – Barrel: Matuzek 812 Barrel (+0.15, -0.09) – Laser: Accu-shot 5mW Laser (-0.42, -51.00) – Stock: Heist Stock Mod – Guard: Buck-Pro (+0.20, +0.07) – As with most shotgun builds it’s best to pick attachments that improve Damage Range and tighten up Pellet Spread. These two stats are the most important when determining how consistently a shotgun is able to deal damage and secure kills. For the Lockwood 300, this means you’ll want to use the Bryson Series XII Choke muzzle and Matuzek 812 barrel. This combination is the best available as it maximizes the 300’s Damage Range while keeping its pellet spread as tight as possible. The downside to using these attachments is that they slow the Lockwood 300 down considerably. To offset that we recommend equipping the Accu-shot 5mW Laser and Heist Stock Mod which provide an incredible boost to both Sprint to Fire Speed and Aim Down Sights Speed. The final attachment slot is far less important than the others. The Buck-Pro Guard provides a fair boost to weapon handling but isn’t too impactful. You may prefer to use an optic instead to make aiming easier or even the FSS Sharkfin 90 underbarrel to increase Aiming Idle Stability. Best Lockwood 300 Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment Base Perk 1: Double Time – Base Perk 2: Overkill – Bonus Perk: Fast Hands – Ultimate Perk: High Alert – Lethal: Frag Grenade – Tactical Equipment: Stun Grenade – When using a close-range weapon like the Lockwood 300, running Double Time makes a lot of sense. It doubles your Tactical Sprint duration making it easier to get up close and personal to enemies before they realize you’re nearby. Overkill is a fantastic Base Perk on any shotgun as it lets you take a secondary weapon to cover the obvious weaknesses. Something well-rounded like an assault rifle is probably best to partner with the Lockwood 300. The Bonus Perk is Fast Hands, which is an absolute must-use with the Lockwood 300. You’ll be constantly reloading with this weapon due to its very nature so shortening those reloads is extremely important. We also recommend High Alert to avoid getting caught in dangerous positioning when running in the open. When choosing your Lethal and Tactical, it’s a primarily personal choice. However, we recommend using Frag Grenades and Stun Grenades for that high damage and the ability to confuse an enemy before you rush their location. How to unlock the Lockwood 300 in Warzone 2 To unlock the Lockwood 300 in Warzone 2, all you will need to do is reach player Level 36. Thankfully, this is a relatively easy level to achieve and will likely only require playing a few games successfully. Best Lockwood 300 alternatives in Warzone 2 The obvious alternative and by far the most popular shotgun in Warzone 2 is the KV Broadside. It offers a fast fire rate like the Lockwood 300 but has a far larger magazine making it much more forgiving. If you’re looking for something a little different while keeping a similar playstyle, consider giving the ISO 45 a chance. This SMG can be run with a semi-auto 12 Round Mag giving it that same high damage, constant reload feel of the Lockwood. That’s the best Lockwood 300 loadout in Warzone 2. Be sure to take a look at some of our other handy MW2 and Warzone 2 content: Do Warzone skins carry over to Warzone 2? | What are Strongholds in Warzone 2? | All Warzone 2 vehicles and Gas Stations | Does Warzone 2 have SBMM? | How do Warzone 2 circles work? | How to use armor plates while running | Do you need PS Plus and Xbox Live Gold to play Warzone 2? | Best Warzone 2.0 AR class loadouts | Best Warzone 2.0 Sniper Rifle class loadouts

Best Lockwood 300 Modern Warfare 2 loadout: Class setup, Attachments & Perks ActivisionModern Warfare 2’s Lockwood 300 is capable of wiping enemies off the battlefield with only a few shots – but it needs the right loadout. We’ve got the best Lockwood 300 loadout along with what perks, equipment, and attachments you should try out. The Lockwood 300 is one of four available Shotguns in Modern Warfare 2 and is easily one of the most powerful in the category. It deals a devastating amount of damage and can be relatively easy to handle with a good loadout. We’ve compiled the best loadout for the Lockwood 300 along with the best perks, equipment, and attachments to keep you at the top of the leaderboard. Contents Best Lockwood 300 Modern Warfare 2 loadout – Best Lockwood 300 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock Lockwood 300 in Modern Warfare 2 – Best alternatives to Lockwood 300 in Modern Warfare 2 – Best Lockwood 300 Modern Warfare 2 loadout Barrel: Matuzek 812 Barrel – Stock: Heist Stock Mod – Underbarrel: Agent Grip – Laser: Point-G3P 04 – Muzzle: Bryson Series IX Choke – While the Lockwood 300 is undeniably powerful, recoil and mobility do let the weapon down when it has no attachments committed to it. This is why we recommend using the Heist Stock Mod. It increases your movement speed and general handling along with your hipfire recoil control helping you deal more accurate damage when it really matters. Another attachment that aids in your speed and handling is the Agent Grip. This underbarrel boosts your hipfire accuracy which is the primary way you’ll want to fire this Shotgun. Since you’ll primarily want to hipfire the Lockwood 300, one of the best attachments you can add is the Point-G3P 04. It may have a visible laser but that increase in sprint-to-fire and hipfire accuracy will be a game-changer no matter the obvious laser. Lastly, while the Lockwood 300 is powerful, you still need to use some attachments that increase the damage range and the spread of your bullets. Both the Matuzek 812 Barrel and the Bryson Series IX Choke will keep that Pellet Spread close and clean while also increasing your damage range. Together they will ensure you take down the enemy quickly and without any mistakes. Best Lockwood 300 class: Perks & equipment Base Perk 1: Tracker – Base Perk 2: Overkill – Bonus Perk: Fast Hands – Ultimate Perk: High Alert – Lethal: Throwing Knife – Tactical: Stun Grenades – When it comes to perks for a Shotgun class, it’s important you get the drop on the enemy. Anyone coming at you with an SMG will take you down if you don’t shoot first. That’s why we’ve gone for Tracker and Overkill. Tracker will let you follow the enemy from behind and Overkill will allow you to change to a faster weapon if needed. Following on from Tracker and Overkill, we’ve complimented the two perks with Fast Hands and High Alert. Fast Hands works with Overkill and lets you reload and change weapons quickly. High Alert will let you know if an enemy is looking at you meaning you’ll have a better chance to shoot first. Lastly, for the equipment, we recommend using Stun Grenades and Throwing Knives. Stuns will confuse the enemy and allow you to get those all-important shots in while the Throwing Knives are there to give you a last quick element of damage before reloading. How to unlock Lockwood 300 in Modern Warfare 2 To unlock the Lockwood 300 in Modern Warfare 2, all you will need to do is reach player level 36. This may take a bit of time but some successful objective matches will increase your level quickly and you’ll be able to enjoy the Lockwood 300 in no time. Best alternatives to Lockwood 300 in Modern Warfare 2 Since unlocking the Lockwood 300 does require you to level up to a relatively high level, you can always try one of the earlier shotguns available like the Bryson 800. It’s strong, effective, and capable of dominating the battlefield with the right user. Alternatively, if you’re looking for something a little more ranged, try out the MCPR-300. It’s a powerful sniper rifle and will encourage you to step out of the action for a little while, getting you to pick off the enemy from afar. Now that you have the best Lockwood 300 loadout in Modern Warfare 2, you can check out some of our other handy MW2 guides: How to use Modern Warfare 2’s Gunsmith: Receivers and Blueprints explained | Modern Warfare 2 new equipment guide: Lethals and Tacticals explained | How to unlock MP5 SMG loadout in Modern Warfare 2 | How to Slide Cancel in Modern Warfare 2 | How to unlock Oni Operator & Blueprint in Modern Warfare 2 | All Modern Warfare 2 Killstreaks | What is Modern Warfare 2 Spec Ops mode? | All Modern Warfare 2 perks | All Modern Warfare 2 Field Upgrades

Best Striker loadout for MW3: Class setup, attachments, Perks In the evolving meta of Modern Warfare 3, the Striker SMG has long since established itself as a great option. Here’s the best loadout to get the most out of this top-tier submachine gun in your Season 4 Reloaded lobbies. Back in the beta, the Striker was undoubtedly the strongest weapon in MW3, giving fans the impression the UMP-45 meta of years gone by was back. However, when MW3 launched the SMG had been nerfed significantly and was unfortunately nothing special. In the following seasons, the Striker has received some substantial reworks and buffs. These have seen it return to a state closer to its beta form and rise up as a serious candidate in the multiplayer meta. Here’s everything you need to know about the best Striker loadout for MW3 Season 4 Reloaded including Perks, attachments, and the overall class setup. Best Striker MW3 loadout Muzzle: ECS Requieter Suppressor – Barrel: Striker Recon Long Barrel – Rear Grip: Sakin ZX Grip – Ammunition: .45 Auto High Grain Rounds – Underbarrel: XRK Edge BW-4 Handstop – When building a good Striker in Modern Warfare 3 it is essential to maximize mobility and handling to make flanking more effective. For this reason, it’s best to equip the Striker Recon Long Barrel and XRK Edge BW-4 Handstop underbarrel which make the Striker feel exceptionally snappy. Speaking of flanking, the ECS Requieter Suppressor muzzle is an attachment that suppresses all outgoing gunfire with no drawbacks. This is great on the Striker as it lets you flank more easily without getting discovered by enemy players. The suppressor will also give you added aim stability and ADS Speed. Though this loadout focuses primarily on mobility, it’s still important to optimize damage potential where possible. To do this use the Striker Recon Long Barrel which improves Bullet Velocity, Damage Range, and Aiming Idle Sway making the Striker one of the deadliest medium-range SMGs in MW3. The final attachment is flexible and can be adjusted based on your preferences, but we like using the .45 Auto High Grain Rounds to give the gun a little more damage output. Best Striker class: Perks & equipment Vest: Ninja Vest Eliminate footstep sounds, immune to movement reduction effects, bonus Throwing Star/Knife ammo, resupply Throwing Stas/Knives every 25 seconds. – – Gloves: Scavenger Gloves Pick up ammo when running over a dropped weapon. – – Boots: Covert Sneakers Eliminates the sounds of your footsteps. – – Gear: Data Jacker Enemies you kill drop a smartphone. Collecting the smartphone generates a radar ping from that location. – – Lethal: Throwing Knife – Tactical: Stun Grenade – With the Striker being a weapon that’s usable in most situations, it can benefit from a much wider range of perks than other SMGs. However, we feel that it’s still best to stick with a stealthy flanking loadout to get the best Striker loadout in MW3. In combination with the suppressor, the Covert Sneakers and Ninja Vest make you practically invisible to enemies and also let you move around extremely quickly. This facilitates a hybrid stealthy run-and-gun playstyle that can take over lobbies if played right. A downside to this playstyle is that it uses up a lot of ammo as you’ll be getting in constant gunfights. To prevent this from becoming a problem equip the Scavenger Gloves which resupply ammo from fallen enemies. The Data Jacker is helpful in keeping your wits about you at all times during a match. Running a Stun Grenade tends to be better for close-range combat than Flash Grenades as they immobilize enemies letting you swoop in for easy kills. Meanwhile, Throwing Knife is generally good in most situations, so it’s hard to go wrong with either. How to unlock the Striker in MW3 To unlock the Striker in MW3, you will need to activate it in the Armory, and then complete Daily Challenges or win five matches in a row. You can also extract from Zombies with the Striker in your possession. Best Striker alternative in MW3 If you’re looking for something similar to the Striker, then you can’t go wrong with the AMR9. With its exceptional accuracy, it is one of the most consistent weapons you can use in the game. There are more SMGS to use in MW3, so check out how to kit out the FJX Horus and Superi 46.

Best LM-S Warzone 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks ActivisonThe LM-S marksmen rifle in Warzone 2 is unbelievably accurate at mid to long-range, making it perfect for picking off foes from afar if you have a top-tier loadout. In Warzone 2, the majority of players gravitate towards LMGs and snipers when it comes to long-range engagements. However, the marksmen rifle category has a number of immensely powerful weapons, one of which is the LM-S. This lethal gun is built for dealing serious damage from afar and is capable of wiping out foes in an instant with its devastating semi-automatic fire. Of course, to maximize its potential on Al Mazrah, you’ll need a top-tier loadout and luckily we’ve got you covered. Contents Best LM-S Warzone 2 loadout – Best LM-S Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the LM-S in Warzone 2 – Best LM-S alternatives in Warzone 2 – Best LM-S Warzone 2 loadout Attachments Muzzle: ZLR Talon 5 – Underbarrel: FSS Sharkfin 90 – Optic: SP-X 80 6.6X – Rear Grip: Lachmann TCG-10 – Ammunition: 7.62 High Velocity – For starters, equip the ZLR Talon 5 muzzle and 7.62 High-Velocity ammunition to significantly boost the LM-S’s bullet velocity, damage range, and suppress its fire. This transforms the marksmen rifle into a powerhouse at long range and ensures you can pick off enemies with ease. Following this, make sure to use the FSS Sharkfin 90 underbarrel and Lachmann TCG-10 Rear Grip. These attachments massively boost the rifle’s stability and recoil control, giving it an incredible amount of accuracy. Finally, round off the loadout with the SP-X 80 6.6X optic, for a clear scope that guarantees you’ll land your shots on target if you’re a sharpshooter. Best LM-S Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment Perk Package: Weapon Specialist Base Perk 1: Overkill – Base Perk 2: Strong Arm – Bonus Perk: Spotter – Ultimate Perk: Survivor – Lethal: Grenade – Tactical Equipment: Stim – When it comes to perk packages, we’ve opted to use Weapon Specialist for the LM-S as the rifle struggles to compete at close quarters. As a result, having access to Overkill for a meta SMG or AR is an absolute must. Next, Strong Arm allows you to be more precise with your throwables and launch them longer distances. On top of that, Spotter ensures you’ll never be caught off guard by enemy equipment, killstreaks, or field upgrades. For the Ultimate Perk, Weapon Specialist uses Survivor which pings any enemies you get downed by and allows allies to revive you quicker. Finally round off the setup with a Grenade for flushing opponents out of cover and a Stim for an essential boost of health when needed. How to unlock the LM-S in Warzone 2 In order to unlock the LM-S in Warzone 2, you need to reach level 17 with the Lachman 762. Luckily, this won’t take you long at all, especially if you jump into MW2 multiplayer. Best LM-S alternatives in Warzone 2 If the LM-S doesn’t fit your style of play, then consider checking out the EBR-14, another marksmen rifle that hits hard at long-range. Equipped with a devastating TTK, its rapid-fire rate makes it extremely frustrating for enemies as it wipes out their health bar in milliseconds. Of course, you’ll need a meta loadout for the EBR-14, and luckily we’ve got you covered with our dedicated guide. That’s all for our LM-S loadout! For more of our Warzone 2 coverage, check out these guides below: Do Warzone skins carry over to Warzone 2? | What are Strongholds in Warzone 2? | All Warzone 2 vehicles and Gas Stations | Does Warzone 2 have SBMM? | How do Warzone 2 circles work?

Best LM-S Modern Warfare 2 loadout: Class setup, Attachments & Perks ActivisonThe LM-S marksmen rifle in Modern Warfare 2 is capable of wiping out enemies in an instant, but you’ll need a top-tier loadout to maximize this weapon’s power. When it comes to picking a meta gun in Modern Warfare 2, the majority of players gravitate towards ARs and SMGs. However, there are some incredibly powerful options that are getting overlooked, and one of them can be found in the marksmen rifle category. We’re of course talking about the LM-S, a weapon that can delete enemies in two bullets with the correct loadout in Modern Warfare 2, and luckily, we’ve got you covered. Contents Best LM-S Modern Warfare 2 loadout – Best LM-S Modern Warfare 2 class – How to unlock the LM-S in Modern Warfare 2 – Alternative to the LM-S Modern Warfare 2 loadout – Best LM-S Modern Warfare 2 loadout Attachments Muzzle: Polafire Suppressor – Underbarrel: FSS Sharkfin 90 – Optic: SZ Lonewolf Optic – Rear Grip: Lachmann TCG-10 – Stock: FT Mobile Stock – Receiver: LM-Seer – The best LM-S loadout in Modern Warfare 2 kicks off with the Polafire Suppressor to boost the gun’s bullet velocity, damage range, and of course, keep it off enemy radars with the suppressed fire. Follow that up by utilizing the FSS Sharkfin 90 and the Lachmann TCG-10 to bolster the rifle’s recoil, making it easy to land shots. After that, pair these attachments with the Lonewolf Optic for a top-tier scope that’s perfect for medium to long-range gunfights. Finally, round off the loadout with the FT Mobile Stock to enhance the LM-S’s mobility, allowing you to outplay your opponents and catch them off-guard. Best LM-S Modern Warfare 2 class: Perks & equipment Base Perk 1: Overkill – Base Perk 2: Battle Hardened – Bonus Perk: Fast Hands – Ultimate Perk: Ghost – Lethal: Proximity Mine – Tactical: Stim – As the LM-S thrives at medium to long-range as a marksmen rifle, having access to Overkill is essential as it will allow you to run a meta SMG for close-range skirmishes. On top of that, Battle Hardened will prevent enemies from flushing you out of power positions using explosives, allowing you to pick them off with a set of well-placed LM-S shots. When it comes to your bonus perk, Fast Hands is a great option as you want to be able to switch to your SMG on the fly, giving you the best chance of winning your gunfights. For your Ultimate, Ghost is a top-tier option that is guaranteed to be useful, keeping you concealed from the opposing team. As for equipment, a Proximity Mine is a great way of keeping foes away from your position or alerting you that they’re nearby and of course, a Stim is perfect for a boost of health when you need it most. How to unlock the LM-S in Modern Warfare 2 In order to get your hands on this powerful marksmen rifle, you’ll need to level up the Lachmann-762 to level 17. As soon as you’ve done this, you’ll have access to the LM-S and can start perfecting your skills with this top-tier rifle. Alternative to the LM-S Modern Warfare 2 loadout If you’re not a fan of the LM-S in Modern Warfare 2, it may be time to pick up a classic weapon in the M16. This AR also thrives at medium range and as it fires in bursts, it’s possible to eliminate enemies in an instant if all your bullets land on target. Of course, as always, you’ll need a meta loadout for the M16 and we’ve got you covered with all the attachments you need to use right here. Now that you have the best LM-S loadout, you can check out some other guides we’ve compiled for Modern Warfare 2: All Modern Warfare 2 beta maps and game modes | How to use Modern Warfare 2’s Gunsmith: Receivers and Blueprints explained | Modern Warfare 2 new equipment guide: Lethals and Tacticals explained | How to unlock MP5 SMG loadout in Modern Warfare 2 | How to Slide Cancel in the Modern Warfare 2 Beta | How to unlock Oni Operator & Blueprint in Modern Warfare 2 | All Modern Warfare 2 Killstreaks | What is Modern Warfare 2 Spec Ops mode? | All Modern Warfare 2 perks | All Modern Warfare 2 Field Upgrades

Best Lienna 57 Warzone loadout: Class setup, Attachments, Perks Treyarch/ActivisionThe Lienna 57 is a compact LMG that’s highly accurate and you’ll need a meta loadout in Season 5 Reloaded to maximize its damage. Season 5 Reloaded is finally here in Warzone and it marks the end of an era as Raven’s final significant update for the title. While the devs are now shifting their focus to Warzone 2, the latest content drop hasn’t disappointed with the new BP50 AR and a huge amount of weapon buffs & nerfs. The BP50 wasn’t the only new weapon though, with the Lienna 57 set to be added to Vanguard and Warzone very shortly. While the Lienna 57 isn’t available to unlock in Warzone just yet, it will be soon, so it’s key that you know how to kit out the gun when it finally arrives. Contents Best Lienna 57 Warzone loadout – Best Lienna 57 Warzone class – How to unlock the Lienna 57 in Warzone – Alternative to Lienna 57 Warzone loadout – Best Lienna 57 Warzone loadout Attachments Muzzle: Recoil Booster – Barrel: FREI 432 Shrouded – Optic: Slate Reflector – Stock: Baumann 88 Padded – Underbarrel: M1941 Hand Stop – Magazine: 5.6mm 36 Round Mags – Ammunition: Subsonic – Rear Grip: Fabric Grip – Perk1: Tight Grip – Perk2: Fully Loaded – Unlike a lot LMGs, the compact frame of the Lienna 57 means it functions more like an AR, and that’s exactly why you’ll want to run the Recoil Booster and FREI 432 Shrouded. These attachments boost the weapon’s fire and reduce its recoil, making it easy to land shots when paired with the Slate Reflector. Next, you’ll want to utilize the Baumann 88 Padded, M1941 Hand Stop, Fabric Grip, to maximize the stability of the gun and increase its already accurate gunfire to a new level. When it comes to bullets, make sure you run Subsonic so you stay off enemy radars, as well as the 5.6mm 36 Round Mags to boost the gun’s overall damage output. Finally, it’s key you round off the loadout with the Tight Grip perk for improved recoil control, allowing you to land more shots in high-pressure situations, and of course, Fully Loaded so you’re always topped up with ammo. Best Lienna 57 Warzone class Perks & Equipment When it comes to perks, our loadout runs the meta choices with EOD protecting you from explosive blasts, and Amped increasing your weapon swap speeds to either switch to another fully loaded weapon. Of course, as the loadout above is catered to close to medium-range gunfights, Overkill will allow you to run a second primary weapon. We recommend either the Cooper Carbine or HDR if you’d prefer a sniper rifle, as both options dispatch enemies from a distance with ease. How to unlock the Lienna 57 in Warzone Unfortunately, the Lienna 57 isn’t available to unlock in Warzone and Vanguard just yet, with Raven revealing that it will be coming later in the season. However, as Warzone 2 and Modern Warfare II are so close to release, it’s likely we can expect the LMG to be available very soon. Alternative to Lienna 57 Warzone loadout In the meantime, if you want a powerful LMG to use in Warzone right now, nothing matches the damage of the UGM-8. This deadly gun has dominated the LMG category for months, and if you’re looking for a top-tier build to take over your matches, be sure to check out our loadout guide for the weapon. If you want to keep updated with all the latest Warzone and Vanguard news and updates, then be sure to check out our Call of Duty page. For even more content, we have more guides for you below: Best warzone settings to increase FPS on PC| Most popular Warzone weapons | Best Sniper Rifles | All Warzone bunker codes | MAC-10 loadout | Best Warzone loadouts | Top 20 highest-earning players

Best League Play classes & loadouts in Black Ops Cold War ActivisionLeague Play has finally arrived in Black Ops Cold War, and with CDL competition preparing to heat up, these loadouts will help you in your attempt to keep pace with the pros. It feels like competitive players have been waiting forever for a ranked system to arrive in Black Ops Cold War, and it finally happened on February 8 with the launch of League Play. While the pros and devs are still working together to make sure the ruleset is perfected by the time the Call of Duty League rolls around, we’ve got a pretty clear idea of the main weapons players are going to be leaning on in official competitions. With options for every type of player, including those who like to run assault rifles and SMGs, here are some of the more powerful classes you should be using in League Play. AK74u League Play class Muzzle: Muzzle Brake 5.45 – Barrel: 9.3” Extended – Underbarrel: Spetsnaz Speedgrip – Stock: KGB Skeletal Stock – Handle: GRU Elastic Wrap – The AK74u is probably already a weapon you’re familiar with if you’ve been grinding Black Ops Cold War, as its the runaway leading weapon in the SMG class. Read More: 5 times Black Ops Cold War butchered history – This loadout, straight from OpTic Chicago’s Envoy, will always keep you ready to take on a fight, maximizing speed while not sacrificing accuracy, which is going to be incredibly important when breaking hills and in close-range gunfights. Krig 6 League Play class Optic: Millstop Reflex – Barrel: 19.7″ Ranger – Underbarrel: Field Agent Grip – Handle: Airborne Elastic Wrap – Stock: Raider Pad – The Krig 6 is going to become your best friend if you’re a main AR player, able to mow down enemies over longer distances and keep objectives clear for your teammates to push in and win games. The optic on this is optional, but most will run the Millstop Reflex or Microflex LED, so it would be smart to try out both and see which one you prefer. Otherwise, this loadout is perfectly built to maintain accuracy across long distances and play the AR role perfectly. XM4 League Play class Optic: Microflex LED – Muzzle: Infantry Compensator – Barrel: 13.7″ Extended – Underbarrel: Field Agent Grip – Magazine: 40 Rnd – Handle: Airborne Elastic Wrap – Stock: Raider Pad – The XM4 seems to be finding its way into the pro meta, especially for flex players looking to engage in gunfights across all ranges and support their team as much as possible. As such, using Gunfighter to stick more attachments on it is vital for getting the most out of this weapon. As the first assault rifle you unlock, you should have a decent amount of experience with this one, so expect to see it pop up a lot in League Play. AK47 League Play class Optic: Microflex LED – Barrel: 20″ Liberator – Underbarrel: Spetsnaz Grip – Handle: GRU Elastic Wrap – Stock: KGB Skeletal Stock – While the AK47 isn’t being used among pros through a Gentleman’s Agreement not to run one, we don’t expect the same rules will be applied to League Play. This AK loadout operates similar to the XM4, though offers a little more accuracy at range, perfect for smaller maps that might not need a permanent Krig on the map. Preset CDL classes for League Play If you’re not too sure about how to build your League Play setup, Treyarch and Activision have a secondary option for you to go with instead. CDL preset classes were added in a recent update, featuring weapons, attachments, and equipment taken straight from what pro teams like to use. This is a great way for you to jump into some ranked action with a trusted and dependable loadout, especially if you don’t have a lot of stuff unlocked. Make sure to check out our League Play hub for more details about how it works in Black Ops Cold War, including a breakdown of the Skill Divisions, Ranks, rewards, and official rules.

Best LC10 Warzone loadout: Class setup, Attachments, Perks Activision / TreyarchThe LC10 SMG in Warzone Pacific is an underutilized beast. So, we’re here to break down the strongest and best LC10 loadout in Warzone that you should be using to maximize your damage. It’s been some time since the LC10 was introduced into the game but it secretly does continue to have a decent win rate in Warzone. This pint-sized gun may look relatively unimposing, but it is capable of dishing out some pretty decent damage – especially at close range. The LC10 features great handling, mobility, close-quarters damage, and a blisteringly fast rate of fire. If that wasn’t, the gun also has a little more range potential than most of the game’s SMGs, which gives it a little extra lethality outside of the usual close-range engagements. In order to help you get the most out of this weapon, we’ve put together the best LC10 loadout in Warzone that you can use in the Season 4 Reloaded update. Contents Best LC10 loadout for Warzone – Best LC10 setup (Perks & equipment) – How to unlock the LC10 in Warzone – Alternative to the LC10 loadout – Best LC10 loadout for Warzone Attachments Muzzle: Agency Suppressor – Barrel: 13.9” Task Force – Stock: Raider Stock – Laser: Tiger Team Spotlight – Ammunition: STANAG 55 Rnd – Close-quarter firefights are a given in Caldera, Rebirth, and lately Fortune’s Keep, so having an SMG that you can rely on is incredibly important. Fortunately, the LC10 is more than capable of delivering some speedy close-quarter kills. Not only does this loadout bolster the LC10’s damage range, but it also increases its mobility and control. First up is the Agency Suppressor. This attachment keeps your shots concealed and also helps with the gun’s vertical recoil control, ADS speed, bullet velocity, and sprint-to-fire speed. The 13.9” Task Force is also a must-pick attachment as it increases the LC10’s effective damage range, bullet velocity, and strafe speed. Not only does this make shredding through your target’s armor an absolute breeze, but it also enables you to run rings around them. After all, being highly mobile is one of the perks of the SMG class, so if you enjoy aggressively rushing your foes, then this attachment should be a priority pick. Due to the LC10’s clean iron sights, we’ve avoided using an Optic and adopted the Raider Stock instead. This lightweight stock enhances the ADS firing movement speed, aim walking movement speed, and sprint to fire time. SMGs are at their most potent when you can quickly react to any potential threats, which makes the Raider Stock a highly viable option. Next on the attachment list is the Tiger Team Spotlight, a common Laser attachment across Cold War SMGs. Having an attachment that increases both the LC10’s movement speed and ADS strafe is a must, especially if you wish to grab those satisfying close-quarter kills. Finally, the STANAG 55 Rnd offers enough ammunition to down multiple foes without having to constantly reload in between kills. Not only will it keep you competitive in those 1v1 and 1v2 clutch scenarios, but the added rounds can also help alleviate any issues that arise when your aim is a little off. Best LC10 setup (Perks & equipment) First Perk: E.O.D. – Second Perk: Overkill – Third Perk: Amped – Secondary: STG44 – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Heartbeat Sensor – Just like most meta Warzone loadouts, our LC10 loadout utilizes both EOD and Amped. EOD helps keep you safe from any explosives, while Amped also enables you to quickly swap to your secondary weapon. After all, reloading mid-fight can often lead to some incredibly frustrating deaths. Meanwhile, the Overkill perk enables the use of the extremely deadly STG44 loadout which remains one of the best Assault Rifles in Warzone Pacific Season 4 Reloaded. Lastly, both the Semtex and Heartbeat Sensor help track down your enemies and flush them out with a deadly blast. How to unlock the LC10 in Warzone Since the Cold War Season 2 Battle Pass has ended, you’ll need to do a challenge to unlock the LC10. If you’re looking to grab this SMG as soon as possible, then you’ll need to get 3 kills without dying in 15 different matches, while using SMGs. This challenge can be done in either multiplayer or Warzone, which means every player can unlock this lightning-fast SMG. If you don’t have Modern Warfare, Black Ops Cold War, or Vanguard — then simply boot up a game of Rebirth Island and get dropping those triple kills. Alternative to the LC10 loadout While the LC10 may be incredibly fast, the MP40 is quite possibly the best SMG in Warzone Pacific. This SMG features an incredible rate of fire, good damage, and staggeringly accurate hip fire. Not only is it a good alternative to the LC10, but you’ll also be able to pick up a lot of kills in no time if you use it. If you want to use this SMG in Warzone, then be sure to check out our MP40 loadout guide. So, there you have it, all the attachments you should be using with the LC10 in Warzone. If you want to keep updated with all the latest Call of Duty news and updates, then follow us over on @DexertoIntel. Looking for more of the best Warzone loadouts and tips? Check out our list of guides below: C58 | Grau 5.56 | Kilo 141 | Krig 6 | CR-56 AMAX | FFAR 1 | Mac 10 | MP5 | Kar98k | HDR | Best controller settings | Top 10 best class setups and loadouts | Best streamer loadouts | Most popular Warzone weapons| Best Sniper Rifles | All Warzone bunker codes | Mac-10 loadout | FFAR Warzone class | Top 20 highest-earning players | Best Warzone Weapons | Bren Loadout | Cooper Carbine Loadout

Best LC10 Black Ops Cold War loadout class: Attachments, setup, perks ActivisionThe new LC10 SMG in Black Ops Cold War has some serious competition in its class, but with this loadout you should be able to take down your enemies in no time. With each season of Cold War comes a bunch of new weapons and blueprints, and the LC10 is one of the premium Battle Pass guns in Season 2 of the hit game. In Season 1, the Mac 10 became a fan-favorite, especially in Warzone where it is perhaps the most frequently used weapon in Verdansk. In the regular multiplayer modes, the LC10 will have to contend with the likes of the Mac or the AK74u as top-range SMGs, but this class could make it seriously powerful. Best LC10 Cold War Class The LC10 is unlocked at Battle Pass Level 31 in Season 2, meaning it shouldn’t be too much of a grind. Read More: Best FARA 83 Black Ops Cold War loadout – Whether it shifts the meta, we’ll have to wait and see, but this class should get you on your way to some high-kill games as one of the fastest weapons available. This loadout below is made using the Gunfighter Wildcard to open all attachment slots. Best LC10 attachments Muzzle: Flashguard .45 ACP – Barrel: 13.9” Task Force – Laser: Steady Aim Laser – Stock: Raider Stock – Underbarrel: Field Agent Grip – Ammunition: Fast Mag – Rear Grip: Airborne Elastic Wrap – If you don’t want to use Gunfighter, you can remove the Laser and Ammo attachments and opt for a different Wildcard. Best LC10 perks in Cold War To maximize on the LC10’s strengths as a pure run-and-gun submachine gun, these perks should be what you utilize: Perk 1: Tactical Mask – Perk 2: Scavenger – Perk 3: Gung-Ho – This gun plays similar to the AK74u and is best used purely for rushing, so you’ll want to make sure your ammo count stays up and you can quickly snap on enemies in those sudden gunfights. From what we’ve seen, this is a pretty well-balanced SMG — and well worth trying out.

Best LAPA Warzone class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Setup Treyarch/ActivisionThe new LAPA SMG has arrived in Warzone, giving players another lethal close-quarter weapon to use, but what loadout maximizes the gun’s damage? The Haunting of Verdansk kicked off in Warzone on October 19, officially marking the beginning of the spooky season and introducing a variety of new content to the game. While players are enjoying the scary additions that have arrived with the Halloween event, it’s the new LAPA SMG that’s getting the most attention from the community. This versatile SMG is capable of performing at close-quarters as well medium-range, making it slightly different from the MAC-10 and PPSh. However, in order to get the most out of the weapon, you’ll need a top-tier loadout and luckily, we’ve got you covered. Contents Best LAPA loadout for Warzone – Best LAPA setup (Perks & equipment) – How to unlock the LAPA in Warzone – Alternative to the LAPA loadout – Best LAPA loadout for Warzone Attachments Muzzle: Agency Suppressor – Ammunition: Salvo 45 Round Fast Mag – Laser: Tiger Team Spotlight – Optic: Microflex LED – Stock: SAS Combat Stock – First of all, you’ll want to equip the Agency Suppressor for increased bullet velocity, effective damage range, and vertical recoil control. Not only that, but the attachment will keep your gunfire off the radar, which is incredibly important in Warzone when attempting to keep your position concealed. After that, pick up the SAS Combat Stock to boost the overall mobility of the weapon and utilize the Salvo 45 Round Fast Mag so you can spend less time reloading, and more time taking out your opponents. Next, use the Tiger Team Spotlight to increase your mobility even further and boost your aim walking movement speed. This will allow you to pursue retreating enemies and push posted-up squads aggressively. Finally, round off the loadout with the Microflex LED optic attachment, as hitting multiplier damage with LAPA is absolutely key. The new SMG deals massive headshot and neck shot damage but falls off when it comes to the body, so it’s important you’re always aiming in exactly the right place. Best LAPA setup (Perks & equipment) Perks and Equipment Perk 1: E.O.D. – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Secondary: Kar98k – Lethal: Grenade – Tactical: Heartbeat Sensor – When it comes to perks, you’ll want to run Amped to decrease your weapon swap speed and E.O.D to decrease the amount of damage you take from non-killstreak explosives. Finally, it’s important you run the Overkill perk as the LAPA SMG will struggle to take out enemies at long range, so running the Kar98k will allow you to weaken enemies before an aggressive push with your squad. Round off the equipment with a standard Grenade to flush camping opponents out of buildings, and the Heartbeat Sensor to track any opponents not using Ghost. How to unlock the LAPA in Warzone If you’re looking to unlock the LAPA, you’re going to have to complete all of the Halloween challenges in either Warzone or Black Ops Cold War. You can check out the full list of these challenges in our dedicated guide, and luckily they shouldn’t take very long to complete. Alternatively, if you’d prefer to skip the objectives, you can purchase the weapon blueprint from the in-game store. Alternative LAPA Warzone loadout If you’re looking for an alternative loadout to the LAPA SMG, check out our PPSh setup, which is perfect for any hyper-aggressive players who enjoy pushing enemy squads. With a huge amount of mobility and lethal damage potential at close range, there are very guns that will outmatch this weapon in a high-pressure situation. Just make sure you’re landing your shots and attempting to weaken your opponents before closing in on their position, this will increase your chances of winning the gunfight. Looking for more of the best Warzone loadouts and tips? Check out our list of guides below: C58 | Grau 5.56 | Kilo 141 | Krig 6 | CR-56 AMAX | FFAR 1 | Mac 10 | MP5 | Kar98k | HDR | Best controller settings | Top 10 best class setups and loadouts | Top highest-earning Warzone players

Best Warzone landing spots on Verdansk map in Season 6 Activision / Infinity WardVerdansk is a map we’ve all become incredibly familiar with since Warzone was released in March 2020, though brand-new changes have arrived in recent seasonal updates. What are the best tactics to move around the map? Where should you start your run? We’ve got you covered with a list of the best landing spots for Warzone Season 6. Warzone’s Season 6 update has arrived and with it comes a few key changes to Verdansk. While plenty will be familiar for veteran players, some groundbreaking adjustments will have you changing up your playstyle in certain areas. If you’re trying to drop in with old strategies, they might not serve you well anymore. Whether you’re a solo player or running with a squad, if you’re looking for high-kill wins or just want to actually get the win, it’s well worth looking at our updated list covering the best drop spots for every scenario. Best solo landing spot: Summit If you’re dropping in as a lone wolf, it’s always best to keep your options open. You never want to land in a hot spot and have your run come to an abrupt end due to the sheer number of enemies nearby. Therefore, we recommend Summit as the top pick for solo players in Warzone Season 6. This popular Black Ops location is fitted close to where the Dam area used to be in year one. While it features a number of large buildings, it also comes with multiple getaway options. Once you’ve dropped in and secured some early game loot, you’ve got trucks and helicopters at the ready to make a quick exit. Overall, whether you’re playing for high-kill games, or just looking to play slow and edge out a win, you can’t go wrong with a Summit start. Best duo landing spot: Airplane Factory With the Season 3 update came some all-new POIs. At the time, these were immediately hot drops and some have remained that way through to Season 6. One of those popular locations is Airplane Factory. Located right in the center of Verdansk ’84, it’s a great spot to drop into no matter what the circle looks like. It gives you endless possibilities in terms of rotations, and it provides a huge amount of early-game loot. Dropping in as a duo is your best bet for the Airplane Factory. While you can drop in different buildings and try to loot separate areas, it’s always advisable to stick close in the early game. Best Trios & Quads landing spot: Superstore If you’ve been playing Warzone for a while now, you’ll feel right at home with Verdansk 84’s version of Superstore. Not a whole lot has changed here, meaning it’s still one of the sweatiest early game locations in Warzone — especially now that Specialist was removed from the Downtown tower. If you’re dropping here, expect multiple fights within the first few minutes. Your goal as a team is to try and stay alive at all costs. Whoever wins the Superstore showdown is always left in a great position to close out the eventual win. Read More: 10 most popular weapons in Warzone – From powerful loot to tons of cash, it’s one of the best places on the map to really kit your team out. Just be cautious of other squads looking to do the same. Best landing spot for high-kill games: Hospital If you’ve watched any Warzone tournaments, you’ve probably seen how spicy Hospital has become. To really get high-kill games from here, you need to grab the helicopter and get to chopping. After that, you should have enough money in your bag and blood on your hands to get moving and secure a loadout. Add on helicopter mobility and you have a recipe for a game that’s heavy on kills. Hottest drop spot in Warzone Season 6: Stadium With Stadium completely torn apart in Season 6, new squads are constantly dropping in to see the damage. As with every new change to Verdansk, players always have to see it for themselves to familiarize with the new terrain. While Stadium is still in the same spot, it acts completely different in Season 6. There’s more verticality than before, new flanking routs, and more loot scattered throughout. If you’re looking for a quick start, dropping near Stadium is your way to go this season in Warzone. Best landing spot for easier wins: Grid Array A POI that arrived in Season 3, Grid Array is perfect for mapping out your next victory. This location marks one of the tallest points in Verdansk ’84, giving you a full look at your surroundings. Landing here and looting up will then give you the freedom to play patiently. Sitting up top will give you time to think and consider your next move. Where will you rotate? How’s the circle looking? Are there any squads nearby? You’ll have a better understanding of everything from up high at the Grid Array location. Overall, a lot of this comes down to personal preference. At the end of the day, you’ll familiarize yourself with certain landing spots and learn how best to navigate them. That said, if you’re looking to shake things up, consider some of the suggestions above. Let us know your favorite drop in Verdansk by tweeting us at @DexertoIntel!

Best landing spots on Warzone 2 Al Mazrah map ActivisionWith Warzone 2 in full swing, players are constantly looking for the best landing spots in Al Mazrah. So, here are some of the best places to land on the map to get you in the safest, and most rewarding location out there. What Verdansk was to the original Warzone, Al Mazrah is the same for the sequel. This new map, a city based in the fictional Republic of Adal in Western Asia, is divided into six sectors. These sectors are subdivided into several points of interest where players can drop, allowing them to find hidden caches, loot, and some handy weapons. All these sectors vary in size, making the map rather versatile, with locations featuring industrial areas, urban areas, and a lot more. This means some of these areas are filled with enough loot (both ground and from crates) to send your enemies to the Gulag. With that said, here is a complete breakdown of some of the best landing spots on Al-Mazrah in Warzone 2 so you can start the game as you mean to go on. Contents Best landing spots on Al Mazrah in Warzone 2 – Best landing spots on Al Mazrah in Warzone 2 Al Mazrah has 18 significant points of interest in Warzone 2. Some of these POIs are a lot more open-spaced while the others are mostly enclosed. Unlike other BR games, the plane’s path doesn’t matter much in Warzone as you can easily cover a long distance with some parachute maneuvering. As we said earlier, all these locations have varied sizes and terrains with an aim to make matches even more exciting. So, with that in mind, here are some of the best landing spots on Al Mazrah in Warzone 2: Ahkdar Village Ahkdar Village is located in the southeastern part of Al Mazrah. The location is quite dense which means you have a strong possibility of getting good weapons and tools right at the start. Since it’s one of the densest places, expect a ton of enemies to be dropping there, especially if the plane decides to start from the South. Fights are going to be intense and if you’re looking to warm up with some early-game kills, then this location might just be for you. Al Mazrah City Al Mazrah City, the heart of the map, is another great option to land in Warzone 2. Located in the northeastern part, the City is the biggest location in Al Mazrah. Being a metro region, structures are available in plenty which means you have the opportunity to get the best loot from here. Many Orange Supply Boxes are present in this part of the city and give you enough cash to buy loadout weapons and other tools & equipment. Hydroelectric Moving on from Al Mazrah City, we now land on the center of the map and the third-best landing spot, i.e. Hydroelectric. A river separates this location into two parts with almost an equal number of buildings on both sides. You have a couple of options in your hand after dropping on this location — play for late game, or get good loot and move to a different location for kills. Being located right at the center, expect enemies to push from all sides of the map as the split circles come into play. Rohan Oil Rohan Oil is located in the northwestern part of Al Mazrah and is way more open when compared to the other locations we mentioned above. This place can be a good starting point for you to collect loot and prepare for the mid and end games. While it is possible to find good loot, also expect the enemy teams would be able to easily spot you and vice versa. A Stronghold is also present in this location and if cleared successfully, you can get your hands on your best Warzone 2 loadout. Sawah Village And last but not the least, Sawah Village is the fifth-best landing spot on our list. The majority of the location is under the water and movement is not as fast as compared to the other locations we mentioned above. Spotting enemies might be a tad bit difficult here but loot is available in plenty. If you’re lucky, your team may even go unnoticed and fight for the late games from here. So, there you have it — those are some of the best landing spots on the Warzone 2 Al Mazrah map. For more on Warzone 2, be sure to check out our other guides: Best FSS Hurricane Warzone 2 loadout | Best Lachmann 556 Warzone 2 loadout | All new Warzone 2 features explained | How to slide cancel in Modern Warfare 2 and Warzone 2 | Warzone 2 & Modern Warfare 2 Season 1 Battle Pass | All Warzone 2 vehicles and Gas Stations | Does Warzone 2 have SBMM?

Best Lachmann Sub (MP5) Warzone 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks ActivisionThe Lachmann Sub, also known as the MP5 in previous games, still stands among the best SMGs in Warzone 2 despite the adjustments it received. To maximize its damage output and mobility, you’ll need the best meta loadout for Lachmann Sub in Warzone 2 and luckily, we’ve got you covered. Warzone 2‘s Season 4 update is in full swing and the community is checking out all the new content that was added, including the new weapons. Following the patch, the Lachmann Sub remains one of the standouts in the meta, despite getting hit with a set of heavy nerfs back in Season 3. The weapon is devastating at close range, so it’s no surprise that it’s one of the most popular guns in the game with a staggering 17.4% pick rate. But before you take it for a spin in Al Mazrah, you’ll need the best Lachmann Sub loadout for Warzone 2. Here are all the attachments, Perks, and equipment you’ll need. Contents Best Lachmann Sub Warzone 2 loadout – Best Lachmann Sub Warzone 2 perks & equipment – How to unlock the Lachmann Sub in Warzone 2 – Best Lachmann Sub alternatives in Warzone 2 – Best Lachmann Sub Warzone 2 loadout Muzzle: XRK Sandstorm – Rear Grip: Lachmann TCG-10 – Stock: LM Stockless Mod – Magazine: 40 Round Mag – Underbarrel: Lockgrip Precision-40 – The Lachmann Sub is primarily a close-range weapon in Warzone 2, but using the XRK Sandstorm will keep much of the gun’s recoil in check, meaning it can hold its own in mid-range encounters. Then we’ve gone for the Lachmann TCG-10 rear grip and Lockgrip Precision-40 underbarrel to bolster the SMG’s kickback even more. Next up is the LM Stockless Mod, which improves the ADS speed and sprint-to-fire time, allowing you to get those crucial first shots in. Finally, it’s also essential to be able to deal with multiple enemies at once, so we’ve opted for 40 Round Mags for extra ammo capacity. Best Lachmann Sub Warzone 2 perks & equipment Base Perk 1: Overkill – Base Perk 2: Bomb Squad – Bonus Perk: Fast Hands – Ultimate Perk: Ghost – Lethal: Drill Charges – Tactical: Flash Grenades – Overkill allows you to bring another primary weapon with you, ideally, a long-range Sniper Rifle or Assault Rifle to strike a nice balance. Meanwhile, Stong Arm lets you throw equipment further and affect fights in a different way. With an SMG like this, you’ll likely be running around the map, so Spotter lets you see enemy equipment and Killstreaks through walls to plan your next move. In the Ultimate slot is Survivor, which pings downed enemies on the map so a teammate can finish them off, while also speeding up your own revive time. When it comes to equipment, the new Drill Charges are perfect for taking out players who are hiding behind cover, while Flash Grenades can cover their screen while you get the drop on them. How to unlock the Lachmann Sub in Warzone 2 To get hold of the Lachmann Sub SMG, you’ll have to use the Lachmann-566 until it reaches level 16 to unlock the right Receiver. However, the Lachmann-566 isn’t available until you hit level 16 with the Lachmann-762, so there is some grinding needed to get the SMG. Best Lachmann Sub alternatives in Warzone 2 If you don’t like being limited to close range by the Lachmann Sub, you could switch to the M4 Assault Rifle for something more versatile. Or, sticking in the SMG category, the FSS Hurricane is incredibly effective while also being more effective at mid-range. For more on Warzone 2, be sure to check out our other guides: Do Warzone skins carry over to Warzone 2? | What are Strongholds in Warzone 2? | All Warzone 2 vehicles and Gas Stations | Does Warzone 2 have SBMM? |

Best Lachmann Shroud Warzone loadout: Class setup, attachments & perks ActivisionWarzone’s short-range meta is wide open in Season 5 Reloaded, and the Lachmann Shroud throws a wrench in proceedings. We’ve put together the best Lachman Shroud loadout in Warzone to maximize the new SMG’s potential. In the Season 5 Reloaded patch notes, The Warzone devs claimed: “The submachine gun category is very healthy, with a staggering six SMGS falling within a 10-percentage point difference in kill-death ratio at the highest skill levels.” The devs also surprisingly admitted that the PDSW 528 may be the best among all of them. You wouldn’t be able to guess that based on popularity rankings. According to WZRanked, the Lachmann Sub leads all weapons with an 18% pick rate. And the ISO 45 ranks third at 8.7%. It’s reassuring to know players have a wide range of SMGs to choose from, and Season 5 Reloaded adds another option to the mix. Here is everything you need to know about the Lachmann Shroud. Contents Best Lachmann Shroud Warzone loadout – Best Lachmann Shroud Warzone class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the Lachmann Shroud in Warzone 2 – Best Lachmann Shroud alternatives in Warzone 2 – Best Lachmann Shroud Warzone loadout Attachments Laser: VLK LZR 7MW (-0.28, -29.59) – Stock: FT Mobile Stock (-2.08, -1.25) – Rear Grip: Lachmann TCG (-0.52, -0.22) – Ammunition: 9MM Sub OP (+0.38, +4.50) – Magazine: 40 Round Mag – Infinity Ward described the Lachmann Shroud as a “stealthy and lethal 9mm submachine gun” that “features burst and semi-auto fire modes which allow for considerable mobility and stopping power out to mid-range.” It’s important to note that this SMG only features burst and semi-auto fire modes. So, this is far from a traditional short-range weapon. It may be awkward at first trying to use a burst fire weapon up close and personal, but players will eventually realize the potential. Best Lachmann Shroud Warzone class: Perks & equipment Base Perk 1: Double Time – Base Perk 2: Overkill – Bonus Perk: Resupply – Ultimate Perk: High Alert – Lethal: Throwing knife – Tactical Equipment: Smoke grenade – Double Time makes it easier to traverse freely, improving the duration of your tactical sprint. Next, we recommend using Overkill to pair the SMG with a meta long-range weapon such as the Kastov 762 or Cronen Squall. Resupply will come in handy over the duration of a long Warzone 2 match, as you start with an additional Lethal and equipment recharges over 30 seconds. Finally, High Alert may save your life on one or two occasions, as vision pulses alert you when an enemy spots you. To round off the setup, we recommend using throwing knives to finish off downed enemies or take down multiple enemies at once without wasting ammo. And finally, smoke grenades are great for fleeing a gunfight or rotating in the final few circles. How to unlock the Lachmann Shroud in Warzone 2 To unlock the Lachmann Shroud, players must complete all four initial Sector E0 challenges in the Battle Pass and get 30 operator hip-fire kills with SMGs. Best Lachmann Shroud alternatives in Warzone 2 As alluded to earlier, if the Lachmann Shroud isn’t quite your cup of tea, plenty of other viable SMGs exist. Data sites have yet to reveal statistics after the Season 5 Reloaded update, but the devs must have hyped up the PDSW 528 for a reason. So, considering those words, we recommend giving the PDSW a chance after the mid-season update. For more on Warzone 2, be sure to check out some of our other guides: Do Warzone skins carry over to Warzone 2? | What are Strongholds in Warzone 2? | All Warzone 2 vehicles and Gas Stations | Does Warzone 2 have SBMM? | How do Warzone 2 circles work?

Best Lachmann Shroud Modern Warfare 2 class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Setup The Lachmann Shroud is here offering something fresh to the multiplayer meta being MW2’s first three-round burst SMG. To help you get the most out of this submachine gun we’ve put together this best Lachmann Shroud loadout guide for Modern Warfare 2. Introduced in Season 5 Reloaded, the Lachmann Shroud is a 9mm integrally suppressed submachine gun roughly based on the MP5-SD. However, unlike its real-world counterpart the Shroud can only utilize burst-fire or semi-auto fire. At its core, the Shroud is extremely similar to the existing Lachmann Sub. Both are based on MP5s and have comparable stats and performance across various categories. This isn’t necessarily a bad thing though given that the Lachmann Sub is widely regarded as one of MW2’s strongest guns. To get the most out of the Lachmann Shroud you’ll want to have the best Modern Warfare 2 loadout possible for multiplayer, and thankfully we’ve got you covered. Contents Best Lachmann Shroud loadout – Best Lachmann Shroud loadout: Perks & Equipment – How to unlock the Lachmann Shroud in Modern Warfare 2 – Best Lachmann Shroud alternatives in Modern Warfare 2 – Best Lachmann Shroud MW2 loadout Attachments Barrel: 170mm Grapple VI – Laser: VLK LZR 7mW – Optic: Cronen Mini Pro – Stock: FT Mobile Stock – Rear Grip: Lachmann TCG-10 – The Lachmann Shroud works best when built as an SMG/AR hybrid as it offers a nice balance of mobility, handling, and effective range. This lets it excel in a variety of gunfights and make the most of its highly accurate burst fire. To enable this we recommend using the 170mm Grapple VI barrel which increases muzzle velocity, damage range, and recoil while hurting ADS time and mobility. To offset these downsides it’s best to use the VLK LZR 7mW which keeps the Shroud feeling snappy. A mobility laser partners well with the FT Mobile Stock which improves mobility and ADS time while having relatively few downsides. Though this stock does increase recoil, so to keep this SMG as accurate as possible it’s worth equipping the Lachmann TCG-10 rear grip. Finally, burst guns suffer significantly from Modern Warfare 2’s exaggerated visual recoil so a clear close-range optic like the Cronen Mini Pro is a great option. Some good alternatives include the Slimline Pro, Cronen Mini Dot, Aim OP-V4, and DF105 Reflex Sight. Best Lachmann Shroud MW2 loadout: Perks & Equipment Base Perk 1: Double Time – Base Perk 2: Bomb Squad – Bonus Perk: Fast Hands – Ultimate Perk: Ghost – Lethal Equipment: Frag Grenade – Tactical Equipment: Stim – As with most SMGs, the Lachmann Shroud benefits from an aggressive playstyle where you are frequently moving around the map. To facilitate this we recommend running Double Time which doubles the duration of Tactical Sprint. We also like Bomb Squad which makes you more resistant to explosive damage, both from equipment and rockets. For Bonus Perk, Fast Hands is a must with the Shroud as its reload speed is on the slower side for a submachine gun. The best Ultimate Perk is Ghost, which pairs extremely well with the Lachmann Shroud’s internal suppressor. With this combo, you will never appear on the enemy radar outside of the occasional Advanced UAV. A Frag Grenade is always a solid choice for lethal equipment thanks to its destructive potential and ability to be cooked, making it harder for enemies to get away in time. Meanwhile, a Stim works well in the tactical slot as it lets you immediately heal up and take back-to-back gunfights in quick succession. How to unlock the Lachmann Shroud in Modern Warfare 2 The Lachmann Shroud can be unlocked by completing Sector E0 of the Season 5 Battle Pass. This sector requires players to complete the following objectives: Get 15 Operator Kills with melee weapons – Get 3 Operator Kills without dying 20 times – Get 15 Operator Headshot Kills with pistols – Get 20 Operator Longshot Kills – Best Lachmann Shroud alternatives in Modern Warfare 2 An obvious alternative to the Lachmann Shroud is the Lachmann Sub. Both are MP5-inspired SMGs with comparable TTKs, handling and overall feel. It really comes down to whether you prefer using automatic guns or burst guns. Those looking for an alternative burst weapon should consider using the M16 which after several buffs throughout MW2’s lifespan has become a competitive assault rifle. For more on MW2 & Modern Warfare 3, be sure to check out some of our other guides: Modern Warfare 3 (COD 2023): Warzone, maps, release date, more | Modern Warfare 3 multiplayer beta breakdown | Modern Warfare 3 movement changes explained | How to pre-order Modern Warfare 3 | Modern Warfare 3 Zombies explained | Modern Warfare 3 Carry Forward explained | All Modern Warfare 3 weapons & streaks

Best Lachmann Sub (MP5) MW2 loadout: Class setup, Attachments, Perks Modern Warfare 2 sees the return of a Call of Duty classic, the MP5 submachine gun, though it has undergone some changes. If you want to get hold of the best Lachmann MP5 Sub loadout in MW2, here’s everything you need to know. Based on the real world Heckler & Koch MP5, the Lachmann Sub has remained a fan favorite since MW2’s launch. It has consistently ranked as one of the most used guns in multiplayer and Ranked Play alike. It is loved for its versatility and great mobility that make it one of the most well rounded SMGs in Modern Warfare 2. To ensure you’re getting the best out of this impressive weapon, here’s the best Lachmann Sub loadout in Modern Warfare 2. Contents Best Lachmann MP5 Sub MW2 loadout – Best Lachmann MP5 Sub Modern Warfare 2 class & Perks – How to unlock Lachmann Sub in Modern Warfare 2 – Best alternatives to Lachmann Sub in Modern Warfare 2 – Best Lachmann Sub MW2 loadout Muzzle: Spiral v3.5 Flash Hider (-0.31, +0.22) – Barrel: L38 Falcon 226mm (-0.20, +0.22) – Laser: Accu-Shot 5mW Laser (-0.27, -27.55) – Underbarrel: Lockgrip Precision-40 (+0.45, -0.09) – Rear Grip: Lachmann TCG-10 (-0.25, +0.06) – The focus of this loadout is to make the Lachmann Sub easier to control without slowing down its handling. With the MP5 being an SMG we want it to feel snappy and responsive to better facilitate an aggressive playstyle. The Spiral v3.5 Flash Hider muzzle, Lockgrip Precision-40, and Lachmann TCG-10 combine to greatly reduce overall recoil. This makes it easy to keep sustained fire accurate at medium range with the Lachmann Sub. We use the Accu-Shot 5mW Laser to speed up the MP5’s aim down sights speed to keep the gun feeling speedy. Players who don’t like playing with a visible laser should instead opt for the 1mW Quick Fire Laser. Finally, the L38 Falcon 226mm barrel is incredible for mobility as it improves our movement speed, sprint speed, and strafe speed. As an added bonus we get a slight improvement to aim down sights time too. The only downsides are a relatively small recoil penalty and a slight reduction in muzzle velocity. Best Lachmann Sub MW2 loadout: Class & Perks Base Perk 1: Double Time – Base Perk 2: Battle Hardened – Bonus Perk: Fast Hands – Ultimate Perk: Hardline – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Flash Grenades – Perk-wise, we recommend starting with Double Time to improve the duration of your sprint, and Battle Hardened to reduce the effects of any tactical equipment that comes your way. The MP5 burns through ammo at a rapid pace, so Fast Hands will let you reload quickly so you’re never out of the action for long. Then, for the Ultimate Perk, we’ve gone for Hardline to help you earn killstreaks that can turn the tide of a match. Alongside your Perks be sure to equip the Flash Grenade and Semtex, as blinding your enemies will grant you extra time to get your shots in, and the sticky explosives can score some easy kills. How to unlock Lachmann Sub in Modern Warfare 2 Thanks to the new Gunsmith system in Modern Warfare 2, unlocking the MP5 isn’t as easy as reaching a certain rank. Instead, it can be found within the Lachmann weapon tree. To unlock this classic CoD SMG you need to get the Lachmann-566 up to level 16, then you’ll be able to swap out the Receiver to the Lachmann Sub. Best alternatives to Lachmann Sub in Modern Warfare 2 If the Lachmann Sub isn’t for you it’s worth trying another top tier SMG like the Vaznev-9K. Both are highly versatile and perform well at both close range and medium range. Alternatively, a fast handling assault rifle like the Kastov-74u can work too with it having a highly competitive TTK at most ranges. It’s so strong that it was one of the first guns to be banned in Ranked Play. For more on Modern Warfare 2, be sure to check out our other guides: Modern Warfare 2 new equipment guide: Lethals and Tacticals explained | How to Slide Cancel in Modern Warfare 2 | How to unlock Oni Operator & Blueprint in Modern Warfare 2 | All Modern Warfare 2 Killstreaks | What is Modern Warfare 2 Spec Ops mode? | All Modern Warfare 2 perks | All Modern Warfare 2 Field Upgrades

Best Lachmann-762 Warzone 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks ActivisionThe Lachmann-762 is a deadly Battle Rifle in Warzone 2, capable of dispatching enemies quickly with the right setup. Here’s the best Lachmann-762 loadout in Warzone 2, along with the ideal attachments, Perks, and equipment. Warzone 2 has a huge number of weapons to experiment with, and players are already discovering what the meta options are in the new game. Assault Rifles and SMGs are undeniably popular but there are plenty of different guns that could secure you that victory. Battle Rifles may be a little unconventional but they definitely pack a punch, and the Lachmann-762 is one of the strongest in the category – with the ability to send enemies to the Gulag in a couple of shots. We’ve put together the best Lachmann-762 loadout in Warzone, complete with top Perks and equipment. Contents Best Lachmann-762 Warzone 2 loadout – Best Lachmann-762 Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the Lachmann-762 in Warzone 2 – Best Lachmann-762 alternatives in Warzone 2 – Best Lachmann-762 Warzone 2 loadout Muzzle: Polarfire-S – Barrel: Romeo FT16″ Barrel – Underbarrel: FTAC Ripper 56 – Laser: FSS Ole-V Laser – Optic: Cronen Mini Red Dot – We begin our best Lachmann-762 loadout in Warzone 2 with the Polarfire-S Muzzle, which suppresses the rifle’s shots while buffing its range and recoil smoothness. We paired this with the Romeo FT16″ Barrel for extra recoil control, ensuring you can land those second and third shots. The Lachmann is much more effective when used as a single-shot Battle Rifle, which means keeping it on target is vital in tense gunfights. That’s why we’ve added the FTAC Ripper 56 for more stability, making it easier to unload accurate shots in quick succession. With such a short TTK in Warzone 2, getting the first shot in is crucial, so the FSS Ole-V Laser will improve the Lachmann-762’s ADS and sprint-to-fire speed. Last up is the Cronen Mini Red Dot for a nice, clean Optic that improves accuracy without dominating the screen. Best Lachmann-762 Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment Perk Package: Recon Base Perk 1: Double Time – Base Perk 2: Tracker – Bonus Perk: Focus – Ultimate Perk: Birdseye – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical Equipment: Stun Grenade – There’s no option to create a Perk setup in Warzone right now, so we recommend the Recon Perk Package. It comes with Double Time for increased Tactical Sprint and extra mobility, as well as Tracker to hunt down enemies by following their footsteps. In the Bonus slot is Focus, which reduces flinch when getting hit while aiming, allowing you to stay precise even in high-pressure scenarios. Lastly, it has the Birdseye Perk, which pings enemies when they pop a radar, essentially giving you unlimited UAVs. When it comes to equipment, Semtex is perfect for flushing enemies out of buildings, while Stun Grenades disorientate teams before you pick them off. How to unlock the Lachmann-762 in Warzone 2 All you have to do to get hold of the Lachmann-762 is reach Level 16 by earning XP in matches. This can be achieved in Warzone 2, but it might be quicker to jump into Modern Warfare 2 if you have access to it and rack up some more kills. Best Lachmann-762 alternatives in Warzone 2 If the Lachmann-762 isn’t quite cutting it, the Taq-V is another strong option in the Battle Rifle category. However, if you don’t mind being restricted to a single shot, the SP-R 208 Marksman Rifles is one of the most powerful, and fun, weapons in the whole game. For more on Warzone 2, be sure to check out our other guides: Do Warzone skins carry over to Warzone 2? | What are Strongholds in Warzone 2? | All Warzone 2 vehicles and Gas Stations | Does Warzone 2 have SBMM? | How do Warzone 2 circles work?

Best Lachmann-762 Modern Warfare 2 loadout: Class setup, Attachments & Perks ActivisionModern Warfare 2’s Lachmann-762 is a powerhouse Battle Rifle capable of easily dominating the opposition, but only with the right loadout. We’ve put together the best Lachmann-762 loadout and class along with the best equipment, Perks, and attachments to get you to the top of that leaderboard. Call of Duty Modern Warfare 2 has a plethora of powerful weapons to use. One such weapon is the Lachmann-762, a quick and deadly Battle Rifle that needs the right player and loadout to control that less-than-ideal recoil control. While we can’t provide you with the right player, we have compiled the best Lachmann-762 loadout and class as well as the best Perks, attachments, and equipment to let you get the most out of this fantastic Battle Rifle. It’s also a vital step towards unlocking the Lachmann-556 and the Lachmann Sub. If you’re looking for a powerful Warzone 2 Lachmann-762 loadout instead, we’ve got a perfect setup. Contents Best Lachmann-762 Modern Warfare 2 loadout – Best Lachmann-762 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock Lachmann-762 in Modern Warfare 2 – Best alternatives to Lachmann-762 in Modern Warfare 2 – Best Lachmann-762 Modern Warfare 2 loadout Muzzle: Sakin Tread-40 – Barrel: 15.9″ Lachmann Rapp Barrel – Stock: FT Mobile Stock – Rear Grip: Lachmann TCG-10 – Optic: Cronen Mini Red Dot – Receiver: Lachmann-762 – First, the Sakin Tread-40 Muzzle will help keep the Lachmann-762 under control, as its recoil can be intense, to begin with. Equipping the 15.9″ Lachmann Rapp Barrel will not only aid with this too but add some much-needed damage range into the equation for those mid-to-long range battles. Be sure to use the FT Mobile Stock for balanced movement speed and additional help for handling. Conversely, the Lachmann TCG-10 rear grip will help you get your shots off with accuracy and decent speed. As you’ll be battling at range often in Modern Warfare 2, the Cronen Mini Red Dot provides a great medium between bigger sights and retaining mobility and completes the best Lachmann-762 loadout. Best Lachmann-762 class: Perks & equipment Base Perk 1: Double Time – Base Perk 2: Tracker – Bonus Perk: Hardline – Ultimate Perk: High Alert – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Flash Grenade – Many of Modern Warfare 2’s maps contain vast open spaces, meaning you’ll be pacing through them at speed. Double Time will give you an extra few seconds of Tactical Sprinting to ensure you make it into cover. Tracker is a great Perk for modes like Domination or Hardpoint, making it easier to keep tabs on nearby enemies. Hardline will be useful here too, giving you access to your Killstreaks earlier. Pair this with High Alert to be notified when enemies are setting their optics on you across the map. Lastly, running Semtex and a Flash Grenade together is crucial when you’re clearing out small spaces and flushing foes into the open. How to unlock Lachmann-762 in Modern Warfare 2 To unlock the Lachmann-762 you’ll need to hit Level 16 in Modern Warfare 2’s multiplayer, which will get you started on your path to earning the 556 and Lachmann Sub. Best alternatives to Lachmann-762 in Modern Warfare 2 If the Lachmann-762 isn’t satisfying your Modern Warfare 2 journey, we recommend putting the Kastov-762 to good use. Furthermore, it is worth giving the classic M4 a run on the battlefield. For more on Modern Warfare 2, make sure you check out our other guides: Modern Warfare 2 new equipment guide: Lethals and Tacticals explained | How to unlock MP5 SMG loadout in Modern Warfare 2 | How to Slide Cancel in Modern Warfare 2 | How to unlock Oni Operator & Blueprint in Modern Warfare 2 | All Modern Warfare 2 Killstreaks | What is Modern Warfare 2 Spec Ops mode? | All Modern Warfare 2 perks | All Modern Warfare 2 Field Upgrades

Best Lachmann 556 Warzone 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks ActivisionThe Lachmann 556 has emerged as a long-range meta favorite after the Warzone Season 4 update. But you will need the best meta loadout for Lachmann 556 along with its Class setup, attachments, and Perks to increase your chances to score a win in Warzone 2. The meta in Warzone has undergone a fair few changes over the last few months, with the recent Season 4 update really shaking things up again in a drastic way, Lachmann 556 is just one of the weapons that benefitted from the latest balance changes. The Lachmann 556 is an assault rifle that can dominate in Modern Warfare 2’s multiplayer lobbies, making it one of the top picks for the Battle Royale sequel as well. So, if you’re looking for a loadout for the Lachmann 556 AR that stands out from the rest, we have got your back. Our loadout strikes a balance between great damage combined with low recoil and standard mobility. Contents Best Lachmann 556 Warzone 2 loadout – Best Lachmann 556 Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the Lachmann 556 in Warzone 2 – Best Lachmann 556 alternatives in Warzone 2 – Best Lachmann 556 Warzone 2 loadout Attachments Muzzle: Harbinger D20 – Barrel: 15.9″ Lachmann Rapp Barrel – Underbarrel: FTAC Ripper 56 – Optic: VLK 4.0 Optic – Magazine: 60 Round Mag – The Lachmann 556 performs best when its bullet velocity and damage ranges are increased and we’ve done exactly that. For the muzzle, we have used the Harbinger D20 as it increases bullet velocity & damage range. On top of that, it helps to smoothen the recoil which comes in handy for long-range spray downs. To catalyze this effect, we have paired the Harbinger muzzle with the 15.9″ Lachmann Rapp Barrel. Optics are a personal preference but we feel the VLK 4.0 Optic balances things out for every form of combat (close, mid, and long-range). Following that, the FTAC Ripper 56 Underbarrel helps to aim faster and is quite effective for hip-fire shots, in case enemies rush right into your team. Lastly, the 60 Round Mag is the final part of the loadout and it ensures that you have enough ammo for wiping out multiple enemies without reloading. Best Lachmann 556 Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment Base Perk 1: Overkill – Base Perk 2: Strong Arm – Bonus Perk: Spotter – Ultimate Perk: Survivor – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical Equipment: Stun Grenade – Choosing the right Perks and equipment is as important as choosing the right attachments for your weapons. For the Lachmann 556, we’ve selected Overkill which allows you to carry two primary weapons (which is essential for Warzone) and Strong Arm increases your projectile precision. This means you’d be able to throw items like grenades further with greater accuracy. The bonus perk here is Spotter, which ensures you’re never caught off guard by enemy equipment, killstreaks, or field upgrades. The Survivor perk is quite effective here as it automatically marks the enemy who knocked you out. Lastly, Semtex forces enemies to move out of cover (if thrown properly) while Stun Grenades help you catch players off guard before you send them to the Gulag. How to unlock the Lachmann 556 in Warzone 2 In order to unlock the Lachmann 556 in Warzone 2, you’ll need to level up the Lachmann-762 Battle Rifle to Level 13. Remember, Lachmann-762 gets unlocked when you reach rank 16. This can be done by killing a bunch of enemies using the Lachmann-762 in Warzone or MW2 multiplayer (if you own the game). So, unlocking the Lachmann 556 could be a lengthy process in Warzone 2. Best Lachmann 556 alternatives in Warzone 2 If you feel the Lachmann 556 is taking way longer to unlock or you’re not comfortable with the weapon, try switching to the M4 or the TAQ-56 ARs. These are two of the best weapons in the game and are quite effective in Battle Royale. So, there you have it — that’s all for our Lachmann 556 loadout. For more on Warzone 2, be sure to check out our other guides: Best Warzone weapons: Ultimate tier list with meta loadouts | Best Warzone 2 loadouts: Meta weapons and classes to dominate in Al Mazrah | Call of Duty 2024: Early leaks, concept art, Warzone 2.0, Treyarch & more | Call of Duty 2023: Early leaks, Modern Warfare 2, Warzone 2, more | Best M4 Warzone 2 loadout | Best Modern Warfare 2 weapons: Ultimate tier list with the best classes | Modern Warfare 2 best settings on PC for FPS, graphics, visibility, more

Best Lachmann-556 Modern Warfare 2 loadout: Class setup, Attachments, Perks ActivisionModern Warfare 2 has an arsenal of weapons to master, including the versatile Lachmann-556 Assault Rifle. We’ve put together the best Lachmann-556 loadout, with the ideal attachments, Perks, and equipment. Modern Warfare 2 sees veteran developers Infinity Ward return to the franchise, bringing an array of weapons to explore. There is something for everyone in the latest CoD entry, but eager players are already getting to work on curating the game’s meta selections. Before you can get your hands on the Lachmann MP5 Sub receiver, you’ll need to use the Lachmann-556 Assault Rifle. However, don’t underestimate this viable AR, as the Lachmann-556 provides just as much punch in battle. Here’s how you can put together the best Lachmann-556 loadout in Modern Warfare 2 and bag yourself some victories. Contents Best Lachmann-556 Modern Warfare 2 loadout – Best Lachmann-556 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock Lachmann-566 in Modern Warfare 2 – Best alternatives to Lachmann-556 in Modern Warfare 2 – Best Lachmann-556 Modern Warfare 2 loadout Muzzle: Forge-Tac Castle Comp – Barrel: LM Aurora 90 Barrel – Stock: Hmann S9 Factory Stock – Rear Grip: LMK64 Grip – Underbarrel: VX Pineapple Vert Grip – Receiver: LM-16 – We kick things off with the Forge-Tac Castle Comp Muzzle and the VX Pineapple Vert Grip, which improves the horizontal and verticle recoil control, making the Lachmann-556 easier to handle at range. Then we’ve gone for the LM Aurora 90 Barrel, buffing the overall damage range and bullet velocity. This will allow you to pick off enemies from a distance without having to run into the danger zone. While range is important, mobility will be vital in close-quarters combat. For this reason, we’ve paired the LMK64 Grip with the Hmann S9 Factory Stock for added ADS, sprint-to-fire, and general movement speed. Best Lachmann-556 class: Perks & equipment Base Perk 1: Overkill – Base Perk 2: Scavenger – Bonus Perk: Fast Hands – Ultimate Perk: Hardline – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Shock Stick – By having Overkill in your class setup, you can add another primary weapon into the mix. We recommend an SMG or Shotgun to cover you in close-range battles. Scavenger will ensure you’re stocked up on ammo, while Fast Hands will ensure your weapon switches are quicker so you always have the right tools for the job. Hardline is always a great choice to decrease the gaps between killstreaks that can turn the tide of a match late on. With your Perks now selected, you’ll benefit from using the Shock Stick and Semtex. The former will delay your enemies’ movements, while the Semtex will deal devastating explosive damage. How to unlock Lachmann-566 in Modern Warfare 2 The Lachmann-566 can be found as part of the Lachmann-762 weapon tree, so all you have to do is level up the Battle Rifle to level 13 when you earn the Lachmann-556 Receiver. This can be done by using the Lachmann-762 in MW2 multiplayer matches and bagging plenty of kills. Best alternatives to Lachmann-556 in Modern Warfare 2 If the Lachmann-566 isn’t quite cutting it, we recommend switching it out for the M4. This is another versatile AR but it packs slightly more punch, which explains why it’s a more popular choice. On the other hand, if you want to leave the AR category behind altogether, you could go for the heavy-hitting 556 Icarus LMG. For more on Modern Warfare 2, make sure you check out our other guides: Modern Warfare 2 new equipment guide: Lethals and Tacticals explained | How to unlock MP5 SMG loadout in Modern Warfare 2 | How to Slide Cancel in Modern Warfare 2 | How to unlock Oni Operator & Blueprint in Modern Warfare 2 | All Modern Warfare 2 Killstreaks | What is Modern Warfare 2 Spec Ops mode? | All Modern Warfare 2 perks | All Modern Warfare 2 Field Upgrades

Best LA-B 330 Warzone 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks ActivisionWarzone 2 has no shortage of great Sniper Rifles, and the LA-B 330 is one of the strongest with the right setup. We’ve put together the best LA-B 330 loadout in Warzone 2, complete with the ideal attachments, Perks, and equipment. One of the most appealing aspects of Warzone 2 is the sheer variety of weapons to suit any style of play. From deadly SMGs to reliable Assault Rifles, the battle royale has a gun for every situation. Check out the best Black Friday and Cyber Monday deals on Amazon The vast open spaces of Al Mazrah promote long-range fights, so running a top Sniper Rifle could be the difference between victory and a trip to the Gualg. Luckily, the LA-B 330 is a devastating rifle that can delete enemies in seconds. Here’s the best LA-B 330 loadout in Warzone 2, including the perfect Perk Package to complement an already devastating setup. Contents Best LA-B 330 Warzone 2 loadout – Best LA-B 330 Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the LA-B 330 in Warzone 2 – Best LA-B 330 alternatives in Warzone 2 – Best LA-B 330 Warzone 2 loadout Muzzle: Nilsound 90 – Barrel: 23.5″ Fluted R-67 – Laser: Corio Laz-44 V3 – Bolt: FSS ST87 Bolt – Ammunition: .300 Armor Piercing – Kicking off the best LA-B 330 loadout in Warzone 2 is the Nilsound 90 Barrel, which suppresses each shot for maximum stealth while increasing bullet velocity and damage range. Next is the 23.5″ Fluted R-67 for another range and velocity buff, as well as extra mobility which will come in clutch with each rotation. Being able to react quickly is vital when sniping, so the extra ADS speed that comes from the Corio Laz-44 V3 is more than welcome. Then the FSS ST87 Bolt improves the rechambering speed, allowing you to unleash multiple shots in quick succession. Lastly, we’ve gone for the .300 Armor Piercing rounds for extra bullet penetration, ideal when taking shots at a team in a building. Best LA-B 330 Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment Perk Package: Weapon Specialist Base Perk 1: Overkill – Base Perk 2: Strong Arm – Bonus Perk: Spotter – Ultimate Perk: Survivor – Lethal: Proximity Mines – Tactical Equipment: Stim – While the LA-B 330 is perfect for long-range combat, it’s easy to get caught out when a team pushes you. That’s why we recommend the Weapon Specialist Perk Package. This selection of Perks comes with Overkill, giving you the chance to bring an SMG like the Fennec 45 along to cover all bases. Next, Strong Arm allows equipment to be thrown further, which opens up opportunities for interesting plays. It also includes Spotter, which points out enemy equipment, and Killstreaks so you can avoid any quick deaths. In the Ultimate slot is Survivor to ping downed enemies on the screen so the rest of your squad can move in and finish them off. When it comes to equipment, a well-placed Proximity Mine will quickly take out anyone who tries to sneak up on you, while Stims offer a nice health boost to get out of sticky situations. How to unlock the LA-B 330 in Warzone 2 In order to unlock the LA-B 330 in Warzone 2, you must get the SA-B 50 to Level 17 to obtain the right Receiver. However, to unlock the SA-B 50, you’ll first need to hit Level 16 with the SP-R 208, so there is some work to be done. Check out a full breakdown below: Use the SP-R 208 in Warzone 2 or Modern Warfare 2 until it hits Level 16. – Equip the SA-B 50. – Use the SA-B 50 until it reaches Level 17 – Swap the Receiver to the LA-B 330 – Best LA-B 330 alternatives in Warzone 2 If you’re in the market for another top-notch Sniper Rifle, the Victus XMR is one of the most powerful in the game right now. However, for a weapon that has fantastic range but is more multi-purpose, you can’t go wrong with the RPK LMG. For more on Warzone 2, be sure to check out our other guides: Do Warzone skins carry over to Warzone 2? | What are Strongholds in Warzone 2? | All Warzone 2 vehicles and Gas Stations | Does Warzone 2 have SBMM? | How do Warzone 2 circles work? If you click on a product link on this page we may earn a small affiliate commission.

Best L-AB 330 Modern Warfare 2 loadout: Class setup, Attachments & Perks DexertoThe L-AB 330 stands out among a pack of impressive Sniper Rifles in Modern Warfare 2, but only if it has the best loadout. Here’s the best L-AB 330 loadout in MW2, complete with attachments, Perks, and equipment. Sniping is back and better than ever in Modern Warfare 2. Ground War returns for the first time since Modern Warfare 2019, introducing five 32v32 maps. Sniper Rifles excel in long-range combat, matching perfectly with the game’s larger-scale environments. However, the L-AB’s lightweight build also makes it viable in tight quarters 6v6 combat. Fans of quick scoping will immediately feel at home with this versatile gun. If you want to maximize the L-AB 330’s untapped potential in Modern Warfare 2, then you need our best loadout for the weapon. Contents Best L-AB 330 Modern Warfare 2 loadout – Best L-AB 330 Modern Warfare 2 class – How to unlock the L-AB 330 in Modern Warfare 2 – Alternative to the L-AB 330 Modern Warfare 2 loadout – Best L-AB 330 Modern Warfare 2 loadout Barrel: 23.5″ Fluted R-67 – Laser: FSS OLE-V Lazer – Optic: SZ Bullseye Optic – Stock: ZLR T70 Pad Extension – Comb: Aim-Assist 406 – The best L-AB loadout starts off with the 23.5″ Fluted R-67 Barrel, as it increases damage range, bullet velocity, and movement speed at the cost of aim-down sight speed (ADS) and recoil control. The FSS OLE-V Laser and Aim-Assist 406 Comb offset the Barrel by increasing sprint to fire speed and aim down sight speed. The ZLR T70 Pad Extension Stock also increases ADS speed and sprint speed. We went with the SZ Bullseye Optic because of its increased ADS speed and very small sniper glint, but it comes down to personal preference. Maximizing damage range, bullet velocity, and aim down-sight speed is essential for any Sniper Rifle loadout. Best L-AB 330 Modern Warfare 2 class: Perks & Equipment Base Perk 1: Tracker – Base Perk 2: Battle Hardened – Bonus Perk: Focus – Ultimate Perk: High Alert – Lethal: Proximity Mine – Tactical: Stim – Tracker allows you to track enemies and land easy kills on unsuspecting enemies. Battle Hardened helps protect you from players pushing you out of sniping positions, nullifying the effects of any thrown equipment, including Snapshot Grenades. Focus reduces flinch while aiming down sights and extends hold breath duration, an essential for any sniper loadout. High Alert spots enemies out of your view, which will come in handy when focusing all of your attention on positioning and holding angles. A Proximity Mine holds off players from approaching your sniping perch, while the Stim retains its healing properties that players have come to love over the years to get you straight back into a fight. How to unlock the L-AB 330 in Modern Warfare 2 In order to get your hands on this excellent sniper in Modern Warfare 2, youll need to level up the SP-R 208 to Level 16 to unlock the SA-B 50. Once you’ve done that, use the SA-B 50 until it reaches Level 17, and you should unlock the L-AB 330 Reciever after doing this! The concept of Gunsmith’s Receivers has thrown some players for a loop, but its a simple system once you learn the formula. Here’s a quick rundown: Equip the SP-R 208 – Use it until it reaches Level 16 – Now, Equip the SA-B 50 – Play games of Modern Warfare 2 with it until it reaches Level 17 – You can now equip the L-AB 330 Reciever – Alternative to the L-AB 330 Modern Warfare 2 loadout It’s still early days, so Modern Warfare 2’s Sniper Rifle meta will evolve as we learn more about the intricacies of each option. If you want a bulkier alternative that packs more of a punch, the MCPR-300 hits like a truck at the cost of mobility. Now that you have the best L-AB 330 loadout, you can check out some other guides we’ve compiled for Modern Warfare 2: How to use Modern Warfare 2’s Gunsmith: Receivers and Blueprints explained | Modern Warfare 2 new equipment guide: Lethals and Tacticals explained | How to Slide Cancel in Modern Warfare 2| How to unlock Oni Operator & Blueprint in Modern Warfare 2 | All Modern Warfare 2 Killstreaks | What is Modern Warfare 2 Spec Ops mode? | All Modern Warfare 2 perks | All Modern Warfare 2 Field Upgrades

Best KVD Enforcer Warzone loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks The KVD Enforcer has become a solid weapon in Warzone Season 4 Reloaded and this top-tier meta loadout is perfect for getting the most out of it. It’s no secret that the MTZ Interceptor is currently dominating the Warzone meta but the powerful marksman rifle isn’t the category’s only noteworthy weapon. The KVD Enforcer is arguably a great backup, especially after the MTZ Interceptor was nerfed on January 11. It has comparable damage, accuracy, and ease of use making this arguably Warzone’s most underrated weapon. Interesting in trying it out? If so, you’ll want to use this best KVD Enforcer Warzone loadout to make sure you get the most out of this overlooked DMR. Best KVD Enforcer Warzone loadout Muzzle: VT-7 Spiritfire Suppressor – Barrel: KAS-10 584mm Mod Barrel – Optic: Corio Eagleseye 2.5x – Underbarrel: Bruen Heavy Support Grip – Magazine: 20 Round Mag – Unlike the MTZ Interceptor, the KVD Enforcer doesn’t re-center perfectly between shots so it’s important to use recoil-reducing attachments. The best combination to fix this is the VT-7 Spiritfire Suppressor muzzle and KAS-10 584mm Mod Barrel, with the muzzle also suppressing any outgoing fire. This means being able to get off more accurate shots in quicker succession than normal. It’s also worth equipping the Bruen Heavy Support Grip underbarrel which decreases Gun Kick while improving both Idle Sway and Firing Aim Stability. These three attachments partner well with a meta medium to long-range sight like the Corio Eagleseye 2.5x optic letting you make the most of the Enforcer’s impressive range. To round off the build a 20 Round Mag makes sense as this gun’s relatively high fire rate lets you empty its magazine quickly. Its standard 10 rounds will have you reloading too often for Warzone, with each down requiring between three to five shots. KVD Enforcer Warzone Loadout: Perks and Equipment Perk 1: Double Time Increases Tactical Sprint duration and reduces refresh time. – – Perk 2: Focus Reduce flinch when aiming down sights and extend Hold Breath duration. – – Perk 3: Cold-Blooded Undetectable by thermal optics, Tactical Cameras, and Recon Drones. Does not trigger High Alert and Combat Scout. – – Perk 4: Birdseye Your UAV Killstreak, Portable Radar, or UAV Tower shows the heading of the enemy for your squad and detects players using Ghost. – – Lethal: Throwing Knife – Tactical: Smoke Grenade – Double Time is a top-tier choice in any loadout with it improving Tactical Sprint making it easier to get around Urzikstan. For Perk 2, Focus offers more stability when lining up your shots. When under fire, being able to not worry about flinching can do a lot to keep your wits about you. When using just about any precision weapon Cold-Blooded is always worth considering. It cancels out the effects of the enemy’s High Alert leaving them vulnerable. An opening headshot that they weren’t expecting can do a lot to tilt a gunfight in your favor. Perk 4 offers a few interesting options but we like Birdseye with a marksman rifle like the KVD Enforcer. It allows you to know the locations of enemies using certain Perks and Killstreaks to keep themselves off the map. In the lethal equipment slot, a Throwing Knife is a classic choice as it can be thrown quickly to down combatants. Then for tactical a Smoke Grenade provides excellent cover when you need to create some for yourself. How to unlock KVD Enforcer in Warzone The KVD Enforcer is one of the easiest weapons to unlock in Warzone with the marksman rifle being equipable as soon as you reach level 4. Best alternative to KVD Enforcer in Warzone The obvious alternative to the KVD Enforcer is the MTZ Interceptor, but the DM56 is also worth considering with the marksman rifle trading range and damage in favor of superior handling and mobility for more aggressive players. There are plenty of accurate weapons to use in the meta for Warzone Season 4 Reloaded, so check out how to kit out the MORS, Kar98k, and KV Inhibitor.

Best KVD Enforcer MW3 loadout: Class setup, attachments, perks If you are looking to use the KVD Enforcer in MW3 Season 3 then you’re in luck as this is the best loadout to get the most out of this marksman rifle in multiplayer and turn it into a one-shot machine. To get the most out of the KVD Enforcer you’ll want to use this meta loadout. It has been built to bring out the marksman rifle’s strengths as a medium to long-range weapon, maximizing damage range and ease of use. With that said, here is the best KVD Enforcer loadout to use in MW3 multiplayer and rack up plenty of easy kills in the process. Contents Best KVD Enforcer MW3 loadout – KVD Enforcer MW3 loadout: Perks and equipment – How to unlock KVD Enforcer in Modern Warfare 3 – Best alternative to KVD Enforcer in Modern Warfare 3 – Best KVD Enforcer loadout in Modern Warfare 3 Muzzle: Shadowstrike Suppressor – Barrel: KAS-10 584mm Mod Barrel – Optic: Forge Tac Delta 4 – Underbarrel: DR-6 Handstop – Rear Grip: Ivanov ST-70 Grip – The KVD Enforcer is first and foremost a precision weapon so being accurate is a must. To make this easier equip a medium to long-range optic like the Forge Tac Delta 4 which is fantastic as it has a clear reticle that’s easy to use. Equally, the Ivanov ST-70 Grip improves Aiming Idle Sway making it much easier to line up headshots for that instant one-shot kill. With the KVD Enforcer being one of the best long-range weapons in MW3, it’s also a good idea to equip the KAS-10 584mm Mod Barrel. This attachment provides a big boost to damage range and bullet velocity, making the marksman rifle deadly from afar. Due to the high-caliber ammo it shoots, the KVD Enforcer is loud. Enemy players will quickly figure out where you are and take you down making it hard to build momentum. To avoid this and stay hidden for longer periods use the Shadowstrike Suppressor muzzle which also prevents you from showing up on the enemy radar after firing. These four attachments make it easy to line up shots and secure kills but they can leave the KVD Enforcer feeling a little slow in the handling department. To fix this equip the DR-6 Handstop which greatly speeds up both handling and mobility, keeping the DMR feeling snappy. KVD Enforcer MW3 loadout: Perks and equipment Vest: Assassin Vest – Gloves: Marksman Gloves – Boots: Covert Sneakers – Gear: Bone Conduction Headset – Lethal: Proximity Mine – Tactical: Shock Stick – The Assassin Vest lends itself well to the KVD Enforcer as it provides a passive version of Ghost T/V Camo. This not only keeps you from showing you on the other team’s UAVs but also ensures your kills don’t display enemy skulls. This will make it much harder for them to track you down. Given that this loadout uses both the Assassin Vest and a Shadowstrike Suppressor, it also makes sense to use the Covert Sneakers. These meta boots silence your footsteps, making it possible to move around the map without ever being heard. No perk is more beneficial to the KVD Enforcer than Marksman Gloves which reduces idle sway and flinch while scoped in. These make landing headshots much more consistent which is a must with a precision weapon like this. The last perk you’ll want to use is Bone Conduction Headset to make your opponent’s footsteps louder, providing invaluable intel to avoid getting flanked. As for equipment, a Proximity Mine is perfect for catching flankers off guard with a surprise explosion. In the Tactical slot, a Shock Stick is an unusual option that sticks to surfaces and shocks enemies, forcing them to involuntarily empty their magazine. This leaves them vulnerable letting you swoop in for an easy kill. How to unlock KVD Enforcer in Modern Warfare 3 The KVD Enforcer is one of the easiest weapons to unlock in MW3 as it can be used after reaching level 4. For most players, this will only take a game or two at most, but you’ll still need to grind out 30 gun levels to use all of its attachments. Best Alternative to KVD Enforcer in Modern Warfare 3 The best alternative to the KVD Enforcer is the MTZ Interceptor, another powerful marksman rifle that isn’t quite as strong as the KVD Enforcer but has superior handling which makes it more suited to multiplayer’s fast-paced action. Check out these additional MW3 loadout guides on the KVD Enforcer’s main competitors: Best MW3 loadouts | Best MCW 6.8 loadout | Best DM56 loadout | Best Longbow loadout | Best KV Inhibitor loadout

Best KV Inhibitor Warzone loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks Those looking for a solid, semi-auto sniper to use in Warzone Season 4 Reloaded should consider the KV Inhibitor with our recommended loadout equipped that makes downing foes at any range an easy task. The KV Inhibitor is the strongest semi-auto sniper in Call of Duty: Warzone, having been introduced alongside the MW3 integration. This versatile sniper rifle offers great handling, a consistent two-shot kill, and a spectacularly good bullet velocity. These traits make it ideal for long-range sniping on larger maps like Urzikstan. With that said, this is the best KV Inhibitor loadout to use in Warzone Season 4 Reloaded. Best KV Inhibitor Warzone loadout Muzzle: XRK Kraken – Barrel: KAS-10 584mm Mod Barrel – Stock: KV Heavy Padded Stock – Ammunition: .338 Magnum Spire Point Rounds – Rear Grip: Ivanov ST-70 Grip – As with any Warzone sniper maximizing bullet velocity is extremely important as it makes it much easier to consistently land shots. Using the XRK Kraken muzzle and .338 Magnum Spire Point Rounds ammunition gives the KV Inhibitor a spectacular bullet velocity and solid recoil control perfect for Warzone Season 4 Reloaded. This already impressive bullet velocity can be further improved by equipping the KAS-10 584mm Mod Barrel. With all three of these recommended attachments the KV Inhibitor has a bullet velocity of over 1400 m/s, making it feel hitscan even at extreme ranges. It’s best to focus on improving aiming stability to make landing those long-range shots more consistent. Two attachments that are great for this are the KV Heavy Padded Stock and the Ivanov ST-70 Grip rear grip. KV Inhibitor Warzone Loadout: Perks and Equipment Perk 1: Double Time Increases Tactical Sprint duration and reduces refresh time. – – Perk 2: Focus Reduce flinch when aiming down sights and extend Hold Breath duration. – – Perk 3: Cold-Blooded Undetectable by thermal optics, Tactical Cameras, and Recon Drones. Does not trigger High Alert and Combat Scout. – – Perk 4: Birdseye Your UAV Killstreak, Portable Radar, or UAV Tower shows the heading of the enemy for your squad and detects players using Ghost. – – Lethal: Claymore – Tactical: Stun Grenade – Focus is a top-tier Perk with any sniper as it not only increases the duration that you can hold your breath but also massively reduces flinch. Double Time lets you remain mobile by doubling the duration of Tactical Sprint and making it refresh faster. Not equipping Cold-Blooded when using snipers like the KV Inhibitor is a bad idea. It is an extremely useful Perk as it prevents any enemies using High Alert from benefitting from it, letting you line up shots without the worry of them jumping out of the way at a crucial moment. Perk Slot 4 can be tricky to pick just one option from given how stacked it is but you can’t go wrong with Birdseye. This will help you see more enemies on your map no matter if they are using a Perk to hide from Killstreaks. For the lethal equipment slot, a Claymore is great for locking off an entry point, letting you focus on sniping instead of worrying about a potential enemy flank. As for tactical, a Stun Grenade immobilizes foes letting you follow up and land easy headshots for a quick kill. How to unlock KV Inhibitor in Warzone The KV Inhibitor is unlocked through the Armory which can be accessed at Level 25. After gaining access to the Armory, activate the KV Inhibitor and complete two daily challenges. Those wanting to skip the grind can instead extract the sniper rifle in Zombies which will also unlock it. Best alternative to KV Inhibitor in Warzone The Signal 50 acts as a direct competitor to the KV Inhibitor with both being effective semi-auto sniper rifles capable of consistent two-shot downs at any range assuming you land the shots. Sniper rifles have become some of the best weapons in Warzone Season 4 Reloaded, so learn more about the MORS and Kar98k.

Best KV Inhibitor MW3 loadout: Class setup, attachments, perks Gone are the days when only bolt-action snipers delivered consistent one-shot kills. Newer Call of Duty games have equally lethal semi-auto weapons like the KV Inhibitor, and this is the best loadout to get the most out of it in MW3. In Modern Warfare 3, the KV Inhibitor offers a middle ground between the fast-firing but weaker Longbow and the powerful but slow KATT-AMR. This makes it one of the most balanced snipers in MW3 and a good option on most maps. Even so, it can feel somewhat sluggish at times so you’ll need to maximize the KV Inhibitor’s handling to make this sniper rifle competitive in multiplayer. This KV Inhibitor loadout does just that with these attachments and perks making this a weapon that can dominate just about any lobby in MW3 Season 3. Contents Best KV Inhibitor MW3 loadout – Best KV Inhibitor class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the KV Inhibitor in MW3 – Best KV Inhibitor alternative in MW3 – Best KV Inhibitor MW3 loadout Attachments Barrel: Kastovia JEK-40 Barrel – Laser: SL Razorhawk Laser Light – Optic: Forge Tac Delta 4 – Stock: Ivanov Wood Stock – Ammunition: .338 Magnum High Grain Rounds – To help the KV Inhibitor keep up with MW3’s fast-paced gameplay it’s best to build it for handling and mobility. The SL Razorhawk Laser Light is perfect for this with the laser attachment being a superior version of the once-meta FFS OLE-V Laser. The Kastovia JEK-40 Barrel and Ivanov Wood Stock provide a further boost to ADS Speed while also enhancing mobility, both ideal for 6v6. As a bonus, they also give the KV Inhibitor a trendy wooden appearance acting as a throwback to the iconic Dragunov of past Call of Duty games. Looking to improve ADS even further and make the KV Inhibitor as snappy as possible, switching out its default optic for the Forge Tac Delta 4 is a good idea. This optic speeds up ADS significantly and its lower zoom is more suited to multiplayer where enemies will often get up close and personal. To round off the build equip the .338 Magnum High Grain Rounds. This ammunition enhances both Bullet Velocity and Damage Range making the KV Inhibitor more forgiving at long range which is huge on a sniper rifle like this. Best KV Inhibitor class: Perks & equipment Vest: Overkill Vest Increases Tactical Sprint duration and reduces refresh time. – – Gloves: Marksman Gloves Reduced sway and flinch while ADS. – – Boots: Lightweight Boots Increases movement and swim speed. Reduces noise while swimming. – – Gear: Bone Conduction Headset Reduces player combat and environmental sounds to allow improved focus on hearing other footsteps. – – Lethal: Proximity Mine Proximity-triggered explosive that launches in the air, and deals heavy damage to the surrounding area. – – Tactical: Flash Grenade Blinds and deafens targets. – – The Overkill Vest is an excellent option on the KV Inhibitor as it gives you a second primary weapon to cover up the sniper rifle’s shortcomings. This is best used on an SMG or mobile AR like the WSP Swarm or BP50 which can used up close in situations where a sniper isn’t suitable. For the gloves slot, the Marksman Gloves are great as they decrease Idle Sway and ADS flinch which benefits sniping a lot. Similarly, the Lightweight Boots increase movement speed making it easier to reposition quickly and take power positions where MW3 snipers like the KV Inhibitor excel. For the lone gear slot, it’s use the Bone Conduction Headset. When equipped this makes identifying enemy footsteps and gunshots easier giving you increased situational awareness, letting you snipe in peace. While it won’t prove popular in your lobbies, a Proximity Mine is a phenomenal option for shutting down flanks and punishing enemies who are running around aimlessly. Finally, a Flash Grenade is a reliable tactical that lets you blind foes and pick them off with ease. How to unlock the KV Inhibitor in Modern Warfare 3 The KV Inhibitor can be unlocked through The Armory from Level 25 onward by activating the KV Inhibitor on the Armory Unlocks tab and then either completing 3 Daily Challenges or winning 3 matches. Best KV Inhibitor alternative in Modern Warfare 3 Added in MW3 Season 3, the MORS is a fantastic sniper rifle that fires very quickly for a bolt action and has a much more forgiving one-shot kill than the KV Inhibitor. Check out these other MW3 loadouts for more alternatives to the KV Inhibitor: Best MW3 Loadouts | Best Warzone One-Shot Sniper Rifles | XRK Stalker loadout | MTZ Interceptor loadout | KVD Enforcer loadout

Best KV Broadside Warzone 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments & perks ActivisionShotguns have seen more use in Season 4 after they received a class-wide buff. One shotgun to benefit from these changes was the KV Broadside, which remains one of the strongest close-range weapons. This is the best KV Broadside loadout to use in Warzone 2. The Season 4 update saw the KV Broadside receive a buff after the way in which shotgun damage is calculated was changed. As long as you land at least four pellets shotguns are now much more consistent making it possible to secure two or three shot kills every time. The KV Broadside didn’t receive buffs elsewhere but it was already the strongest shotgun in Warzone 2. An extra bump to its consistency only further solidifies that status making this a truly dominant close-range weapon. To push this weapon to the limits you’ll need a KV Broadside loadout for Warzone 2, and luckily we’ve got you covered. Contents Best KV Broadside Warzone 2 loadout – Best KV Broadside Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the KV Broadside in Warzone 2 – Best KV Broadside alternatives in Warzone 2 – Best KV Broadside Warzone 2 loadout Attachments Muzzle: Bryson Choke (+0.07, +0.10) – Laser: 7mW Canted Laser (-0.29, -14.81) – Ammunition: 12 Gauge Slug (+0.56, -3.19) – Magazine: 12 Shell Mag – Bolt: Dashbolt 60 – Even by the standards of Warzone 2 shotguns, this is an unusual build. Even so, assuming you can get to grips with how it handles this is the most effective way to run the KV Broadside as it provides it with great consistency and fantastic range. The 12 Gauge Slug is the key attachment here converting the Broadside’s Buckshot to Slugs. This drastically increases its range at the cost of only being effective when aimed in. With Slug rounds, the KV Broadside can hold its own even at mid-range although it obviously excels up close. Another surprise attachment is the 7mW Canted Laser. This is preferred over the regular lasers due to the Broadside’s exorbitant visual recoil. The Canted Laser makes dealing with that recoil much easier allowing for spam fire and the best TTK possible. The 12 Shell Mag offers a nice balance of magazine capacity and weapon handling while the Dashbolt 60 is a given on any semi-auto shotgun as it increases fire rate. Finally, the Bryson Choke makes slugs more accurate helping them remain effective from further away. Best KV Broadside Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment Base Perk 1: Overkill – Base Perk 2: Double Time – Bonus Perk: Spotter – Ultimate Perk: High Alert – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical Equipment: Stun Grenade – In terms of perks, we suggest running Overkill in the first slot as having access to an AR or LMG will help cover the Broadside’s obvious weaknesses. This pairs well with Double Time which lets you run around faster and get up close and personal with enemies. Since you’ll be running around so much it makes sense to use Spotter. This highlights enemy equipment to make sure you don’t end up accidentally sprinting into a well-placed Proximity Mine or Claymore. For Ultimate Perk, High Alert is the best choice as usual as it provides intel when moving around as enemies that aim at you will be given away. It’s always worth using on any weapon that benefits from playing aggressively. Finally, round off the setup with a Semtex for flushing enemies out of cover and a Stun Grenade to surprise opponents before a push. How to unlock the KV Broadside in Warzone 2 The KV Broadside can be unlocked by completing the following challenge: Get 50 one-shot kills with Shotguns. This can be done in multiplayer, DMZ, or Warzone 2 using any shotgun. Previously, the shotgun was unlocked by completing Sector B4 of the Season 2 Battle Pass, but this was changed once the season ended. Best KV Broadside alternatives in Warzone 2 If the KV Broadside doesn’t fit your playstyle, consider checking out the Lockwood 300 which is also able to secure two-shot kills at a good range. Kitted out with solid damage output and strong mobility, it’s perfect for players who love diving into the action with no second thoughts. That’s all for our KV Broadside loadout! For more of our Warzone 2 coverage, check out these guides below: Do Warzone skins carry over to Warzone 2? | What are Strongholds in Warzone 2? | All Warzone 2 vehicles and Gas Stations | Does Warzone 2 have SBMM? | How do Warzone 2 circles work?

Best KV Broadside Modern Warfare 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments & perks ActivisonThe KV Broadside is a 12 gauge shotgun in Modern Warfare 2 that stands as the fastest-firing semi-auto firearm in its category, but you’ll need a top-tier loadout to maximize its power. Modern Warfare 2’s Season 2 patch is well underway and the update has introduced a huge amount of new content to the game. While the Dual Kodachis and the ISO Hemlock AR are brilliant new additions, it’s the KV Broadside that’s getting a lot of attention thanks to the shotgun’s overwhelming firepower. Although the gun isn’t suited to the mid to long-range gunfights of Warzone 2, it thrives in MW2 multiplayer where close-quarters skirmishes happen frequently. Despite this, it’s key you run the meta KV Broadside loadout in Modern Warfare 2, or you risk wasting a lot of the weapon’s deadly potential. Contents Best KV Broadside Modern Warfare 2 loadout – Best KV Broadside Modern Warfare 2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the KV Broadside in Modern Warfare 2 – Best KV Broadside alternatives in Modern Warfare 2 – Best KV Broadside Modern Warfare 2 loadout Attachments Muzzle: SA MX-50 – Laser: Point-G3P 04 – Underbarrel: Merc Foregrip – Magazine: 25 Shell Drum – Bolt: Dashbolt 60 – For starters, make sure to equip the SA MX-50 muzzle for increased bullet velocity, damage range, and recoil smoothness. Follow this up with the Dashbolt 60, which increases the semi-automatic shotgun’s fire rate, making it even more potent at close-range. Next, utilize the Merc Foregrip underbarrel to enhance your hip-fire accuracy, control, and overall recoil stabilization. This in combination with Point-G3P 04 laser ensures your hip-fire is top tier, and the laser even adds improved mobility. Finally, round off the loadout with the 25 Shell Drum to ensure you never run out of ammo and can take out multiple opponents without reloading. Best KV Broadside Modern Warfare 2 class: Perks & equipment Base Perk 1: Overkill – Base Perk 2: Battle Hardened – Bonus Perk: Fast Hands – Ultimate Perk: High Alert – Lethal: Flash Grenade – Tactical: Stim – In terms of perks, we suggest running Overkill in the first slot, as having access to a meta mid to long-range weapon is vital. We recommend using the RPK, TAQ-56, or the ISO Hemlock. Next, make sure to run Battle Hardened so you’re more resistant to tactical and Fast Hands so you can reload quicker, and switch to secondary almost instantly. Finally, High Alert is top-tier as it ensures you always know when an enemy has you in their sights. Round off the loadout with Flash Grenade aggressive pushes and a Stim for an extra boost of health when needed. How to unlock the KV Broadside in Modern Warfare 2 If you’re looking to unlock the KV Broadside in Modern Warfare 2, there are no challenges to complete. Instead, you just have to progress the Season 2 Battle Pass. The weapon can be found in Sector B4 so just keep playing matches and eventually, you’ll unlock this powerful shotgun. Best KV Broadside alternatives in Modern Warfare 2 If the KV Broadside just doesn’t fit your playstyle, consider testing out the Lockwood 300, another deadly shotgun in MW2. This gun has the raw firepower to wipe out enemies with ease at close-range, and plenty of mobility to maneuver around the map. Of course, if you want to get the most out of the Lockwood 300 in MW2, you’ll need a dedicated guide and luckily, we’ve got you covered. Now that you have the best KV Broadside loadout in Modern Warfare 2, you can check out some of our other handy MW2 guides: How to use Modern Warfare 2’s Gunsmith: Receivers and Blueprints explained | Modern Warfare 2 new equipment guide: Lethals and Tacticals explained | How to unlock MP5 SMG loadout in Modern Warfare 2 | How to Slide Cancel in Modern Warfare 2 | How to unlock Oni Operator & Blueprint in Modern Warfare 2 | All Modern Warfare 2 Killstreaks | What is Modern Warfare 2 Spec Ops mode? | All Modern Warfare 2 perks | All Modern Warfare 2 Field Upgrades

Best KSP 45 loadout for Call of Duty: Black Ops Cold War Activision / TreyarchBlack Ops Cold War is certainly no stranger to burst fire weapons, particularly those of the assault rifle kind. However, there is also one SMG that shares this firing pattern. Here are all the attachments you should be using to unleash the KSP 45’s full potential. The KSP 45 may not be your go-to SMG in Black Ops Cold War, especially when the likes of the MP5 and MAC-10 dominate the category. However, despite being a three-round burst weapon, the KSP 45 offers great damage and decent range. Only one burst is needed to drop an enemy in close-quarters engagements, while two are needed at mid-range. This deadly gun blends both AR and SMG playstyle together, making it a great choice for those that want to remain competitive across all distances. In order to help you get the most out of the KSP 45 in Black Ops Cold War, we’ve created a loadout that will help you secure more kills in no time. Best KSP 45 loadout in Black Ops Cold War Here’s how you need to kit out your KS5 45 SMG to dish out the most damage across all ranges. Attachments Barrel: 10.5 Reinforced Heavy – Body: SWAT 5MW Laser Sight – Underbarrel: Front Grip – Magazine: 42 RND – Stock: Tactical Stock – Secondary 1911 – Throwables Stimshot – Semtex – Field Mic – Perks Perk 1: Flak Jacket + Tactical Mask – Perk 2: Assassin + Scavenger – Perk 3: Ninja + Ghost – Wildcard Perk Greed – Whether you prefer to seek out close-quarter firefights or take down foes in mid-range engagements with deadly precision, then this KSP 45 loadout will enable you to do just that. The 10.5 Reinforced Heavy increases the SMG’s effectiveness at range and bolsters its bullet velocity. Combine this with the horizontal recoil control from the Front Grip and you have an extremely accurate SMG. While the KSP 45 will still struggle to outgun the game’s meta assault rifles, you’ll at least have a fighting chance. After all, being able to take down mid-range targets in just two bursts is hardly anything to scoff at. Meanwhile, the SWAT 5MW Laser Sight improves the gun’s hip-fire accuracy. Mobility and ADS speed remains a big part of Black Ops Cold War, especially when you’re playing on maps like Nuketwon ‘84. After all, being able to accurately kill any targets without ever looking down your gun’s sights is always going to be a bonus. The 42 RND mags ensure you have plenty of ammo when it comes to snagging those game-winning multi-kills. Lastly, the Tactical Stock increases aim walking movement speed, enabling you to keep on your toes and quickly sweep those corners. This loadout uses Perk Greed, which allows players to take six perks. The combination of Flak Jacket and Tactical Mask will keep you safe from any explosives and noxious gas. These perks are important for most loadouts, but especially hyper-aggressive ones that prefer the run and gun approach to combat. Assassin enables you to shut down any enemies that are currently on killstreaks, while Scavenger keeps your ammunition reserves healthy. Lastly, Ghost and Ninja keep you hidden from pesky enemy spy planes and silences your footsteps. In terms of equipment, we’ve chosen the standard Stimshot, Semtex, and Field Mic items. Having the healing from Stimshot will keep you fighting, while the Field Mic allows you to pick up on any enemy movements. So there you have it, an extremely deadly and versatile KSP 45 loadout. If you want to keep updated with all the latest Call of Duty news and updates, then follow us over on @DexertoIntel

Best KRM 262 shotgun loadout for Call of Duty: Mobile ActivisionThe KRM 262 is one of Call of Duty: Mobile’s most powerful weapons, but what is the best set-up and class for it? Well, there are a few tips and tricks to use ahead of Season 10. With Call of Duty Mobile Season 9, Conquest, quickly drawing to a close, fans of the extremely popular mobile game are gearing up for Season 10 and everything that will be in store for them there. The developers have already revealed that Modern Warfare’s Pine Gunfight map will be joining the map pool, as will the classic Headquarters game mode, but they haven’t yet confirmed what the new weapon will be. With all signs pointing towards a shotgun, the current crop could be for some changes, but there are still some incredibly powerful shotguns – most notably, the KRM 262. Best KRM 262 class for CoD Mobile The popular shotgun, which stems from Call of Duty Black Ops 3 has been in CoD Mobile since Season 3 and is arguably the standout of the close-quarters weapons. You can easily one-pump an enemy with the shotgun without making any tweaks, but if you truly want to run riot, throw on some attachments like the Extended Barrel and MIP Laser 5mW. These will keep things nice and steady. As for everything else, you can mess about with stocks and grips, but its easier to eye up a perk and muzzle. Specifically, take a look at Sleight of Hand and the Choke. Muzzle: Choke – Laser: MIP Laser 5mW – Barrel: Extended Barrel – Perk: Sleight of Hand – Obviously, only taking four attachments does leave an empty gap, and you can experiment with sights or something else, but that’s the best set up if you want to up close and personal while also being extremely accurate. To round out your class, you’ll need perks and it’s hard to go wrong with the classic line up of Lightweight, Toughness, and Dead Silence.

Best Krig 6 Warzone class loadout: Attachments, setup, perks ActivisionAfter Warzone’s integration with Black Ops Cold War, the Krig 6 became immensely popular. However, due to nerfs, it has lost some favor among many Warzone players even though it can still be an effective assault rile in-game. With that said, let’s check out the best Krig 6 loadout in Season 2 Reloaded. The Krig 6 has always been an effective Assault Rifle in Warzone and despite receiving a set of nerfs, it remains a reliable choice on Caldera and Rebirth Island. This Cold War AR comes packed with a solid rate of fire, incredible accuracy, and great damage range. While the Krig may no longer be one of the top assault rifle picks among streamers and pros, it is still a decent choice for those looking to consistently pick up kills across Caldera. Without further ado, here’s the best Krig 6 loadout you can use. Contents Best Krig 6 Warzone loadout – Best Krig 6 setup (perks & equipment) – How to unlock the Krig 6 in Warzone – Alternative Krig 6 loadout – Best Krig 6 build for Warzone Attachments Muzzle: Agency Suppressor – Barrel: 19.7″ Takedown – Optic: Axial Arms 3x – Underbarrel: Field Agent Grip – Magazine: Salvo 60 Rnd Fast Mag – There are some attachments that you need on an Assault Rifle when going into Warzone. For starters, you’ll want to equip the Agency Suppressor. The muzzle increases everything from the Krig’s bullet velocity, sound suppression, and damage range. This is a must-use attachment for the weapon as it makes the Krig even more deadly at medium to long-range distances, allowing you to effortlessly claim those cross-map kills. Next, for the barrel, you’ll want to use the 19.7″ Takedown barrel to maximize the gun’s damage range and opt for the Salvo 60 Rnd Fast Mag. Not only will this give you plenty of bullets, but it will also make taking multiple foes down that much easier. Finally, finish off the class with the Field Agent Foregrip for maximum recoil control and the Axial Arms 3x for a scope that can track targets with ease. Best Krig 6 setup (Perks & equipment) Perk 1: E.O.D. – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Secondary: MP40 – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Heartbeat Sensor – Just like most Warzone loadouts, our Krig class utilizes EOD, Overkill, and Amped. Not only does EOD help keep you safe from any explosives, but Amped enables you to quickly cycle weapons when you need to switch to your secondary. Meanwhile, the Overkill perk enables the use of the extremely deadly MP40, which still remains the best SMG in Warzone Season 2 Reloaded. Lastly, both the Semtex and Heartbeat Sensor help track down nearby enemies and flush out camping players. How to unlock the Krig 6 in Warzone The Krig 6 is unlocked by reaching rank 16 in either Warzone or Black Ops Cold War. This means it will only take a couple of hours of grinding before you can begin using it in Warzone. Alternative Krig 6 loadout If you’re not enjoying the Krig, you could try out our Cold War AK-47 loadout. This assault rifle will pack a real punch across Caldera, especially when you kit them out with the right attachments. Read More: Dr Disrespect impressed by Warzone’s new map – The EM2 is also a great choice for any players that miss the Modern Warfare weapon meta. This AR is ideal for players who like to aggressively rush down their foes, while also remaining accurate in mid-range engagements. Let us know what you think of this Krig 6 loadout by tweeting us at @DexertoIntel! Also, make sure you check out our other Warzone guides to get a competitive edge in Season 2 Reloaded: Best streamer loadouts | Most popular Warzone weapons| Best Assault Rifles | All Warzone bunker codes | Best Kar98k Warzone loadout | Best Stoner 63 Warzone loadout | Top 20 highest earning players

Best Krig 6 loadout for Call of Duty: Black Ops Cold War Activision / TreyarchThe Krig 6 is the perfect weapon for any player looking for an assault rifle with incredible accuracy and minimal recoil that’s great at taking down players at range. Here are the exact steps you need to take to create the best Krig 6 loadout in Black Ops Cold War. This deadly assault rifle delivers excellent precision and deals great damage across all ranges, making it one of the most viable assault rifles in Cold War. This full-auto AR boasts excellent weapon control and quick reloads, while its methodical fire rate helps minimize recoil and keeps your shots accurate. It may not deal as much damage as the game’s AK-74, but its excellent accuracy more than makes up for that. The Krig 6’s minimal recoil also allows it to excel across Black Ops Cold War’s larger-scale maps and modes. In order to help you get the most out of the Krig 6, we’ve put together a loadout that you can use to crush the competition. Best Krig 6 loadout Here’s exactly what attachments, perks, and equipment you’ll need to equip to create this deadly Kirg 6 loadout. Attachments: Quickdot LED – Infantry Compensator – 19.7” Ranger – SOF Target Designator – Field Agent Foregrip – 40 RND – Airborne Elastic Wrap – Raider Stock – Perk: Flak Jacket – Scavenger – Ghost – Equipment: Lethal: Grenade – Tactical: Stimshot – Field Upgrade: Field Mic – By picking the Gunfighter wildcard, you can equip a total of eight attachments which gives you a great deal of flexibility when it comes to building the perfect loadout. The Quickdot LED provides the Krig 6 with a clean sight that doesn’t clutter the screen, allowing you to easily spot enemies at a distance. Combine this with the 60% reveal distance from the SOF Target Designator and you’ll be able to snap onto the most well-hidden foes. After all, visibility remains a big problem in Black Ops Cold War, so having any attachments that help improve this is huge. Next up is the Infantry Compensator and Field Agent Foregrip which diminish horizontal recoil by 20%, this makes the Krig 6 incredibly accurate. In fact, the recoil on this setup is so minimal that it effectively allows you to beam opponents across all distances. Bullet Velocity is also incredibly important in Black Ops Cold War and it is often the reason why the hit detection of certain weapons can feel a little off. After all, being able to quickly drop your foe before they can even react is always going to be beneficial, so the 19.7” Ranger is a must. Another top pick is the Airborne Elastic Wrap. This incredible attachment increases the Krig 6’s aim down sight time, gives you 90% Flinch Resistance, and allows you to aim while going prone. ADS speed is just as important in Black Ops Cold War as it was in Modern Warfare, particularly for any AR loadouts that want to be competitive against the game’s SMGs. Meanwhile, the added 90% Flinch Resistance also keeps your shots accurate even when you take damage. This will often enable you to counter your attackers with high precision shots. The Raider Stock also increases the AR’s Sprint to Fire time and Aim Walking Speed, giving you a great reactionary playstyle that can quickly melt foes in close-quarter firefights. While the 50 RND mag attachment offers a great deal of firepower, its reduction in ADS time makes it less optimal for standard multiplayer. As a result, the 40 RND variant has been used instead. The Krig 6 is capable of melting through multiple foes in a few bullets, so the 40 RND mag is more than enough. If you want to keep updated with all the latest Call of Duty news and updates, then follow us over on @DexertoIntel.

Best Kilo Bolt-Action loadout for Call of Duty: Mobile ActivisionThe Kilo Bolt-Action is Call of Duty: Mobile’s newest weapon, but what is the best set-up and class for it? Well, there are a few tips and tricks to use off the bat. With the start of Call of Duty: Mobile Season 9, there’s a new map and weapon to master in the form of Shipment 1944 and the Kilo Bolt-Action. The new weapon, which is just the Kar98K with a new name, is the first Marksman Rifle to make its way into CoD Mobile. It’s different from a traditional sniper given that it doesn’t have a huge barrel, scope, and isn’t all that lethal at long range. If you want to get your hands on the new weapon type, you will have to hit level 21 in the free battle pass. Once you get there, you’ll need a strong loadout. So, we’ve got you covered on that front. Best Kilo-Bolt Action setup in CoD Mobile The majority of players who use the Kilo Bolt-Action, will want to get up close and personal with their enemies given that the weapon is deadly in the medium to short ranges. If that’s your playstyle, you’re fine enough to not really tweak the weapon, but, it could do with a bit of a range increase otherwise. This will help you not get punished in close-quarters by something with a faster fire rate. Therefore, you’ll need to look at attachments like an extended barrel and an optic to increase the range off the bat. After that, stopping power rounds might slow you do but they’re a help too. Ammunition: OWC Stopping Power – Barrel: MIP Extended Light Barrel – Laser: OWC Laser – Tactical – Optic: 4x Tactical Scope – Perk: Long Shot – Kilo Bolt-Action Lazarus blueprint gameplay Obviously, you’ll need to grind through games to get your hands on these attachments, but if you manage to grind your battle pass all the way to the end, you will get the Lazarus blueprint. This, as CoD Mobile YouTuber Ferg shows, is pretty deadly in its current state. In fact, the YouTuber was even able to pick up a Nuke thanks to its increased power. Though, as noted, you will need to hit level 50 on the Premium Battle Pass. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_sODDL-BWJA Aside from giving your weapon a boost, you will need the perks to really create the best class possible. As usual, Lightweight, Toughness, and Dead Silence are top-notch picks. For the full customization experience, once you’ve got some games under your belt, you can use the new Gunsmith feature to make the Marksmen Rifle your own.

Best Kilo 141 Warzone class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Setup ActivisionThe Kilo 141 is one of Warzone Season 4 Reloaded’s most reliable Assault Rifles and we’ve assembled the strongest Kilo 141 loadout you should be using to increase your kill potential in Caldera, Rebirth, and Fortune’s Keep. The Warzone Season 4 Reloaded update is now fully underway and many players are looking for the best weapons to take into the battle royale’s various maps and modes to achieve dominant victories. As part of the new raft of buffs and nerfs, the Kilo is completely reborn and fans of the game have been thoroughly embracing its place back in the meta. To make the attachment choices simpler for you, we’ve chosen the best Kilo 141 loadout that you can use to dominate the competition. From the ideal attachments to the strongest perks — here’s what you need to build the optimal Kilo 141 class in Warzone. Contents Best Kilo 141 Warzone loadout – Best Kilo 141 setup (Perks & equipment) – How to unlock the Kilo 141 in Warzone – Alternatives to Kilo 141 Warzone loadout – Best Kilo loadout Warzone Attachments Muzzle: Monolithic Suppressor – Barrel: Singuard Arms 19.8” Prowler – Optic: VLK 3.0X Optic – Underbarrel: Commando Foregrip – Ammunition: 60 Round Mags – Just like the majority of Modern Warfare’s Assault Rifles, the Monolithic Suppressor, Singuard Arms 19.8″ Prowler barrel, and Commando Foregrip have been utilized. All of these attachments help boost the Kilo’s ability to decimate enemies at range. With an added 52.5% range, along with 60% bullet velocity, your shots will be connecting with the target in an instant. Meanwhile, the VLK 3.0x Optic gives the Kilo the perfect precision it needs to deliver those all-important head and body shots. Whether you prefer close-range engagements or mid-range firefights, this 3x scope provides the best for both playstyles. Finally, the 60 Round Mags give you the ability to take down multiple enemies at once, without slowing the weapon down as heavily as the 100-round drum – it’s the perfect balance. You’ll notice that this class is without a stock or a rear grip. If you want the former for mobility’s sake, you might prefer running an XM4 or Cooper Carbine. As for the rear grip, the Kilo’s recoil control is already minimal enough to warrant a slightly steeper learning curve, especially for the advantages that the 60-Round Mag and 3.0x Optic grant you. Best Kilo 141 Warzone setup (Perks & Equipment) Perk 1: EOD – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Secondary: MP40 – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Stim – Just like most meta AR Warzone loadouts, the Kilo 141 uses EOD, Amped, and Overkill. Not only do these Perks keep you safe from any explosives, but they also enable you to quickly swap weapons – an area that is incredibly important when snagging those clutch kills. Meanwhile, Overkill enables you to run a faster, close-range gun to complement the power of a more-suited, longer-range AR. We think the MP40 is the perfect fodder for the Kilo 141 and can tear enemies apart in a flash once you switch weapons. In terms of equipment, there’s nothing better than Semtex and Stims. The former lets you time a perfect explosion, while the latter has dominated Caldera thanks to its huge movement speed boost and healing properties. How to unlock the Kilo 141 in Warzone The Kilo 141 is unlocked alongside custom loadouts at Player Rank 4, which means most players will likely have this AR available to use in their first few matches. This means you won’t have to grind a specific challenge or level up the Battle Pass, which is great for those that just wish to focus on game-winning plays and attaining a Warzone Victory. Alternatives to the Kilo 141 Warzone loadout While the Kilo 141 may still be a great choice for those that enjoy mid to long-range firefights, this reliable Assault Rifle is one of many popular picks. Another that’s well worth checking out is the STG44. Whether you’re looking to melt squads in close-quarter firefights or deliver huge amounts of damage, then you really can’t go wrong with the STG44. If you want to use one of the best ARs in Warzone, then be sure to check out our STG44 loadout. Looking for more of the best Warzone loadouts and tips? Check out our list of guides below: C58 | Grau 5.56 | | Krig 6 | CR-56 AMAX | FFAR 1 | Mac 10 | MP5 | Kar98k | HDR | Best controller settings | Top 10 best class setups and loadouts | Best streamer loadouts | Most popular Warzone weapons| Best Sniper Rifles | All Warzone bunker codes | MAC-10 loadout | FFAR Warzone class | Top 20 highest-earning players | Best Warzone Weapons | Bren Loadout | Cooper Carbine Loadout

Best KG M40 Warzone loadout: Class setup, Attachments, Perks ActivisionThe KG M40 has emerged as a meta Assault Rifle in Warzone Season 4 after first being introduced in Season 2. Here are the attachments you should be using to become unstoppable with the best KG M40 Warzone loadout. The Assault Rifle meta is one of the most hotly contested in Warzone, and players have no shortage of great options. Season 2 introduced the KG M40 which, after a shaky start, was later buffed in Season 4 to make it into one of the game’s easiest weapons to use, and now Season 4 Reloaded’s buffs and nerfs have made it even more desirable. Thanks to the AR’s big damage and solid fire rate, the KG M40 can now go toe-to-toe with the Cooper Carbine and NZ-41 as one of Warzone’s best Assault Rifles. But whether you’re just experimenting, or looking for a new go-to weapon, you’re going to need the very best attachments for your setup. Here’s our best Warzone KG M40 loadout. Contents Best KG M40 Warzone loadout – Best KG M40 Warzone class – How to unlock the KG M40 in Warzone – Best KG M40 alternatives in Warzone – Best KGM40 loadout for Warzone Muzzle: MX Silencer – Barrel: Reisdorf 720mm Shrouded – Optic: SVT-40 PU Scope 3-6x – Stock: Krausnick 12V – Underbarrel: M1930 Strife Angled – Magazine: 8mm Klauser 60 Round Drums – Ammo Type: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Polymer Grip – Proficiency: Tight Grip – Kit: Fully Loaded – As the KG M40 already deals a lot of damage compared to other weapons in its class, our loadout is geared around keeping some of its pesky recoil in check. Both the MX Silencer and Reisdorf 720mm Shrouded Barrel greatly improve accuracy and stability at the expense of some mobility. The Krausnick 12V Stock and M1930 Strife Angled Underbarrel, and Polymer Grip also boost accuracy and horizontal recoil control significantly, allowing you to land your shots at a distance and make the gun an absolute menace in longer-range fights – a must for Caldera. Ammo-wise, we’ve gone for the 8mm Klauser 60 Round Drums. They offer a boost to the KG M40’s already devasting damage, and the extra capacity helps players stay in the fight for longer without running dry. Bullet velocity is still key in the game, so loading up your clips with Lengthened Rounds will give you the edge at the beginning of every fight. Meanwhile, the Tight Grip Proficiency offers yet another boost in accuracy, making the KG M40 an absolute laser. Fully Loaded is a no-brainer as it means you can focus on racking up kills rather than scavenging for ammo. Finally, optics are down to personal preference, but we think the extra zoom of the SVT-40 PU Scope 3-6x will prove useful and allow the KG M40 with the best weapons in its class. Best KG M40 Warzone class Perk 1: E.O.D. – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Stim – When considering which Perks to use with our KG M40 Warzone loadout, it’s safest to stick to the established setup. E.O.D to protect you from rogue explosives, and Overkill so you can bring along another weapon like an SMG or Shotgun like the Gallo. If you do run out of ammo or get dragged into a close-quarters battle, Amped will let you switch to your secondary quicker, meaning if the nature of your fight changes, your tool for the job can too in the heat of the moment. We recommend running the Marco 5 or the H4 Blixen alongside the KG M40, as both guns absolutely melt enemies in the current meta. Finally, make sure to add the Semtex as your lethal and Stims for a health top-up when you’re in a sticky situation. How to unlock the KG M40 in Warzone To unlock the KG M40, you must earn three double kill medals with an Assault Rifle in a single match 15 times. Since the Season 2 Battle Pass has expired, the only way to grab the gun is by completing this challenge. It’s a bit of a pain, but we recommend heading into Vanguard multiplayer on a mode like Domination or Team Deathmatch. This will be far easier than trying to pull off stacks of double kills in Caldera. If you don’t have access to Vanguard, then Rebirth Island or Fortune’s Keep are your best bet. Best KG M40 alternatives in Warzone If the KG M40 isn’t quite cutting it for you, then some other guns might feel better in your hands such as the Armaguerra or XM4 are solid bets at the moment. If you’re looking to move away from Assault Rifles, then we recommend the Marco 5. The SMG comes with plenty of mobility and a ridiculous fire rate, perfect for players who want to rush around any CoD Warzone Season 4 map. That was our best KG M40 Warzone loadout. If you’re craving more of the latest Warzone and Vanguard guides, then be sure to check out our other loadouts: Best Warzone Bren loadout | Best MP40 Warzone loadout | Best OTs Warzone loadout | Best STG44 Vanguard loadout | Best M1928 Vanguard loadout | Best STEN Warzone loadout

Best KG M40 CoD Vanguard class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Proficiency, Setup ActivisionThe KG M40 is a brand new weapon for CoD Vanguard Season 2, and it has all the makings of another top-tier Assualt Rifle. Here are the very best Attachments and Perks you should use in your multiplayer loadout. Vanguard Season 2 dropped with a fresh Battle Pass stuffed full of goodies for players to unlock. The standouts, however, were the brand new Whitley LMG along with the KG M40 Assault Rifle. The latter has players particularly excited, as it’s a new addition to the already competitive lineup of Assault Rifles in Vanguard. And thanks to its great accuracy and solid firepower, the KG M40 has the potential to become a new favorite in the community. Here are all of the Attachments and Perks you need to make your KG M40 the cream of the crop. Contents Best KG M40 Vanguard loadout – Best KG M40 Vangaurd class – How to unlock KG M40 in Vanguard – KG M40 alternatives – Best KG M40 Vanguard loadout Muzzle: F8 Stabilizer – Barrel: Krausnick 700mm 01V – Optic: Slate Reflector – Stock: Krausnick 12V – Underbarrel: Mark VI Skeletal – Magazine: .30-06 50 Round Drums – Ammo Type: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Stippled Grip – Proficiency: Tight Grip – Kit: Fully Loaded – By default, the KG M40 is extremely big and heavy, similar to an LMG, but this is almost impossible to totally fix with Attachments. With this in mind, our build is concentrating on boosting accuracy even more and making the weapon pack a heavier punch. Both the F8 Stabilizer and Krausnick 700mm 01V significantly buff how precise the KG M40 is with its shots, curbing a lot of the recoil and bloom. This will be extremely useful, especially on some of Vanguard’s more open and expansive maps like Demyansk. Optics-wise, we’ve kept things simple with the Slate Reflector, although you could easily swap this for whichever slight works for you. Next, we opted for the Krausnick 12V Stock, further buffing accuracy and control, but at the expense of some ADS speed. Luckily, we can negate this by equipping the Mark VI Skeletal in the Underbarrel slot. When it comes to Magazines, .30-06 50 Round Drums are the clear winner as they buff damage, range, and bullet velocity, making it a monster in mid-range encounters. We’ve loaded the mags with Lengenthed rounds, again to make your shots really travel when picking off enemies at the end of long corridors. Landing those first few shots can be the difference between life and death in multiplayer, so the Stippled Grip’s initial accuracy boost is a must. This is complemented nicely by the Tight Grip Proficiency, making your gun more accurate the longer you squeeze the trigger. Finally, Fully Loaded allows you to start with full ammo, so you don’t have to worry about running dry on your way to a big killstreak. Best KG M40 Vanguard class Perk 1: Ghost – Perk 2: Forward Intel – Perk 3: Lightweight – Lethal Equipment: Sticky Bomb – Tactical Equipment: Stun Grenade – Field Upgrade: Dead Silence – Ghost is a vital Perk in Vanguard’s multiplayer, and there’s no reason to abandon it here. Whether you’re holding a lane or darting across the map, the ability to remain hidden from UAVs and get the drop on enemies is beyond useful. If you’re not sure where to set up shop, the Forward Intel Perk will let you see where the opposing team is spawning, so you can plan accordingly. Then Lightweight will help tackle the KG M40’s bulky size by increasing movement speed. When it comes to Equipment, the choice is largely down to what you prefer. But we think the Sticky Bomb is an effective and easy lethal to use, while the Stun Grenade can come in clutch when infiltrating a position held by the other team. For the Field Upgrade, Dead Silence is perfect for sneaking up on unsuspecting players, rendering their Spy Planes and Field Mics temporarily useless. How to unlock the KG M40 in Vanguard If this loadout sounds like it’s up your street, all you have to do is reach Tier 15 of the Vanguard and Warzone Season 2 Battle Pass. Luckily, this is one of the many free tiers, so there’s no need to put your hand in your pocket to unlock this new Assault Rifle. Alternatives to KG M40 Vanguard loadout If you want something similar to the KG M40, the BAR remains a solid Assault Rifle in Vanguard’s multiplayer. It boasts incredibly high damage and can be turned into a laser with the right combination of Attachments. When you put the two together, the BAR is capable of dropping enemies with just a couple of well-placed shots. This more than makes up for its slower fire rate and establishes it as one of the most effective guns in the game. If you’re looking for something more lightweight, then the STG44 is still the best bet. The classic AR has dominated this year’s CoD, and it shows no signs of being dethroned anytime soon. For more helpful Call of Duty: Vanguard tips, check out our other guides below: Best CoD Vanguard FOV settings | Best MP40 Vanguard loadout | Best M1928 Vanguard loadout | Every CoD Vanguard perk | Best Vanguard controller settings | Unlock Atomic camo

Best KATT-AMR Warzone loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks The KATT-AMR continues to help make sniping in Warzone a powerful strategy when vying for that victory in Season 4 Reloaded. Sniping has always been somewhat of an elusive skill in Warzone, with only the best of the best able to make it viable, until weapons like the KATT-AMR emerged to make it more accessible. With the right attachments, the KATT-AMR becomes a powerful weapon that you can also carry around the battlefield quickly. With Warzone getting faster, being able to stay mobile is key. Here is how you can kit out the weapon to make it the wrecking ball that it can be and dominate your matches in Season 4 Reloaded. Contents Best KATT-AMR loadout – KATT-AMR loadout: Perks and equipment – How to unlock KATT-AMR in Warzone – Best alternative to KATT-AMR in Warzone – Best KATT-AMR Warzone loadout Muzzle: Sonic Suppressor XL – Barrel: Zang-34 Barrel – Laser: SL Razorhawk Laser Sight – Bolt: Ephemeral Quickbolt – Ammunition: .50 Cal High Velocity – The best sniper is one who can hit their targets while remaining undetected, which is why the Sonic Suppressor XL is vital to this build. You will boost their damage range and bullet velocity. Even with the small decrease in recoil control, it is worth it. You will add more range. The SL Razorhawk Laser Sight will give you better ADS Speed so that you can begin lining up your shot much more efficiently, in addition to sprint-to-fire speed and Tac Stance accuracy. The .50 Cal High Velocity ammunition is going to give you higher bullet velocity so that your shots can cover greater distances. Finally, the Ephemeral Quickbolt will help you reload faster so that you can get another shot off quickly if you miss your first one. KATT-AMR Warzone Loadout: Perks and Equipment Perk 1: Sleight of Hand reload faster – – Perk 2: Focus increases duration of “hold to breathe” when scoped – – Perk 3: Quick Fix starts health regeneration when killing a player or inserting plate – – Perk 4: Resolute gives you a speed boost when hit with an enemy shot – – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Smoke Grenade – The Perk suggestions listed are your best route if you’re looking to capitalize on the sniper playstyle. Sleight of Hand is a given, as it lets you reload faster. Focus is a sniper’s optimal Perk since it extends your breath-holding duration while reducing flinch in case enemies are firing back at you. Quick Fix is one of the best Perks in the game. Provided you clean up your foes with a strong secondary, your health will always be in good shape. Finally, Resolute can be a life-saver when changing position, as you are likely to get hit when under fire and needing to find cover. How to unlock KATT-AMR in Warzone The KATT-AMR is unlocked in Warzone by reaching Level 4 when you first get access to the Gunsmith though you’ll still need to progress through 29 gun levels to acquire all of the sniper’s unique attachments. On the other hand, if you extract with it in Zombies, it’ll instantly unlock the weapon for use. Best alternative to KATT-AMR in Warzone A solid alternative is the XRK Stalker. It’s been in and out of the meta, but as of Season 2, players have discovered its one-shot lethality. Snipers are still some of the best options in Warzone, and there’s much more than the KATT-AMR. Learn more about the Kar98k and MORS to stay at the top of the sniper class.

Best KATT-AMR MW3 loadout: Class setup, attachments, perks ActivisionThough the KATT-AMR’s strengths are better suited to Warzone it is still a serviceable sniper in Modern Warfare 3 too. Here is the best KATT-AMR MW3 loadout to make this heavy-duty sniper viable in multiplayer. To make the KATT-AMR worth using on 6v6 maps you need to improve its handling. It is always going to hit hard regardless so rather than worry about that you are far better off stacking attachments that improve mobility and handling. With that said, here is the best KATT-AMR loadout to make this sniper handle fast enough to use in multiplayer, even after the addition of a new competitor in MW3 Season 3. Contents Best KATT-AMR MW3 loadout – Best KATT-AMR class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the KATT-AMR in MW3 – Best KATT-AMR alternative in MW3 – Best KATT-AMR MW3 loadout Attachments Barrel: Perdition 24″ Short Barrel – Laser: SL Razorhawk Laser Light – Optic: Forge Tac Delta 4 – Stock: Tactical Stock Pad – Bolt: Ephemeral Quickbolt – With a default ADS Speed of 720 ms, the KATT-AMR is quite literally the slowest handling gun in MW3 Season 3. With how fast-paced multiplayer is that isn’t going to cut it, so you’ll need to solely choose attachments that improve ADS Speed. There are a few options for this but the most impactful are the SLK Razorhawk Laser Light and Tactical Stock Pad. The visible laser that the SLK Razorhawk Laser Light isn’t ideal but the huge ADS and Sprint to Fire Speed boosts it provides are a necessity to have any chance of using the KATT-AMR effectively. They are slightly less impactful but the Forge Tac Delta 4 and Perdition 24″ Short Barrel further improve ADS by 8%. With all four of these attachments equipped the KATT-AMR at least feels competitive even if other snipers still outclass it, at least in multiplayer. The only attachment worth using that doesn’t boost ADS Speed is the Ephemeral Quickbolt. An exception is made for this one attachment as it boosts the KATT-AMR’s fire rate from 33 RPM to 42 RPM, a massive 24% improvement. This makes the sniper rifle much more forgiving when you miss that crucial opening shot. Best KATT-AMR class: Perks & equipment Vest: Gunner Vest – Gloves: Marksman Gloves – Gear: Bone Conduction Headset – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Flash Grenade – The Gunner Vest was practically made for the KATT-AMR. Not only does it let you use a second primary weapon like the RAM-9 or WSP Swarm at close range, but it also improves reload speed which at 4.8 seconds is one of the sniper rifle’s biggest flaws. With the Gunner Vest equipped, you’ll only have access to the gloves and gear slots. For Gloves, it is highly recommended to use the Marksman Gloves as these reduce flinch during ADS. With such a slow fire rate, you cannot afford to miss shots with the KATT-AMR making this perk essential. Your best option for gear is more debatable but the Bone Conduction Headset makes enemy footsteps and gunshots easier to hear which is never a bad thing. This can be a lifesaver when scoped in as you are typically more vulnerable in those moments to enemy flankers. As for equipment, a Flash Grenade and Semtex is a classic combination that offers an ideal balance of utility for pushing players and a deadly explosive to take them down. Ideally, you want to avoid going on the offensive with the KATT-AMR but that can’t always be avoided, and these at least make it a viable option. How to unlock the KATT-AMR in Modern Warfare 3 The KATT-AMR sniper rifle is unlocked by reaching Level 4 when you first get access to MW3’s gunsmith. Once you have the KATT-AMR, you’ll then need to work through 27 gun levels to unlock all its attachments. Best KATT-AMR alternative in Modern Warfare 3 Although the KATT-AMR is still an effective option, it has largely been replaced by the MORS which was added in MW3 Season 3. The MORS has superior handling, an equally forgiving one-shot kill, and is an all-around better sniper rifle. Check out these other MW3 loadouts that will make you as competitive as possible in multiplayer: Best MW3 loadouts | Best Longbow loadout | Best KV Inhibitor loadout | Best XRK Stalker loadout | Best KVD Enforcer loadout

Best Kastov 762 Warzone 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks Kastov 762 is an underrated gem of an AR capable of performing at all ranges in Warzone 2 with devastating TTK and top firepower. However, you’ll need the best top-tier WZ2 loadout to offset its heavy recoil and maximize its damage output. Assault Rifles dominated the original Warzone’s meta and they’re doing exactly the same in the sequel thanks to their outstanding damage output and accuracy. If you are looking for an Assault Rifle that eviscerates enemies in medium to long-range engagements, look no further than the Kastov 762. The hard-hitting assault rifle’s difficult recoil pattern makes it a tough weapon to use, but learning to harness its power can be extremely valuable. We have you covered for the best Kastov 762 attachments, perks, and equipment so let’s jump right into it. Contents Best Kastov 762 Warzone 2 loadout – Best Kastov 762 Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the Kastov 762 in Warzone 2 – Best Kastov 762 alternative in Warzone 2 – Best Kastov 762 Warzone 2 loadout Attachments Barrel: KAS-10 584MM Barrel – Muzzle: ZLR Talon 5 – Optic: VLK 4.0 Optic – Underbarrel: FTAC Ripper 56 – Magazine: 40-Round Mag – Let’s start things off with the KAS-10 584MM Barrel and ZLR Talon 5 Muzzle, which increase damage range, bullet velocity, and recoil control at the cost of aim-down sight speed and movement speed. The Kastov 762 kicks like a mule in longer-range engagements, so it is important to compensate with that in mind. The FTAC Ripper 56 improves recoil control at the cost of mobility. Scopes are subjective, but we have found the most success using the VLK 4.0 Optic. As for ammo capacity, if you are playing Quads or Trios, it makes the most sense to use a 40 Round Mag, so you can take down multiple enemies at once. Best Kastov 762 class: Perks & equipment Perk Package: Weapon Specialist Base Perk 1: Overkill – Base Perk 2: Strong Arm – Bonus Perk: Spotter – Ultimate Perk: Survivor – Lethal: Grenade – Tactical Equipment: Stun Grenade – Unlike MW2, Warzone 2 players must pick a perk package with a preset bundle. For the Kastov 762, we’ve opted to use the Weapon Specialist Package because it suits the weapon perfectly. Using Overkill, we recommend equipping an SMG as a second primary weapon. The Kastov 762 dominates at medium and long range, but its maneuverability issues will be noticeable in close-quarters comeback. Strong Arm often gets overlooked by players, but the ability to aim and throw equipment further will come in handy more times than you think during a Warzone match. Spotter allows you to identify enemy equipment, field upgrades, and kill streaks through walls, which will be very useful in dealing with campers on Al Mazrah. Possibly more useful in Warzone 2, Survivor pings any enemies you get downed by and allows allies to revive you quicker. Finally round off the class with a Grenade for flushing enemies out of cover and a Stun Grenade for aggressive pushes. How to unlock the Kastov 762 in Warzone 2 In order to get your hands on this powerful Kastov 762 AR, you’ll reach level 23 overall, which shouldn’t take you long at all if you’re grinding multiplayer or Warzone 2. Best Kastov 762 alternative in Warzone 2 The Kastov-74u is under the same weapon platform as the Kastov 762 but offers a much different package in-game. The devastating AR received a nerf in the Season 1 update, but we still believe it is one of the best weapons in Warzone 2. While the Kastov 762 thrives at medium to long-range, the Kastov-74u performs closer to an SMG and shines in close-quarters combat. That’s all for our Kastov 762 loadout! For more of our Warzone 2 coverage, check out these guides below: Do Warzone skins carry over to Warzone 2? | What are Strongholds in Warzone 2? | All Warzone 2 vehicles and Gas Stations | Does Warzone 2 have SBMM? | How do Warzone 2 circles work?

Best Kastov 762 Modern Warfare 2 loadout: Class setup, Attachments & Perks ActivisonKastov 762 is an AR that’s very lethal in Modern Warfare 2, and we’ve got the meta loadout that will draw out all its strengths, complete with the best Perks, attachments, and equipment right here. Season 4 of Modern Warfare 2 has begun, and the Kastov 762 was not changed much, the rifle is still deadly at medium range. One such deadly assault rifle is the Kastov 762. It’s got a great damage range and is perfect for deleting opponents from a medium range. However, to do that you need to have the best Kastov loadout for the job. We’ve got the best attachments, Perks, and equipment to choose from if you want to stay at the top of the leaderboard. If you’re looking for a powerful Warzone 2 Kastov 762 loadout instead, we’ve got a perfect setup. Contents Best Kastov 762 Modern Warfare 2 loadout – Best Kastov 762 Modern Warfare 2 class – How to unlock the Kastov 762 in Modern Warfare 2 – Alternative to the Kastov 762 Modern Warfare 2 loadout – Best Kastov 762 Modern Warfare 2 loadout Attachments Muzzle: Kastovia DX90 – Barrel: Kastovia 343 – Laser: FSS OLE-V Laser – Rear Grip: Demo-X2 Grip – Magazine: 40-Round Mag – The best Kastov 762 loadout in Modern Warfare 2 kicks off with the Kastovia DX90 muzzle and Kastovia 343 barrel. These attachments significantly boost the gun’s bullet velocity, recoil control, and enhance the weapon’s ADS time, making it easy to snap onto opponents which is key in multiplayer. Follow that up by utilizing the Demo-X2 Grip and FSS OLE-V Laser to bolster the gun’s heavy kickback even more, and of course, improve the sprint-to-fire speed which is essential when aggressively running around the map. Finally, you’ll want to round off this loadout with the 40-Round Mag, which will ensure you can take out multiple enemies without having to reload, alleviating the pressure during intense skirmishes. Best Kastov 762 Modern Warfare 2 class Base Perk 1: Overkill – Base Perk 2: Battle Hardened – Bonus Perk: Fast Hands – Ultimate Perk: Ghost – Lethal: Grenade – Tactical: Stim – For starters, Overkill is a great perk as it allows you to equip a second primary alongside your Kastov. This means you can utilize a meta SMG in your setup, making it easy to wipe out any enemies that push your position aggressively. On top of that, Battle Hardened will prevent opponents from wiping you out with explosives, forcing them to take gunfights with you instead of relying on their lethal. When it comes to your bonus perk, Fast Hands is a solid option as you want to be able to switch to your SMG quickly, giving you the best chance of taking down your foes. For your Ultimate, Ghost is a top-tier option that is guaranteed to be useful, keeping you concealed from the opposing team. As for equipment, a Grenade will always come in handy for flushing enemies out of power positions and a Stim is perfect for a boost of health when you need it most. How to unlock the Kastov 762 in Modern Warfare 2 In order to get your hands on this powerful Kastov 762 AR, you’ll reach level 23 overall, which shouldn’t take you long at all if you’re grinding multiplayer. Alternative to the Kastov 762 Modern Warfare 2 loadout If you’re not a fan of the Kastov 762 in Modern Warfare 2, it may be time to pick up the Lachmann-556. This lethal AR also thrives at medium to long-range and offers a powerful TTK that is guaranteed to catch foes off-guard. With a meta setup, the Lachmann-556 can be a force to be reckoned with, and luckily, we’ve got all the details you need right here. Now that you have the best Kastov 762 loadout, you can check out some other guides we’ve compiled for Modern Warfare 2: All Modern Warfare 2 beta maps and game modes | How to use Modern Warfare 2’s Gunsmith: Receivers and Blueprints explained | Modern Warfare 2 new equipment guide: Lethals and Tacticals explained | How to unlock MP5 SMG loadout in Modern Warfare 2 | How to Slide Cancel in the Modern Warfare 2 Beta | How to unlock Oni Operator & Blueprint in Modern Warfare 2 | All Modern Warfare 2 Killstreaks | What is Modern Warfare 2 Spec Ops mode? | All Modern Warfare 2 perks | All Modern Warfare 2 Field Upgrades

Best Kastov-74u Warzone 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks ActivisonThe Kastov-74u in Warzone 2 is a versatile and underrated AR that thrives at medium range as sniper support with its lethal damage output, but you’ll need a strong meta loadout to maximize the power it brings. Warzone 2 is well underway and the meta is finally beginning to take shape with the Season 4 update introducing a huge set of weapon balance changes. As a result, the focus for all competitors in Warzone 2 is creating a top-tier loadout to rack up kills and secure victories in their matches. Well, although both the Chimera and TAQ-56 are reliable choices for AR fans, the Kastov-74u is another brilliant option that offers high damage, stability, and impressive mobility. However, to maximize the Kastov-74u’s impressive damage output, you’ll need a top-tier loadout and luckily, we’ve got you covered. Contents Best Kastov-74u Warzone 2 loadout – Best Kastov-74u Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the Kastov-74u in Warzone 2 – Best Kastov-74u alternatives in Warzone 2 – Best Kastov-74u Warzone 2 loadout Attachments Muzzle: Echoless-80 – Barrel: Shorttac 330MM – Stock: FT Tac-Elite Stock – Underbarrel: FSS Sharkfin 90 – Magazine: 45-Round Mag – For starters, equip the Echoless-80 muzzle and the Shorttac 330MM, these attachments combine to significantly boost bullet velocity and damage. Not only that, but the choice of muzzle also suppresses the gun, which is key for remaining undetected on Al Mazrah. After that, make sure you use the FT Tac-Elite Stock and the FSS Sharkfin 90 for added stability. This transforms the Kastov-74u into a laser beam at medium range. As the weapon has such clean iron sights, there’s no need to waste a slot on an optic. Finally, round off the setup with the 45-Round Mag so you never run out of ammo mid-gunfight, and can take out multiple foes without having to reload. Best Kastov-74u Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment Perk Package: Weapon Specialist Base Perk 1: Overkill – Base Perk 2: Strong Arm – Bonus Perk: Spotter – Ultimate Perk: Survivor – Lethal: Grenade – Tactical Equipment: Stun Grenade – Unlike MW2, Warzone 2 players have to pick a perk package that includes a preset bundle. For the Kastov-74u, we’ve opted for the Weapon Specialist Package as it’s perfect for aggressive players. For starters, it includes Overkill which will allow you to run a second primary in your loadout. While this is less important in MW2, in Warzone 2 it’s essential to be able to eliminate foes at all ranges so having access to a sniper or long-range LMG will be extremely useful. Although the Kastov-74u can kill at long distances, it’s more suited to medium-range skirmishes. Following this, Weapon Specialist also utilizes Strong Arm so you can throw equipment further and make sure your throwables hit the target more often. As for bonus perks, the package gives you Spotter so you can identify enemy equipment, field upgrades, and killstreaks through walls. This will prevent you from being caught out by any pesky campers on Al Mazrah. For your Ultimate perk, you’ll be able to take advantage of Survivor which pings any enemies you get downed by and allows allies to revive you quicker. Finally round off the class with a Grenade for flushing enemies out of cover and a Stun Grenade for aggressive pushes, How to unlock the Kastov-74u in Warzone 2 Luckily, the Kastov-74u is unlocked at the beginning of Warzone 2, so all you have to do is unlock custom loadouts and you can start using this deadly AR. Best Kastov-74u alternatives in Warzone 2 If the Kastov-74u doesn’t match your style of play, then consider utilizing the TAQ-56 otherwise known as the Scar, another lethal AR from MW2. Equipped with impressive damage and steady recoil control, it’s an all-around top-tier weapon and we’ve even got a meta build for you to check out here. That’s all for our Kastov-74u loadout! For more of our Warzone 2 coverage, check out these guides below: Do Warzone skins carry over to Warzone 2? | What are Strongholds in Warzone 2? | All Warzone 2 vehicles and Gas Stations | Does Warzone 2 have SBMM? | How do Warzone 2 circles work?

Best Kastov-74u Modern Warfare 2 class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Setup ActivisionThe Kastov-74u is an AR that offers great lethality on the move at close and medium ranges in Modern Warfare 2, we’ve got the meta loadout that will draw out all its strengths, complete with the best Perks, attachments, and equipment right here. Season 4 of Modern Warfare 2 has begun, and the Kastov-74u did not receive changes in this patch, so you can still count on it to do its job properly. The AK-74u lookalike is an iconic SMG/AR hybrid in the Call of Duty series, and if you’re looking for a tried and tested that’s guaranteed to help you rack up some kills, here’s the best Kastov-74u loadout in MW2. If you’re looking for a powerful Warzone 2 Kastov-74u loadout instead, we’ve got a perfect choice. Contents Best Kastov-74u Modern Warfare 2 loadout – Best Kastov-74u class setup: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the Kastov-74u in Modern Warfare 2 – Alternatives to the Kastov-74u Modern Warfare 2 loadout – Best Kastov-74u Modern Warfare 2 loadout Muzzle: Echoline GS-X Suppressor – Optic: Cronen Mini Red Dot – Laser: FSS OLE-V Laser – Underbarrel: Merc Foregrip – Magazine: 45 Round Mag – First up we’ve gone for the Echoline GS-X Suppressor in order to keep some of the Kastov’s recoil under control, while also suppressing shots. When it comes to control and accuracy, we’ve used the Merc Foregrip. It will grant players a boost in recoil, accuracy, and control, perfect for any situation you find yourself in from long to close range. Optics are largely down to personal preference, but the Cronen Mini Red Dot sight is a great way to add accuracy without obscuring the screen. Next, there’s the FSS OLE-V Laser to make the most of the Kastov’s SMG DNA with increased hipfire accuracy. Finally, you’ll want to round off this loadout with the 45 Round Mag, which will ensure you can take out multiple enemies without having to reload, alleviating the pressure during intense skirmishes. Best Kastov-74u class setup: Perks & equipment As the Kastov is best used as an aggressive assault rifle, you’ll want to pick out the right equipment and perks to bolster that. Here are the perks you should utilize with the Kastov-74u: Base Perk 1: Scavenger – Base Perk 2: Tracker – Bonus Perk: Fast Hands – Ultimate Perk: Ghost – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Stun Grenade – Scavenger and Tracker are almost essential perks in Modern Warfare 2. Scavenger will allow you to pick up more ammunition as you traverse the map, particularly handy if you go on long streaks. Meanwhile, Tracker lets you trace the footsteps of nearby enemies, making it easier to track them down and keep earning kills. You could also utilize perks such as Battle Hardened or E.O.D. to minimize the effects of lethal and tactical equipment, if you find either of those aren’t as helpful as you would have hoped. As your Bonus perk, Fast Hands is incredible. When using Fast Hands, switching weapons and reloading is much faster, ensuring you’re never vulnerable for too long. Finally, for your Ultimate perk, the only solution is Ghost. With how prevalent UAVs are in Modern Warfare 2, it’s the best perk in the game, and while you’ll have to wait some time to earn it, it’s 100% worth the wait. As for your lethal and tactical equipment, you’ll want to take a trusty Semtex to deal explosive damage, as well as a Stun Grenade, to paralyze your foes and make mowing them down that much easier. How to unlock the Kastov-74u in Modern Warfare 2 Luckily, the Kastov-74u is unlocked from the start in Modern Warfare 2, so all you need to do is reach level four to earn custom loadouts to begin playing around with attachments. In the meantime, there is a pre-built Kastov loadout so you can get some practice in before you go off and create your own setup. Alternatives to the Kastov-74u Modern Warfare 2 loadout If the Kastov-74u isn’t quite bringing what you want to the game, we recommend going to the old faithful, the M4. It’s easily one of the strongest weapons in the game and is a fantastic AR for any player looking for power. Alternatively, if you’re looking for less spray-and-pray and more deadly control, the TAQ-V is a brilliant Battle Rifle you have to try. For more on Modern Warfare 2, take a look at some of our other guides below: Modern Warfare 2 new equipment guide: Lethals and Tacticals explained | How to unlock MP5 SMG loadout in Modern Warfare 2 | How to Slide Cancel in Modern Warfare 2 | How to unlock Oni Operator & Blueprint in Modern Warfare 2 | All Modern Warfare 2 Killstreaks | What is Modern Warfare 2 Spec Ops mode? | All Modern Warfare 2 perks | All Modern Warfare 2 Field Upgrades

Best Kastov 545 Warzone 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks ActivisionThe Kastov 545 is one powerful Assault Rifle that can shred enemies from a distance in Warzone 2. So, here’s a Kastov 545 loadout with some ideal attachments and perks to give you an edge in battle royale. The Assault class is one of the most preferred weapon choices among players from the battle royale genre and it’s no different for the latest CoD BR sequel. These weapons can prove to be quite efficient at both medium and close-range combat with some exceptions of being useful in long-range as well. The Kastov 545 is one such weapon in Warzone 2 that has relatively higher recoil than others but compensates it with an equal amount of damage. So, here we have put together the best class for the Kastov 545 AR, making it deadly for different scenarios. Contents Best Kastov 545 Warzone 2 loadout – Best Kastov 545 Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the Kastov 545 in Warzone 2 – Best Kastov 545 alternatives in Warzone 2 – Best Kastov 545 Warzone 2 loadout Attachments Barrel: IG-K30 406MM – Muzzle: Echoless-80 – Underbarrel: VX Pineapple – Optic: Cronen Mini Pro – Magazine: 45 Round Mag – The main goal of this loadout is to make the Kastov 545 effective at both close and medium-range combat. Starting with the IG-K30 406MM Barrel, it helps to improve the bullet velocity, recoil control, damage range, and hip fire accuracy of the weapon. Next, the Echoless-80 Muzzle catalyzes the effect of the Barrel by suppressing sound and smoothening the recoil. The VX Pineapple underbarrel helps to make the recoil steadier and also improves hip fire accuracy. We have chosen the Cronen Mini Pro optic here as the recoil increases significantly if you use a larger scope. However, it’s a personal preference and you experiment a bit to choose which one suits you best. Lastly, we’d recommend the 45 Round Mag as it ensures you have enough ammo in case the entire opponent squad decides to push together. Best Kastov 545 Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment Perk Package: Weapon Specialist Base Perk 1: Overkill – Base Perk 2: Strong Arm – Bonus Perk: Spotter – Ultimate Perk: Survivor – Lethal: Frag Grenade – Tactical Equipment: Flash Grenade – In battle royale, it’s essential to keep another primary weapon (like an SMG or a Sniper), depending upon your style of play. That’s exactly why we are recommending Overkill as it allows you to do the same. Strong Arm makes your throwables land more precisely while Spotter helps you spot enemy field upgrades, killstreaks, or equipment through walls. The Survivor perk pings enemies who knocked you out and allows your teammates to revive you quicker. For equipment, we’ve recommended the combo of a Frag Grenade and a Flash Grenade to relocate and disorient your enemies at the same time. How to unlock the Kastov 545 in Warzone 2 To unlock the Kastov 545 in Warzone 2, you’ll need to reach Rank 23 first. This will unlock the Kastov 762 AR which further needs to be upgraded to Level 10. Once you’ve done these two steps, the Kastov 545 will unlock after which you can start leveling it up for the attachments we mentioned above. So, yes, the process is a bit tedious and not so simple, yet rewarding. Best Kastov 545 alternatives in Warzone 2 If you feel the Kastov 545 takes too long to unlock then you may want to go with the Kastov 762 instead. However, if you want to go with a gun that does similar damage having lower recoil, then the M4 might be ideal for you. So, there you have it — that’s all for our Kastov 545 loadout. For more on Warzone 2, be sure to check out our other guides: Warzone 2 & Modern Warfare 2 Season 1 Battle Pass | Best TAQ-56 Warzone 2 loadout | Best M4 Warzone 2 loadout | All new Warzone 2 features explained | Best SP-R 208 Warzone 2 loadout | All Warzone 2 vehicles and Gas Stations | Does Warzone 2 have SBMM? | Do Warzone skins carry over to Warzone 2? | What are Strongholds in Warzone 2?

Best Kastov 545 Modern Warfare 2 loadout: Class setup, Attachments & Perks ActivisionThe Kastov 545 is definitely not as popular as it once was among Modern Warfare 2’s player base, but it is a solid AR that can deliver a great performance with the best meta loadout for it, luckily, we have one right here. Season 4 of Modern Warfare 2 has begun, and the Kastov 545 did not receive changes in this patch, this means the AK-47 lookalike still deals good damage at a medium range bundled with a decent rate of fire. However, its recoil is powerful, and the weapon is not the best at close range, meaning you need to build this weapon well in order for it to live up to M4 standards. Ultimately, it’s no secret that the Kastov 545 is far from the most powerful Assault Rifle in Modern Warfare 2. But that doesn’t mean it’s not capable of completely dominating the battlefield with the right loadout. Here’s the best Kastov 545 loadout in Modern Warfare 2 as well as what equipment, class, and perks you should run with. If you’re looking for a powerful Warzone 2 Kastov-545 loadout instead, we’ve got a perfect setup. Contents Best Kastov 545 Modern Warfare 2 loadout – Best Kastov 545 Modern Warfare 2 class – How to unlock the Kastov 545 in Modern Warfare 2 – Alternatives to the Kastov 545 Modern Warfare 2 loadout – Best Kastov 545 Modern Warfare 2 loadout Laser: FSS OLE-V Laser – Muzzle: Echoless-80 – Rear Grip: Ivanov ST-70 Grip – Magazine: 45 Round Mag – Underbarrel: FTAC Ripper 56 – We start our best Kastov 545 Modern Warfare 2 loadout with the FSS OLE-V Laser. One of the main issues regarding this Assault Rifle is its recoil and accuracy. It can be extremely frustrating to deal with, especially with the quick rate of fire. The FSS OLE-V Laser aids in that greatly, same with FTAC Ripper 56. The Echoless-80 has the same perks and will help that recoil stay a little more under control when firing. This is also boosted by the increase in muzzle velocity granted in the Season 1 Reloaded update. For the rear Grip, we recommend using the Ivanov ST-70 Grip due to its increase in flinch resistance – something that’s vital when competing in close combat. The addition of the 45 Round Mag will grant you a larger pool of ammo to dispatch more enemies before you run dry. Best Kastov 545 Modern Warfare 2 class Base Perk 1: Overkill – Base Perk 2: Scavenger – Bonus Perk: Fast Hands – Ultimate Perk: Ghost – Lethal: Thermite – Tactical: Stim – The base perks we recommend are Overkill and Scavenger. Overkill allows you to grab something more long-range to allow for all distances to be covered and Scavenger gives you a few more bullets since you’ll likely be firing quite a few during a kill. Since Overkill is a great perk to have, the bonus perk should be Fast Hands. This lets you swap weapons and reload with ease and the speed required to take down the enemy with few problems. As for the ultimate perk, there is really no other option than Ghost. It’s the best perk in the game and, with the number of UAVs present in Modern Warfare 2, a bit more protection is vital. It may take up to level 52 to unlock but it’s well worth the wait. Since you’ll likely be in the fray of battle constantly, we recommend using a Stim and Thermite to deal some devastating damage and keep you alive when you really need it. How to unlock the Kastov 545 in Modern Warfare 2 Unfortunately, you won’t be able to grab the Kastov 545 as soon as you get into Modern Warfare 2. Instead, you’ll need to reach level 23 to first unlock the Kastov 762. Once that’s complete, get the Kastov 762 to level 10 and you will unlock the Kastov 545. In short, to unlock the Kastov 545 you need to: Reach player level 23 – Use the Kastov 762 – Once it reaches level 10, the Kastov 545 will be unlocked. – Alternatives to the Kastov 545 Modern Warfare 2 loadout If the Kastov 545 is just not quite cutting it for you then the next clear choice should be the M4. It’s easily one of the most powerful weapons in the game and is a no-brainer for players wanting a powerful and capable alternative. If the M4 isn’t for you, then the TAQ-56 is a fantastic Assault Rifle that brings something unique to the match and allows you to stray a little from the typical M4. Now that you have the best Kastov 545 loadout in Modern Warfare 2, you can check out some other guides we’ve compiled for MW2: How to use Modern Warfare 2’s Gunsmith: Receivers and Blueprints explained | Modern Warfare 2 new equipment guide: Lethals and Tacticals explained | How to unlock MP5 SMG loadout in Modern Warfare 2 | How to Slide Cancel in Modern Warfare 2 | How to unlock Oni Operator & Blueprint in Modern Warfare 2 | All Modern Warfare 2 Killstreaks | What is Modern Warfare 2 Spec Ops mode? | All Modern Warfare 2 perks | All Modern Warfare 2 Field Upgrades

Best Kar98k Warzone loadout: Class setup, attachments, perks, more DexertoThe Kar98k has returned to Warzone, reintroducing the most iconic marksman rifle in Call of Duty history and shaking up the meta forever, with this sniper being incredibly powerful. Back in Season 4, two new weapons were added to Warzone’s arsenal: the Superi 46 and the Kar98k. It didn’t take long for both to take over, with both guns still among the best weapons you can use to this day. This isn’t the first time the Kar98k has dominated either. The German sniper dominated back in Verdansk thanks to its fast handling and infinite one-shot potential. It isn’t quite as strong anymore, but it is still very much a meta weapon that a lot of people are using. To get the most out of the Kar98k, you’ll need the best loadout possible. Here are all of the attachments, perks, and equipment you should pair with this incredibly powerful marksman rifle. Best Kar98k Warzone loadout Muzzle: Sonic Suppressor L – Barrel: Prazisionsgewehr 762 Long Barrel – Optic: Range Caller v3.4 Optic – Laser: SL Razorhawk Laser Light – Ammunition: 7.92 High Grain Rounds – You’ll want to use the Prazisionsgewehr 762 Long Barrel, Sonic Suppressor, and 7.92 High Grain Rounds. This specific combination of attachments boosts damage range a lot, letting the sniper one-shot enemies out to around 70 meters, which is more than enough to dominate on Resurgence maps. These meta attachments come with some secondary benefits too. Naturally, the suppressor silences outgoing shots, making it harder for enemies to track down your location. Also, the barrel boosts bullet velocity, making it easier to land headshots from further away. The Range Caller v3.4 Optic is the best sight on the Kar98k, closely resembling the classic scope that once reigned supreme in Verdansk. Other great alternatives include the Forge Tac Delta 4 and SZ Vortex-90, which offer less zoom but suffer from fewer handling penalties. Finally, the SL Razorhawk Laser Light massively improves ADS Speed, letting you scope in and target enemies faster. This not only makes the sniper rifle more responsive but also gives other players less time to escape. Best Kar98k Warzone class: Perks and equipment Perk 1: Double Time – Perk 2: Focus – Perk 3: Cold-Blooded – Perk 4: Birdseye – Lethal: Throwing Knife – Tactical: Smoke Grenade – The best Kar98k class needs to use perks that enable a fast-paced playstyle. Using both Double Time and Focus does just that, with the former letting you move around the map quickly, and the latter making it easier to land decisive headshots when they matter most. Cold-Blooded is another perk that is fantastic for sniping, with it canceling out High Alert and concealing you from pesky thermal optics. This meta perk countering High Alert is huge, as it prevents enemy players from jumping around every time you aim in their direction, making it easier to land shots. For Perk 4, Birdseye is the perfect perk for aggressive sniping. When equipped, it empowers UAVs to show the direction of enemies, just like an Advanced UAV. It can even detect other players using Ghost, so enemies have no way to hide from you. The equipment meta in Warzone has long since settled, with the Throwing Knife cementing itself as the best option when playing aggressively. Being able to instantly finish off downed enemies. Equally, a Smoke Grenade is the best tactical equipment, as it can be used to cover open areas. How to unlock the Kar98k The Kar98k is unlocked through the Armory by completing three daily challenges or winning three games. It was previously available from the Season 4 Battle Pass, but this option was removed when Season 5 started. Best Kar98k alternative in Warzone The XRK Stalker is the only other fast-handling sniper rifle that can one shot down in Warzone. It has better damage range than the Kar98k, but slower handling and mobility. This makes it a more well-rounded option for those who prefer a traditional sniper rifle. For more ideas on what snipers to use in Warzone, check out these loadouts for the MORS and KATT-AMR. Alternatively, see how Warzone’s one-shot snipers rank against each other, or even what the current assault rifle and SMG metas are looking like.

Best Kar98k Warzone loadout: Class setup, Attachments, Perks ActivisionWhile the Call of Duty: Warzone meta continues to shift with every new Season, the Kar98k remains one of the best Sniper picks thanks to its speed and damage output. If you’ve played any competitive team shooter, you’ve heard an enemy was “one-shot” only to hit them and find out that their armor had not even been cracked. Maybe you’ve even been the one to make the fallacious call-out yourself. But, fortunately, everyone is either one-shot or dead when you’ve got a Kar98k in hand. The potent rifle has a very quick ADS, a decent firing rate and can down fully armored enemies at impressive ranges. Some things never change, and the Kar98k is still one of the best weapons in Warzone Season 5 and is currently one of the best snipers. In fact, this WWII Marksman Rifle has remained a staple pick in most of the game’s loadouts. The Season 5 update finally revamped the Sniper Rifle class, by decreasing flinch on Heavy Sniper Rifle by 11% and Light Sniper Rifles by a whopping 40%. Falling under the Light category, the Kar98k is back and better than ever in Warzone’s final season. Contents Best Warzone Kar98k loadout – Best Kar98k setup in Warzone (Perks & Equipment) – How to unlock the Kar98k in Warzone fast – Alternative Kar98k loadout – Best Warzone Kar98k loadout Attachments Muzzle: Monolithic Suppressor – Barrel: Singuard Custom 27.6” – Laser: Tac Laser – Optic: Sniper Scope – Stock: FTAC Sport Comb – This Kar98 setup is absolutely lethal and ensures you have the tools needed to quickly punish enemy squads. The Monolithic Suppressor and Singuard Custom 27.6” both help with the gun’s damage range, with the former keeping you off the minimap and the latter boosting bullet velocity. Not only does this help counteract the Kar98k’s bullet drop-off, but it also makes it even easier to hit those all-important ranged headshots. Simultaneously, the Tac Laser is fantastic for bolstering ADS speed and the Sniper Scope gives great magnification without lowering your scope speed. Overall, this makes the Kar98k perfect for taking pop shots at enemies and retreating back into cover, unlike a lot of other snipers, you don’t have to peak for too long. See the latest Call Of Duty deals here Together, those four attachments are essential necessities for a Kar98k loadout and are therefore used by virtually every top player. Meanwhile, the FTAC Sport Comb stock reduces the gun’s ADS time even further, allowing you to always get the first shot off on your opponent. If you’re looking for something different, then that attachment can be sacrificed for something else. For example, picking the Stippled Grip Tape will improve Sprint to Fire speed and ADS time. Best Kar98k setup in Warzone (Perks & Equipment) Perks & Equipment Perk 1: EOD – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Secondary: Marco 5 – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Heartbeat Sensor – This loadout uses EOD and Amped to keep you safe from explosives and enable you to quickly swap weapons. These perks are important for most meta Warzone loadouts, particularly when you’re running a long-range weapon. The Overkill perk enables the use of the Armaguerra 43 which remains the best SMG in Warzone Pacific. Having this SMG enables you to remain extremely competitive in close-quarter firefights, while also being able to maintain your mid-range potential with the Kar98k. If you prefer Cold War’s arsenal of weapons, consider pairing the Kar98k with the OTs 9, or even a fan-favorite like the MAC-10. While the high fire rate SMG may not be the must-pick gun it used to be, it still melts enemies with ease with a top-tier loadout. Lastly, the Heartbeat Sensor enables you to get the drop on any players not running Ghost, while Semtex is a must for removing pesky campers and explosive devices. You could also use a Thermite or Throwing Knife to finish off a downed enemy. How to unlock the Kar98k in Warzone fast Unlocking the Kar98k in Warzone is incredibly simple and only requires you to reach level 33. This means you won’t need to do any pesky challenges in order to use it in Warzone. However, you’ll still need to grind the gun’s levels in either Warzone or Modern Warfare’s standard multiplayer if you wish to get hold of the very best attachments. Best Kar98k loadout Warzone tips Even though the Kar98k is technically classified as a Marksman Rifle, this weapon has captivated the sniper community in Warzone for many seasons in a row. Here are a few tips to help you maximize the Kar98k’s potential: The Kar98k has become popular over time mainly because of its mobility. While you can be quite defensive when using this gun, playing to its strengths might prove to be a better choice. A typical Sniper Rifle might require you to hold one position, but the Kar98k isn’t typical. Don’t be afraid to get aggressive. – In those cases when an enemy decides to flank or rush you, having a secondary SMG or Assault Rifle can be beneficial. Check out our lists for the best SMGs and best Assault Rifles to figure out what weapon you should use with the Kar98k. – Having the Ghost perk enabled will help immensely in keeping you hidden from enemy UAVs and Heartbeat Sensors. As soon as you’re able to, be sure to pick it up from a loadout drop. – Alternative Kar98k loadout If you’re looking for an alternative loadout to the Kar98k, check out our HDR loadout . This powerful weapon is currently the second most popular sniper rifle in Warzone. This is thanks to its devastating damage output and long-range capabilities. While it certainly doesn’t quite have the same feel as the Kar98k, it’s perfect for players who love the functionality of the Kar98k but want to try something heavier and more powerful. If you want a sniper with a lot of effectiveness, then the HDR will give you the tools needed to make those cross-map plays. Choosing between the two all comes down to preference, so give them both a go and see which sniper best fits your playstyle. So, there you have it, a Kar98k loadout that will enable you to get plenty of kills across Verdansk and Fortune’s Keep. If you want to keep updated with all the latest Call of Duty news and updates, then be sure to check out our Call of Duty page. Make sure to check out our other Warzone guides and lists such as: Best warzone settings to increase FPS on PC| Most popular Warzone weapons | Best Sniper Rifles | All Warzone bunker codes | MAC-10 loadout | Best Warzone loadouts | Top 20 highest-earning players If you click on a product link on this page we may earn a small affiliate commission.

Best Kar98k Vanguard class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Proficiency, Setup ActivisionThe Kar98 is proving once again to be one of the best and most popular sniper rifles in Call of Duty: Vanguard. Here’s the best Kar98 class to use in Vanguard to light up the killfeed. The Kar98 is one of the most iconic weapons in Call of Duty history. It’s a sniper rifle that players have loved picking up through the years, and always seems to dominate the sniping meta whenever the game includes it. So if you’re looking for an alternative to the meta STG loadout or the best MP40, the Kar98 could be the weapon to scratch that itch. Contents Best Kar98k loadout attachments – Best Kar98k class (Perks, Equipment & Field Upgrade) – How to unlock the Kar98k in Vanguard – Alternatives to Kar98k Vanguard loadout – Best Kar98k Vanguard loadout Muzzle: G28 Compensator – Barrel: Krausnick 560MM LWS03K – Stock: Short Stock – Underbarrel: Heavy Foregrip – Ammo Type: FMJ Rounds – Rear Grip: Leather Grip – Proficiency: Shrouded – Kit: Fully Loaded – The best Kar98k loadout is catered to maximizing both speed and damage, keeping you mobile and able to pack a punch. The G28 Compensator helps to improve recoil control which, while not as important for a sniper as a full-auto assault rifle for example, still helps greatly in keeping foes in your sight when staying scoped in. The Krausnick 560MM LWS03K barrel, Short Stock and Leather Grip rear grip are all used to improve movement, ADS and sprint-to-fire speed, helping you take out enemies at shorter ranges quickly. The Heavy Foregrip underbarrel helps improve aiming stability, while the FMJ rounds make walls and fences a non-issue in Vanguard. Finally, the Proficiency and Kit come largely down to personal preference. We’ve gone for the Fully Loaded kit to help keep on top of the ammo count, while the Shrouded proficiency removes your sniper glint, making life harder for foes trying to scout you out. Best Kar98k Vanguard class (Perks, Equipment & Field Upgrade) Perk 1: Cold Blooded – Perk 2: Radar – Perk 3: Tactician – Secondary: Machine Pistol – Lethal: Mk2 Frag Grenade – Tactical: No 69 Stun Grenade – Field Upgrade: Field Mic – Perks can make or break a class, and if you’re sniping in Vanguard this is even more true. Cold Blooded will stop enemy AI streaks from detecting you, while Radar keeps you better informed on enemy movements on your minimap. While most loadouts will have Double Time or Lightweight as a Perk 3, we’ve gone for Tactician, which lets you restock your tactical equipment every 30 seconds. With a sniper in hand, your Stun Grenades are extremely important for slowing enemy advances — keeping them refreshed is important. Finally, we recommend the Field Mic upgrade, allowing you to monitor choke points and be more aware of when an enemy is pushing you, giving you those extra moments to prepare and finish them off. How to unlock Kar98k in Vanguard Fortunately, it’s not too difficult to unlock the Kar98k in Vanguard. All you have to do is reach Level 43, and the Kar98 will be unlocked automatically. If you haven’t already reached Level 43, you can just throw on some double XP tokens and play Das Haus — you’ll reach it in no time. Alternatives to Kar98k Vanguard loadout If you’re looking for an alternative to the Kar98k in Vanguard, you’ll likely want to go with another classic World War 2 marksman rifle in the M1 Garand. It’s not quite as powerful, but as far as iconic Call of Duty guns go, the M1 Garand is definitely up there. Make sure you check out our other Vanguard loadout guides to get a competitive edge over your foes: Best BAR loadout | Best Automaton loadout | Best Itra loadout | Best MP40 loadout | Best STG44 loadout

Best Kar98k MW3 loadout: Class setup, attachments, perks ActivisionThe Kar98k has returned to Modern Warfare, with MW3 Season 4 reintroducing the iconic marksman rifle. Here’s the best loadout to make this classic weapon just as strong as it used to be. Season 4 has brought back the Kar98k, and it has made quite the return. With its rapid handling, forgiving one-shot kill, and impressive mobility, it’s clear that the Kar98k is undoubtedly a meta weapon. Its strengths are further enhanced by Modern Warfare 3’s increased health pool of 150. With full auto guns having longer TTKs this year, a powerful one-shot kill sniper like the Kar98k becomes even scarier. It may be strong, but the Kar98k still needs a meta loadout just like any other MW3 weapon. Here’s the best build to dominate multiplayer with the marksman rifle, including attachments, perks, and equipment. Contents Best Kar98k loadout – Best Kar98k class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock Kar98k in Modern Warfare 3 – Best alternative to Kar98k in Modern Warfare 3 – Best Kar98k Modern Warfare 3 loadout Barrel: Bryson Carbine-S Barrel – Laser: SL Razorhawk Laser Light – Optic: Corio Eagleseye 2.5x – Stock: No Stock – Ammunition: 7.92 High Grain Rounds – In MW3 multiplayer, the Kar98k thrives when built almost solely for handling and mobility. You want this powerful marksman rifle to be as fast and responsive as possible. This enables an aggressive playstyle where the Kar98k can outgun even SMGs like the RAM-9 and Striker 9 up close, especially if you are a prolific quickscoper. To maximize handling and mobility, use a combination of the Bryson Carbine-S Barrel, No Stock, and SL Razorhawk Laser Light. These three attachments hasten ADS Speed, reducing it to just 284 ms. That’s absurdly quick for a one-shot kill weapon like the Kar98k in MW3. For comparison, a comparable Longbow loadout caps out at around 380 ms. The remaining attachments should be used to make the Kar98k more consistent. For this, the 7.92 High Grain Rounds ammunition makes a lot of sense as it boosts damage range by 15%. The best part is that the only listed con of using this attachment is less recoil control, which is an entirely negligible stat on the Kar98k due to its slow fire rate. Finally, you’ll want to equip an optic to make the Kar98k feel like a true sniper rifle. There are several viable options, but the Corio Eagleseye 2.5x stands out as the best medium-range scope in Modern Warfare 3. It has a great reticle that is easy to use at the ranges where most gunfights take place in multiplayer. Best Kar98k class: Perks & equipment Vest: Compression Carrier Immediately regen health after a kill or while playing the objective. Reduces the strength of enemy equipment. – – Gloves: Marksman Gloves Reduced sway and flinch while ADS. – – Boots: Covert Sneakers Eliminates footstep sounds. – – Gear: Ghost T/V Camo While moving, blocks detection by UAVs, enemy radar sources, and Heartbeat Sensors. – – Lethal: Thermobaric Grenade Cookable grenade. Creates a large explosion that stuns, leaves a fiery residue, and increases the lethality of explosives for a period of time. – – Since the Kar98k is at its best in MW3 when playing fast, you’ll want to use perks that make that playstyle more effective. The best vest for this is the Compression Carrier, which immediately grants health regen after every kill. This can result in some incredible killstreaks, with each kill refreshing your health, setting you up for the next gunfight. The Marksman Gloves are a staple of every sniper rifle or marksman rifle class. The reduced idle sway and flinch they provide is invaluable, making shots far easier to land when under pressure. This perk is especially useful for stretching out the Kar98k’s range. The marksman rifle can technically kill in one shot at any distance, but you’ll need to land a headshot beyond 55 meters. Using the Covert Sneakers and Ghost T/V Camo together remains a top-tier option in MW3 when using any weapon aggressively. Being able to stay off the enemy’s radar as much as possible, while also having silent footsteps, is so strong for flanking. Even after Season 4 indirectly nerfed Covert Sneakers, the perk is still a great option that is hard to beat. For equipment, the Compression Carrier limits this loadout to just one lethal. It’s recommended to use this slot on the Thermobaric Grenade, which offers the best of both a Frag Grenade and a Molotov all in one. Ever since it was buffed in Season 1 Reloaded, the Thermobaric has been the best lethal grenade in Modern Warfare 3. How to unlock Kar98k in Modern Warfare 3 The Kar98k can be unlocked by completing Sector 5 on the Season 4 Battle Pass. This requires a total of 15 Battle Pass Tokens, assuming you go straight for the marksman rifle from the starting point. Best alternative to Kar98k in Modern Warfare 3 If it’s a fast-handling sniper rifle you are looking for, the XRK Stalker is a great alternative to the Kar98k. It can also be built to have a quick ADS speed but is more forgiving than the returning marksman rifle. Other great options to use on MW3’s maps instead of the Kar98k include the MORS, KV Inhibitor, and KATT-AMR. Alternatively, you might be better off using other weapons like the game’s best assault rifles to be as competitive as possible.

Best Kar98k loadouts for Warzone and Modern Warfare Infinity WardThanks to a new buff, the Kar98k is enjoying more attention in Warzone and Modern Warfare. Here, we break down your best options for classes and loadouts when using the marksman rifle. When it comes to snipers in Warzone, the Kar98k is some way down the pecking order. Both the HDR and AX-50 are significantly stronger, albeit slower. This makes them preferable in Warzone, and potentially less appealing in Modern Warfare. But, it has grown to become more and more popular in Warzone, particularly off the back of its buff in Infinity Ward’s recent weapon tuning update. Most notably, this update increased the Kar98k’s damage range – a seriously important change when it comes to viability in Warzone. Best Kar98k loadout for Warzone Monolithic Suppressor – Singuard Custom 27.6″ – Sniper Scope – Hollow Stock Mod – Stippled Grip Tape – The Singuard 27.6″ barrel massively boosts the Kar98k’s damage range, albeit at the expense of ADS time. This is then augmented further by the Monolithic Suppressor, which has quickly grown to become the must-have attachment in Warzone. It keeps you off enemy radars, while boosting range. Next up is the sniper scope which, as you’d expect, aids long-distance accuracy. It slows ADS slightly, but you’ll need a long distance scope of some kind in Verdansk. If you want to swap the sniper scope out for a thermal optic, then feel free. The Hollow Stock Mod will aid your strafing while ADS, which can be very useful in a long-range sniper battle. Finally, the Stippled Grip Tape reduces ADS time, going some way to alleviate the penalties incurred by the scope and barrel. Even with those attachments, the Kar98k’s zoom-in speed trumps the HDR or AX-50. Best Kar98k loadout for Modern Warfare Tac Laser – Singuard Custom 21.2″ – Sniper Scope – FTAC Sport Comb – Stippled Grip Tape – First up, you’ll notice that the barrel has been swapped out for the significantly shorter, lighter Singuard Custom 21.2″, which boosts damage and aids recoil control, without the major handling penalties that come with the heavier barrels. The Tac Laser aids hip fire and reduces ADS, improved further by the Stippled Grip Tape and FTAC Sport Comb. Being able to ADS as fast as possible is crucial in standard Modern Warfare, where engagements are more frequent and tend to be at close-ranges. Finally, the sniper scope is optional. It slows ADS slightly but remains viable in almost all scenarios (maybe not Shipment) but can be swapped out as per your preference. The Kar98k has slightly reduced one-hit areas compared to the HDR and AX-50, so you’ll have to aim slightly higher, to the stomach or above. In Warzone, you’ll want to aim for the head in almost every scenario, unless you know your opponent is weak. That rounds off our best Kar98k classes to use in Warzone and Modern Warfare! Tweet us @DexertoIntel to let us know your setups. Whether it can depose the HDR and AX-50 as the dominant sniper rifle remains to be seen, but its viability in Warzone has never been higher.